DRL 5.6 - 3640084250 - Maint Manual HMP400 Et M3P

FN HERSTAL
HMP 400
Heavy Machine gun Pod
Calibre .50 (12.7 x 99 mm) M3P machine gun
Maintenance manual
July 2006 (Change 1)
Catalog n° 3640084250
FN HERSTAL
HMP 400
Heavy Machine gun Pod
Pod container
July 2006 (Change 1)
Catalog n° 3640084260
THIS DOCUMENT IS THE PROPERTY OF FN HERSTAL, S.A.
IT MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED

TO A THIRD PARTY WITHOUT PRIOR FORMAL
CONSENT OF FN HERSTAL, S.A.
2006 07 EN -1- Catalog n° 3640084260

NOTES : - The descriptions and illustrations in this maintenance manual may
differ slightly from the present configuration of the product. This would
reflect the constant evolution of the product during its industrial life.
- Data in this manual is technical only and of no contractual value.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 : GENERALITIES
1.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................ 9

1.2. Description ......................................................................................................... 9
1.3. Technical data................................................................................................... 10
1.3.1. Dimensions and weight ........................................................................ 10
1.3.2. Functional data ................................................................................... 11
1.3.3. Ballistics .............................................................................................. 12
1.4. Abbreviations .................................................................................................... 13
CHAPTER 2 : IDENTIFICATION OF THE PARTS
2.1. How to order parts ............................................................................................ 15

2.2. Parts lists of the HMP 400 container .................................................................... 15
2.2.1. Container frame [ 1 ] ........................................................................... 17
2.2.2. Front and rear fairings [ 2 ] ................................................................... 27
2.2.3. Boresighting assembly [ 3 ] ................................................................... 31
2.2.4. Elastic cradle [ 4 ] ................................................................................ 35
2.2.5. Recocking system [ 5 ] .......................................................................... 39
2.2.6. Links collector [ 6 ] (only HMP 400 LC and HMP 400 LC-GFH) ................ 41
Links and cases collector [ 6 ] (only HMP 400 LCC and
HMP 400 LCC-GFH) .............................................................................. 43
2.2.7. Ammunition box [ 7 ] ........................................................................... 45
2.2.8. ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ] ...................................................... 47
CHAPTER 3 : SAFETY INFORMATION
3.1. General warnings and cautions .......................................................................... 50

3.2. Warnings and cautions especially applying to the M3P machine gun ..................... 51
CHAPTER 4 : RECEPTION OF THE WEAPON SYSTEM
....................................................................................................................... 53
2006 07 EN -2- Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 5 : USING THE HMP 400 POD WEAPON SYSTEM
5.1. Preparatory operations ....................................................................................... 55

5.1.1. Installation of the M3P machine gun into the pod ................................... 55
5.1.2. Checking procedure before installing the HMP 400 pod weapon system
on the carrier ...................................................................................... 61
5.1.3. Installation of the HMP 400 pod weapon system on the carrier ................ 63
5.2. Loading the HMP 400 pod weapon system .......................................................... 65
5.2.1. Loading the ammunition box [ 7 ] for the M3P machine gun .................... 65
5.2.2. Loading the M3P machine gun ............................................................. 71
5.2.3. After having loaded the HMP 400 pod weapon system............................ 75
5.3. Procedure if the carrier will not take off immediately ............................................. 77
5.4. After landing ..................................................................................................... 79
5.4.1. Safety procedure after the carrier has landed .......................................... 79
5.4.2. Checking the M3P machine gun in case all the ammunition has been
used ................................................................................................... 81
5.4.3. Unloading and checking the M3P machine gun if there is still ammunition
at its ammunition feeding and ejection section (no problem was detected
when carrying out the safety procedure after the carrier has landed) ......... 85
5.4.4. Removing and checking the M3P machine gun if a problem was detected
when carrying out the safety procedure after the carrier has landed .......... 87
5.4.5. Emptying the links (and cases) collectors ................................................ 93
5.4.6. Removal of the HMP 400 pod weapon system from the carrier ................ 95
CHAPTER 6 : TAKING THE M3P MACHINE GUN OUT OF THE POD
....................................................................................................................... 97
CHAPTER 7 : MAINTENANCE
7.1. Container frame [ 1 ] ......................................................................................... 99

7.2. Front and rear fairings [ 2 ] ................................................................................ 99
7.3. Boresighting assembly [ 3 ]............................................................................... 100
7.4. Elastic cradle [ 4 ] ........................................................................................... 100
7.5. Recocking system [ 5 ] ..................................................................................... 101
7.6. Links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] ......................................................................... 101
7.7. Ammunition box [ 7 ] ....................................................................................... 101
2006 07 EN -3- Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 8 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
8.1. Container frame [ 1 ] ....................................................................................... 103

8.1.1. Removal and reinstallation of the links collector (217) ........................... 103
8.1.2. Removal and reinstallation of a side door ((210) or (230)) ..................... 105
8.1.3. Removal and reinstallation of a links (and cases) collector retaining
pin (289)........................................................................................... 107
8.1.4. Removal and reinstallation of the elastic cradle support (181) ................ 107
8.1.5. Removal and reinstallation of the suspension lugs (175) ........................ 109
8.1.6. Removal and reinstallation of a fairing fixing loop (191) ........................ 109
8.1.7. Removal and reinstallation of the feed channel (220) ............................ 111
8.1.8. Removal and reinstallation of the cases ejection channel (231) .............. 113
8.1.9. Removal and reinstallation of a retaining pin (238/1)............................ 113
8.2. Front and rear fairings [ 2 ] .............................................................................. 115
8.2.1. Removal and reinstallation of a latch (125) .......................................... 115
8.3. Boresighting assembly [ 3 ]............................................................................... 117
8.3.1. Removal and reinstallation of the boresighting assembly (250) ............... 117
8.3.2. Removal and reinstallation of the recocking system supporting
plate (271) ........................................................................................ 119
8.3.3. Removal and reinstallation of the vertical adjustment and supporting
assembly (278) .................................................................................. 119
8.3.4. Disassembly of the vertical adjustment and supporting assembly (278)
into the boresighting support (251) and the vertical adjustment axis (267)
(and reassembly)................................................................................ 121
8.3.5. Removal and reinstallation of the lateral adjustment assembly (275) ....... 123
8.3.6. Disassembly of the lateral adjustment assembly (275) into the lateral
adjustment axis (261), the lateral guide assembly (276) and the lateral
guide support assembly (277) (and reassembly) .................................... 123
8.4. Elastic cradle [ 4 ] ........................................................................................... 125
8.4.1. Removal of the elastic cradle (401)...................................................... 125
8.4.2. Disassembly and reassembly of the elastic cradle (401) ......................... 127
2006 07 EN -4- Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 8 : DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (continued)
8.5. Recocking system [ 5 ] ..................................................................................... 131

8.5.1. Removal and reinstallation of the recocking assembly (501) .................. 131
8.5.2. Removal and reinstallation of the safety pin (513/1) .............................. 131
8.5.3. Removal and reinstallation of the locking assembly (520) which is
composed of the cocking device (E1) and its guide plate (E3) ................ 133
8.5.4. Disassembly and reassembly of the cocking device (E1) ......................... 133
8.6. Links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] ......................................................................... 135
8.6.1. Removal and reinstallation of a collector centering pin (282) ................. 135
8.6.2. Removal and reinstallation of a cable pass ring (283) ........................... 135
8.6.3. Removal and reinstallation of a roller (284) .......................................... 135
8.6.4. Removal and reinstallation of a slide (296)........................................... 137
8.6.5. Removal and reinstallation of the cases drain box (349)
(only HMP 400 LC and HMP 400 LC-GFH) ........................................... 137
8.7. Ammunition box [ 7 ] ....................................................................................... 139
8.7.1. Removal and reinstallation of an ammunition blade .............................. 139
8.8. ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ] ................................................................. 141
8.8.1. Releasing and reinstalling the electronic box ABA [ 8 ] ........................... 141
8.8.2. Releasing and reinstalling the weapon system connector (721) and its
cable ................................................................................................ 143
8.8.3. Removal and reinstallation of the other spare parts of the ABA [ 8 ] ........ 145
CHAPTER 9 : INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS
9.1. Harmonization procedure ................................................................................ 149

9.1.1. Introduction ....................................................................................... 149
9.1.2. Preparatory operations ....................................................................... 151
9.1.3. Plotting the boresighting frame onto the wall/panel............................... 153
9.1.4. Harmonization adjustments ................................................................. 155
9.2. Adjustment of the distance between the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking
system [ 5 ] ..................................................................................................... 159
CHAPTER 10 : SPECIAL INTERVENTIONS
10.1. Reversal of the feeding direction ....................................................................... 161
2006 07 EN -5- Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 11 : TROUBLESHOOTING
..................................................................................................................... 162
CHAPTER 12 : LISTS OF REPLACEMENT PARTS
12.1. Lists of Periodical Replacement Parts (PRP) ......................................................... 165

12.1.1. “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/9) for the elastic cradle [ 4 ] ............................ 165
12.2. Lists of Random Replacement Parts (RRP) ........................................................... 167
12.2.1. “Short-term RRP” (905/7) for the pod of the HMP 400 .......................... 167
12.2.2. “Long-term RRP” (905/130) for the pod of the HMP 400 LC and
the HMP 400 LC-GFH ....................................................................... 169
12.2.3. “Long-term RRP” (905/116) for the pod of the HMP 400 LCC and
the HMP 400 LCC-GFH ..................................................................... 171
CHAPTER 13 : ACCESSORIES
..................................................................................................................... 173
CHAPTER 14 : TOOLS FOR THE HMP 400
14.1. User tool kits for the HMP 400 ......................................................................... 175
14.1.1. HMP tool kit for users (940) ................................................................ 175
14.2. Armourer tool kits for the HMP 400 .................................................................. 181
14.2.1. M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1) ............................................... 181
14.3. Separate tools for the HMP 400 ....................................................................... 189
CHAPTER 15 : ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
15.1. ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ] ................................................................. 191
CHAPTER 16 : NOTES
..................................................................................................................... 193
2006 07 EN -6- Catalog n° 3640084260

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
2006 07 EN -7- Catalog n° 3640084260

(a) HMP 400 LC
(b) HMP 400 LCC

W
(c) HMP 400 LC-GFH

W
(d) HMP 400 LCC-GFH
W : Main differences with the HMP 400 LC

Fig. 1 - The 4 versions of the HMP 400 pod weapon system
2006 07 EN -8- Catalog n° 3640084260

1.1. INTRODUCTION
This manual is intended for the personnel responsible for the maintenance of the HMP 400 pod
weapon system.
The purpose of the manual is to familiarise the personnel with the operation and the
maintenance of the weapon system, to explain the removal, disassembly, repair and/or
replacement of the component parts and to supply the appropriate inspection, gauging and
adjustment procedures.
1.2. DESCRIPTION
The HMP 400 (Heavy Machine gun Pod), especially designed for use on light carriers, is a pod
weapon system containing a .50 (12.7 x 99 mm) calibre M3P machine gun.
The HMP 400 is available in 4 versions (Fig. 1) :
• The HMP 400 LC (Links Collector)
• The HMP 400 LCC (Links and Cases Collector)
• The HMP 400 LC-GFH (Links Collector - Guided blast effect Flash-Hider)
• The HMP 400 LCC-GFH (Links and Cases Collector - Guided blast effect Flash-Hider)
The HMP 400 consists of a pod into which the M3P machine gun as well as its control and
feeding systems have been provided.
The NATO-standard 14” suspension lugs on top of the pod enable rapid installation and
interoperability while the front opening in the pod allows the passage of the barrel with flash-hider
of the built-in machine gun.
The built-in M3P machine gun has been fixed to an elastic cradle which attenuates the recoil
forces while a special boresighting device ensures that the machine gun can be adjusted
according to the optical axis of the cockpit sight head.
The M3P machine gun as well as its feeding system, which comprises a removable ammunition
box with a capacity of 400 belt-fed cartridges, can both be transformed for either right-hand or left-
hand feeding without additional parts.
A special ‘remotely controlled’ recocking system allows the pilot (via cockpit commands) to cock
the machine gun or to place it into the safe condition.
When firing, the collection / ejection of the links and the empty cases (and some active cartridges)
depends on the version of the HMP 400.
In case of the HMP 400 LC and the HMP 400 LC-GFH, the links are collected into a special
links collector provided underneath the pod while the empty cases (and some active cartridges)
are ejected through an opening in the bottom of the pod.
In case of the HMP 400 LCC and the HMP 400 LCC-GFH, both the links and the empty cases
(and some active cartridges) are collected into a special links and cases collector provided
underneath the pod.
If the optional machine gun pod control PC16 or PC17 has been provided, a round counter
permanently informs the pilot about the quantity of cartridges remaining in the pod.
In case of the HMP 400 LC and the HMP 400 LCC, the M3P machine gun (with light barrel)
has been provided with a standard flash-hider.
In case of the HMP 400 LC-GFH and the HMP 400 LCC-GFH, the M3P machine gun (with
heavy barrel) has been provided with a special guided blast effect flash-hider.
Unless specified differently, all paragraphs of this Maintenance Manual apply to the 4 versions
of the HMP 400 which will in the other chapters of this manual simply be called HMP 400.
2006 07 EN -9- Catalog n° 3640084260

1.3. TECHNICAL DATA
1.3.1. Dimensions and weight
(a) Dimensions of the complete HMP 400 pod weapon system
HMP 400 LC HMP 400 LCC HMP 400 LC-GFH HMP 400 LCC-GFH
Overall length 1,940 mm (76.4“) 2,145 mm (84.4“)
Width 410 mm (16.1”)
Height 410 mm (16.1”) 450 mm (17.7”) 410 mm (16.1”) 450 mm (17.7”)
(b) Weight of the complete HMP 400 pod weapon system
HMP 400 HMP 400 HMP 400 HMP 400

LC LCC LC-GFH LCC-GFH
Empty ammunition box 86.5 kg 88.0 kg 88.0 kg 89.5 kg

(190.7 lb) (194.0 lb) (194.0 lb) (197.3 lb)
Full ammunition box 138.5 kg 140.0 kg 140.0 kg 141.5 kg

(305.3 lb) (308.7 lb) (308.7 lb) (312.0 lb)
After having fired the contents 94.0 kg 116.5 kg 95.5 kg 118.0 kg

of a full ammunition box (207.2 lb) (256.8 lb) (210.5 lb) (260.2 lb)
(c) Dimensions of the empty HMP 400 without M3P machine gun
HMP 400 LC HMP 400 LCC HMP 400 LC-GFH HMP 400 LCC-GFH
Length 1,907 mm (75.1“)
Width 410 mm (16.1”)
Height 410 mm (16.1”) 450 mm (17.7”) 410 mm (16.1”) 450 mm (17.7”)
(d) Dimensions and weight of the M3P machine gun

Length : With standard flash-hider : 1,800 mm (70.9”)
With guided blast effect flash-hider : 2,009 mm (79.1”)
Weight : With standard flash-hider : 37.2 kg (82.0 lb)
With guided blast effect flash-hider : 39.0 kg (86.0 lb)
(e) Dimensions and weight of the ammunition box

Length : 780 mm (30.7”)
Width : 150 mm (5.9”)
Height : 340 mm (13.4”)
Capacity : 400 linked cartridges (calibre .50 (12.7 mm))
Weight (empty) : 9.0 kg (19.8 lb)
Weight (with 400 cartridges belt) : 61.0 kg (134.5 lb)
2006 07 EN - 10 - Catalog n° 3640084260

1.3. TECHNICAL DATA (continued)
1.3.1. Dimensions and weight (continued)
(f) Weight of the ammunition (calibre .50 (12.7 mm))
Total weight of 400 cartridges : 44.8 kg (98.8 lb)
Total weight of 400 M9 closed links : 7.2 kg (15.9 lb)
Total weight of a 400-cartridge belt with M9 closed links : 52.0 kg (114.7 lb)
1.3.2. Functional data
(a) Pod
Distance between
suspension lugs : 355 mm (14”) (NATO standard)
Max. speed : 0.7 mach
(b) M3P machine gun
Operating principle : Short recoil of the barrel

Trigger action : Solenoid
Calibre : .50 (12.7 x 99 mm)
Firing mode : Automatic
Feeding : Belt-fed cartridges fitted on disintegrating links (M9 closed links
according to the standard MIL-L-45923)
Ejection : Empty cases : Downwards
Links : For right-hand feeding : To the left
For left-hand feeding : To the right
Barrel length : 915 mm (36.0”)
Barrel weight : For standard flash-hider : 5.0 kg (11.0 lb)
For guided blast effect flash-hider : 6.6 kg (14.6 lb)
Rifled length : 810 mm (31.9”)
Barrel cooling : By air
Number of grooves : 8
Twist and direction : 381 mm (15.0”) right-hand
Aiming : According to the optical axis of the cockpit sight head
Rate of fire : 950 - 1100 rpm
(c) Recocking system
Main voltage : 28 +4/-6 VDC

Nominal load : 75 daN (28 VDC) (5.5 A ± 10%)
Max. load : 120 daN (28 VDC) (7.2 A ± 10%)
Torque limiter : 180 daN
2006 07 EN - 11 - Catalog n° 3640084260

1.3.3. Ballistics
.50 (12.7 x 99 mm) calibre ammunition used with the M3P machine gun of
the HMP 400
Overall length : 138.43 mm (5.45”)
Cartridge weight : From 106 to 118 g (from 0.23 to 0.26 lb)
Bullet weight : From 33.17 to 45.9 g (from 0.07 to 0.10 lb)
Muzzle velocity : Approx. 880 m/s
Initial kinetic energy : 16,650 J
Effective range : 1,850 m (± 6,000 ft) (depending on the ammunition)
Maximum range : 6,500 m (± 21,000 ft)
Main types of ammunition :
Name Bullet tip colour Ammunition type

(according to
the standard
STANAG
2953/AOP-2B)
M33 None Ball
M17 Red T (Tracer)
AP-M8 Black AP (Armour - Piercing)
API-M8 Silver API (Armour - Piercing - Incendiary)
APT-115 Red and black APT (Armour - Piercing - Tracer)
APIT-M20 Red and silver APIT (Armour - Piercing - Incendiary - Tracer)
APEI-169 Silver and yellow APEI (Armour - Piercing - Explosive - Incendiary)
The specifications and other figures are given for indication only and have no contractual value.
FN HERSTAL S.A. reserves the right to modify or to change the specifications at any time without prior notice.
2006 07 EN - 12 - Catalog n° 3640084260

1.4. ABBREVIATIONS
A: Ampere
ABA : Adaptation Box Assembly
CAT n° :Catalog number
cm : Centimetres
daN : Deca Newton (10 N)
dia. : Diametre
Fig. : Figure
ft : Feet
g: Grams
GFH : Guided blast effect Flash-Hider
HMP : Heavy Machine gun Pod
J: Joule
kg : Kilograms
lb : Pounds
LC : Links Collector
LCC : Links and Cases Collector
m: Metres
M3P : .50 calibre machine gun
MAS : Master Armament Switch
mm : Millimetres
m/s : Metres/second
N: Newton
N° : Number
NATO : North Atlantic Treaty Organization
OREA : “Outil de Réparation et d’Entretien Armes” (special tool for weapon repair and
maintenance)
OREAA : “Outil de Réparation et d’Entretien Armes Aéronautiques” (special tool for
aeronautical weapon repair and maintenance)
PRP : Periodical Replacement Parts
Qty : Quantity
RDS : Rounds
rpm : Rounds per minute
RRP : Random Replacement Parts
s: Seconds
UT : Universal Tool (commercial tool not considered as a FN Herstal product, but which
can be supplied on special request)
V: Volt
“: Inch
2006 07 EN - 13 - Catalog n° 3640084260

[2]
[7]
[5]
[8]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[2]
HMP 400 LC
HMP 400 LC-GFH
HMP 400 LCC

HMP 400 LCC-GFH
[6]
Fig. 2.a - The 8 main groups of the HMP 400 container
2006 07 EN - 14 - Catalog n° 3640084260

The following parts lists only apply to the HMP 400 container. For more information
about the M3P machine gun, refer to the corresponding documentation.
2.1. HOW TO ORDER PARTS
For ordering parts, refer to the corresponding ‘Catalog of parts and accessories’.
Please note that there are 2 ‘Catalogs of parts and accessories’ for the HMP 400 weapon system :
one for the versions HMP 400 LC and HMP 400 LCC and another for the versions HMP 400 LC-GFH
and HMP 400 LCC-GFH.
2.2. PARTS LISTS OF THE HMP 400 CONTAINER
The HMP 400 container is subdivided into 8 groups (Fig. 2.a) :
Group Description Fig. Paragraph
[1] Container frame (part I) 2.b.1 2.2.1.1

Container frame (part II) 2.b.2 2.2.1.2
[2] Front and rear fairings 2.c 2.2.2
[3] Boresighting assembly 2.d 2.2.3
[4] Elastic cradle 2.e 2.2.4
[5] Recocking system 2.f 2.2.5
[6] Links collector 2.2.6

(HMP 400 LC and HMP 400 LC-GFH) 2.g.1
Links and cases collector

(HMP 400 LCC and HMP 400 LCC-GFH) 2.g.2
[7] Ammunition box 2.h 2.2.7
[8] ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) 2.i 2.2.8
2006 07 EN - 15 - Catalog n° 3640084260

217
900 (*)
210
Also refer to 216 (°)
3x
Fig. 2.b.2
Fig. 2.c
Fig. 2.d
Fig. 2.g
A1
161
218
7x
A2
247
A3
249
260
461
2x
a
289
4x 182 246
See Fig. 2.e
184 216 (°)

183 4x
3x
4x
See Fig. 2.b.2
460
463
181
466 465
230
464
See Fig. 2.e
a
Fig. 2.b.1 - Container frame [ 1 ] (part I)
2006 07 EN - 16 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2. PARTS LISTS OF THE HMP 400 CONTAINER (continued)
2.2.1. Container frame [ 1 ]
2.2.1.1. Container frame [ 1 ] (part I)
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.b.1)
CAT n° Description Qty per unit
900 HMP 400RC assembly (*) 1

161 > Central part, stripped (main body) 1
181 > > Front attach, support 1
182 > > Screw, front support 4
183 > > Washer, flat 4
184 > > Nut, front support 4
210 > Side, door assembly (right) 1
216 > Pin, hinge, side panel (°) 6
217 > Links collector 1
218 > Screw, head flat, full thread 7
230 > Side, door assembly (left) 1
289 > Pin, retaining, compartment assembly 2
249 > > Chains or Lanyard assembly 1
246 > > > Slotted cheese head screw 1
247 > > > Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut, PA insert 1
260 > > > Lanyard avibank 1
460 > Items, retaining, cradle 1
463 > > Washer 1
465 > > Split pin 1
466 > > Set of thickness washers 1
461 > Bolt, elastic cradle 1
464 > Nut, locking 1
> Also refer to § 2.2.1.2, § 2.2.2, § 2.2.3, § 2.2.6
(*) The HMP 400 assembly (900) is different if the HMP 400 pod weapon system has been
provided with a links collector [ 6 ] (HMP 400 LC and HMP 400 LC-GFH) or with a links
and cases collector [ 6 ] (HMP 400 LCC and HMP 400 LCC-GFH) (also refer to the
appropriate ‘Catalog of parts and accessories’).
(°) The 2 x 3 hinge pins (216) are not all oriented the same. For more information about
the correct orientation of each hinge pin, refer to § 8.1.2.
The following parts or assemblies cannot be ordered (separately) : a number has however been
attributed in order to facilitate the descriptions throughout this Maintenance Manual :
N° Description Qty per unit
A1 Right side door assembly 1

A2 Container body 1
A3 Links (and cases) collector retaining pin body 1
2006 07 EN - 17 - Catalog n° 3640084260

217
900 (*)
210
3x
Fig. 2.b.2
Fig. 2.c
Fig. 2.d
Fig. 2.g
A1
161
218
7x
A2
247
A3
249
260
461
2x
a
289
4x 182 246
See Fig. 2.e
184 216 (°)

183 4x
3x
4x
See Fig. 2.b.2
460
463
181
466 465
230
464
See Fig. 2.e
a
2006 07 EN - 18 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.1. Container frame [ 1 ] (continued)
2.2.1.1. Container frame [ 1 ] (part I) (continued)
(b) Description
The HMP 400 assembly (900), which can be considered as the basic assembly of the
HMP 400 pod weapon system (also refer to the (*) on the previous page), comprises the
following assemblies and components :
- All the components of the container frame [ 1 ], except the 2 suspension lugs (175)
as well as the feed channel (220) and its fasteners (refer to this § 2.2.1)
- The front and rear fairings [ 2 ] (refer to § 2.2.2)
- The boresighting assembly [ 3 ] (catalog number (250)) (refer to § 2.2.3)
- The links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] (refer to § 2.2.6)
The container frame [ 1 ] consists of the container body assembly (161) onto or into which
the following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The assemblies and components represented on Fig. 2.b.2 and described in

§ 2.2.1.2
- The right side door assembly (A1) as well as the left side door (230)
The right side door assembly (A1) consists of the right side door (210) onto which the links
collector (217) has been fixed by means of the 7 screws (218).
The links collector (217) is used, in combination with the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ],
to collect the links ejected by the M3P machine gun.
The right side door assembly (A1) and the left side door (230) are fixed to the container body
(A2) by means of the 2 x 3 hinge pins (216).
The 2 x 3 hinge pins (216) are not all oriented the same. For more information about the
correct orientation of each hinge pin, refer to § 8.1.2.
Please note that, in case of a right-hand feeding configuration, the links collector (217) is
provided on the left side door (230).
2006 07 EN - 19 - Catalog n° 3640084260

217
900 (*)
210
3x
Fig. 2.b.2
Fig. 2.c
Fig. 2.d
Fig. 2.g
A1
161
218
7x
A2
247
A3
249
260
461
2x
a
289
4x 182 246
See Fig. 2.e
184 216 (°)

183 4x
3x
4x
See Fig. 2.b.2
460
463
181
466 465
230
464
See Fig. 2.e
a
2006 07 EN - 20 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.1.1. Container frame [ 1 ] (part I) (continued)
(b) Description (continued)
- The 2 links (and cases) collector retaining pins (289) which are used, at the left and
right sides, to secure the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] (also refer to § 2.2.6) after the
latter has been installed, from the rear side, underneath the container body (A2)
A links (and cases) collector retaining pin (289) consists of a retaining pin body (A3) and a
fixing chain assembly (249).
A fixing chain assembly (249) is composed of a Lanyard avibank (260), a screw (246) and
a nut (247).
The screw (246) and the nut (247) are used to fix the Lanyard avibank (260) to the
corresponding side of the container body (A2).
The container body assembly (161) consists of the container body (A2) provided with the
elastic cradle support (181) which is used to support the elastic cradle [ 4 ] (also refer to
§ 2.2.4).
The elastic cradle support (181) is fixed onto the rear side of the front inner frame of the
container body (A2) by means of the 4 screws (182), the 4 washers (183) and the 4 nuts (184).
The elastic cradle [ 4 ] is fixed onto its support (181) by means of the bolt (461), the retaining
items (460) (composed of the washer (463), the washers set (466) and the split pin (465)) and
the locking nut (464).
2006 07 EN - 21 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Also part of 900 238/1
(Fig. 2.b.1)
2x
2x 175
529
2x
2x c
d 2x
419 2x 161
(Fig. 2.b.1)
4x
232
c1
231
d1 a
d2 4x
4x
c2 4x
229 b
192
228 309
224
181
(Fig. 2.b.1)
4x
191 (*) 229
Also part of 900

(Fig. 2.b.1)
228
220
b
Fig. 2.b.2 - Container frame [ 1 ] (part II)
2006 07 EN - 22 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.1.2. Container frame [ 1 ] (part II)
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.b.2)
175 Suspension lug 2

220 Channel, feed, assembly 1
224 Cross recessed countersunk (flat)head screw 1
228 Cross recessed pan head screw 2
229 Plain washer 2
900 HMP 400RC assembly (refer to § 2.2.1.1)
191 > Loop, fixing fairings (*) 4
192 > Nut, securing loop 8
231 > Channel, ejection, cases 1
232 > Screw, machine pan head, cross-recessed 5
238/1 > Ammunition box pin, assembly 2
309 > Stirrup, washer 4
419 > Nut 2
529 > Screw 2
(*) Two fairing fixing loops (191) are screwed from the front side and two are screwed from
the rear side.
(b) Description
The container frame [ 1 ] consists of the container body assembly (161) onto or into which
the following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The assemblies and components represented on Fig. 2.b.1 and described in

§ 2.2.1.1
- The 2 suspension lugs (175) which are screwed into the upper side of the container
body (A2)
- The 4 fairing fixing loops (191) which are screwed, each time at the left and right sides,
into the front and rear sides of the container body (A2)
The 2 front fairing fixing loops (191), screwed from the front side, are used to catch the
latches (125) of the front fairing (120) (also refer to § 2.2.2).
The 2 rear fairing fixing loops (191), screwed from the rear side, are used to catch the
latches (125) of the rear fairing (140) (also refer to § 2.2.2).
Once a fairing fixing loop (191) is correctly screwed into position (the corresponding side of
the corresponding fairing engages correctly the container body (A2)), the loop is locked by
means of a washer (309) and 2 nuts (192).
Please note that the 4 fairing fixing loops (191), the 4 washers (309) and the 8 nuts (192)
are also parts of the HMP 400 assembly (900) (also refer to § 2.2.1.1).
2006 07 EN - 23 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Also part of 900 238/1
(Fig. 2.b.1)
2x
2x 175
529
2x
2x c
d 2x
419 2x 161
(Fig. 2.b.1)
4x
232
c1
231
d1 a
d2 4x
4x
c2 4x
229 b
192
228 309
224
181
(Fig. 2.b.1)
4x
191 (*) 229
Also part of 900

(Fig. 2.b.1)
228
220
b
Fig. 2.b.2 - Container frame [ 1 ] (part II)
2006 07 EN - 24 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.1.2. Container frame [ 1 ] (part II) (continued)
- The cases ejection channel (231) which is fixed to the inner bottom frame of the
container body (A2) by means of 4 screws (232)
The 5th screw (232) fixes the front end of the cases ejection channel (231) to the rear end of
the elastic cradle support (181).
Please note that the cases ejection channel (231) as well as the 5 screws (232) are also parts
of the HMP 400 assembly (900) (also refer to § 2.2.1.1).
- The feed channel (220) which conveys the ammunition from the ammunition box [ 7 ]
(also refer to § 2.2.7) towards the feed tray (212) of the M3P machine gun
The feed channel (220) is fixed inside the container body (A2) by means of the screw (224)
(used at the lower front side) and the 2 screws (228) used in combination with the 2 washers
(229) (used at the front side and at the lower rear side).
- The 2 retaining pins (238/1) which are used to secure the ammunition box [ 7 ] (also
refer to § 2.2.7) after the latter has been slid into position on the supporting rails at the
front side of the container body (A2)
Each retaining pin (238/1) is secured to the corresponding supporting rail by means of a
screw (529) and a nut (419).
Please note that the 2 retaining pins (238/1), the 2 screws (529) and the 2 nuts (419) are
also parts of the HMP 400 assembly (900) (also refer to § 2.2.1.1).
2006 07 EN - 25 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Also parts of 900
(Fig. 2.b.1)
128
140
4x
122
B1
b
142
127
144
6x
123 b 125
126
a 142
122 B1
123
128
127
4x
144
6x
a
126
125
120
Fig. 2.c - Front and rear fairings [ 2 ]
2006 07 EN - 26 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.2. Front and rear fairings [ 2 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.c)

120 > Fairing, front, assembly 1
122 > > Pin, centering, fairing 2
123 > > Bracket, latch 2
125 > > Latch, complete 2
126 > > Axis, latch 2
127 > > Pin, retaining, axis 2
128 > > Rivet, securing, centering pin 8
142 > > Washer 2
144 > > Rivet, bracket latch 12
140 > Fairing, rear, assembly 1
122 > > Pin, centering, fairing 2
123 > > Bracket, latch 2
125 > > Latch, complete 2
126 > > Axis, latch 2
127 > > Pin, retaining, axis 2
128 > > Rivet, securing, centering pin 8
142 > > Washer 2
144 > > Rivet, bracket latch 12
B1 Latch assembly 4
2006 07 EN - 27 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Also parts of 900
(Fig. 2.b.1)
128
140
4x
122
B1
b
142
127
144
6x
123 b 125
126
a 142
122 B1
123
128
127
4x
144
6x
a
126
125
120
Fig. 2.c - Front and rear fairings [ 2 ]
2006 07 EN - 28 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.2. Front and rear fairings [ 2 ] (continued)
(b) Description
The front and rear fairings [ 2 ] (comprising the front fairing (120) and the rear fairing
(140)) are removable covers protecting the front and rear parts of the HMP 400 container.
Please note that the front and rear fairings [ 2 ] are also parts of the HMP 400 assembly (900)
(also refer to § 2.2.1.1).
Both the front and rear fairings (120) and (140) include 2 (left and right) centering pins
(122) and 2 (left and right) latch assemblies (B1).
A centering pin (122) is fixed onto the corresponding inner side of the body of the corresponding
fairing by means of 4 rivets (128).
A latch assembly (B1) consists of a bracket (123) provided with a latch (125) which is held in a
pivoting position by means of an axis (126) which, on its turn, is held in place by means of a
retaining pin (127) used in combination with a washer (142).
The bracket (123) itself is fixed onto the corresponding inner side of the body of the
corresponding fairing by means of 6 rivets (144).
2006 07 EN - 29 - Catalog n° 3640084260

250
272
Also part of 900
259 (Fig. 2.b.1)
3x
251 264
271
268
273 3x
a
274 3x
265
278
267
263
c
266
275
d C2
262
276
277
d
257 4x b
b C1 261
2x
253
256
255
A2 2x
(Fig. 2.b.1)
254
2x
Fig. 2.d - Boresighting assembly [ 3 ]
2006 07 EN - 30 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.3. Boresighting assembly [ 3 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.d)

250 > Boresighting system assembly 1
254 > > Bolt-machine, aircraft 2
255 > > Washer, screw, support 2
264 > > Screw, fixing boresighting system support 2
265 > > Nut, bolt, boresighting system support 2
268 > > Plate, spacer 1
271 > > Support, recocking system 1
272 > > Bolt, recocking system support 3
273 > > Washer 3
274 > > Nut, support, screw 3
275 > > Traverse adjusting assembly 1
261 > > > Axis, lateral adjusting 1
262 > > > Nut, fixing, lateral axis 1
266 > > > Pin 1
276 > > > Lateral guide assembly 1
277 > > > Traverse adjusting bloc assembly 1
253 > > > > Support, lateral slider 1
256 > > > > Nut, screw support 2
257 > > > > Rivet 4
278 > > Support positioning assembly 1
251 > > > Support, rear, gun, boresighting system 1
259 > > > Screw, fixing, vertical adjusting axis 1
263 > > > Pin 1
267 > > > Axis, vertical adjustment 1
C1 Lateral adjustment slider 1

C2 Vertical bush 1
2006 07 EN - 31 - Catalog n° 3640084260

250
272
Also part of 900
259 (Fig. 2.b.1)
3x
251 264
271
268
273 3x
a
274 3x
265
278
267
263
c
266
275
d C2
262
276
277
d
257 4x b
b C1 261
2x
253
256
255
A2 2x
(Fig. 2.b.1)
254
2x
Fig. 2.d - Boresighting assembly [ 3 ]
2006 07 EN - 32 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.3. Boresighting assembly [ 3 ] (continued)
(b) Description
The boresighting assembly [ 3 ] (catalog number (250)) supports the rear part of the M3P
machine gun and allows the machine gun to be harmonized (also refer to § 9.1).
The rear part of the M3P machine gun engages the guides of the boresighting assembly [ 3 ] so
that the machine gun can correctly move back and forth when the recoil forces generated when
firing the gun are attenuated by the elastic cradle [ 4 ] (also refer to § 2.2.4).
Please note that the boresighting assembly [ 3 ] is also part of the HMP 400 assembly (900)
(also refer to § 2.2.1.1).
The boresighting assembly [ 3 ] consists of the following assemblies and components :
• The lateral adjustment assembly (275) which has been fixed onto the inner bottom
frame of the container body (A2) by means of the 2 bolts (254) and the 2 washers
(255) and which is composed of :
- The lateral guide assembly (276) consisting of the lateral adjustment slider (C1) into
which the vertical bush (C2) has been fitted
- The lateral guide support assembly (277) consisting of the lateral guide support
(253) provided with the 2 nut plates (256) fixed by means of the 4 rivets (257)
The 2 nut plates (256) accept the 2 bolts (254) used to fix the boresighting assembly [ 3 ]
onto the inner bottom frame of the container body (A2).
- The lateral adjustment axis (261), screwed into the lateral adjustment slider (C1) and
into the lateral guide support (253)
The lateral adjustment axis (261) is held in position by the fixed lateral guide support
assembly (277).
The lateral guide assembly (276) moves along the lateral adjustment axis (261) when the
latter is turned : the movement towards the left side is restricted by the axis itself while the
movement towards the right side is restricted by the nut (262) which has been secured to
the axis by means of the pin (266).
• The vertical adjustment and supporting assembly (278) which consists of the
boresighting support (251) fixed onto the vertical adjustment axis (267) by means of
the screw (259) which, on its turn, is secured to the axis by means of the pin (263)
When the vertical adjustment axis (267), screwed into the vertical bush (C2) of the lateral
guide assembly (276), is turned to the left/right, the boresighting support (251) moves
downwards/upwards.
• The 2 fixing screws (264) which are used, together with the spacer plate (268) and the
2 nuts (265), to tightly secure the whole boresighting assembly [ 3 ] once it has
correctly been harmonized
• The recocking system supporting plate (271) onto which the recocking system [ 5 ]
(also refer to § 2.2.5) is mounted
The recocking system supporting plate (271) is fixed onto the boresighting support (251) by
means of the 3 bolts (272), the 3 washers (273) and the 3 nuts (274).
2006 07 EN - 33 - Catalog n° 3640084260

423
420 422
401 D2
433/1
422
413/1 431/1
2x
2x
414 435/1
439/1
461
2x
(Fig. 2.b.1)
2x
438
2x
D1 2x
2x
a
436
2x 437
412/1 415/1
463
(Fig. 2.b.1)
466
(Fig. 2.b.1)
465
464 (Fig. 2.b.1)
(Fig. 2.b.1)
b
Fig. 2.e - Elastic cradle [ 4 ]
2006 07 EN - 34 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.4. Elastic cradle [ 4 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.e)
401 Cradle, elastic, assembly 1

412/1 > Guide, cradle 2
413/1 > Stop 2
414 > Spring, compression, front 2
415/1 > Bush 1
420 > Slide assembly, cradle 1
422 > > Spring type straight pin, slotted 2
423 > > Spring, retaining, locking pin 1
431/1 > Pin, securing, assembly 1
433/1 > > Ring 1
435/1 > Spring, compression, rear 2
436 > Spring washer 2
437 > Nut, locking, guide 2
438 > Split pin 2
439/1 > Bush, rear stop 2
D1 Elastic cradle frame 1

D2 Elastic cradle slide body 1
2006 07 EN - 35 - Catalog n° 3640084260

423
420 422
401 D2
433/1
422
413/1 431/1
2x
2x
414 435/1
439/1
461
2x
(Fig. 2.b.1)
2x
438
2x
D1 2x
2x
a
436
2x 437
412/1 415/1
463
(Fig. 2.b.1)
466
(Fig. 2.b.1)
465
464 (Fig. 2.b.1)
(Fig. 2.b.1)
b
Fig. 2.e - Elastic cradle [ 4 ]
2006 07 EN - 36 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.4. Elastic cradle [ 4 ] (continued)
(b) Description
The elastic cradle [ 4 ] (catalog number (401)) supports the front part of the M3P machine
gun and is used to attenuate the recoil forces generated when the machine gun is firing.
The elastic cradle [ 4 ] is fixed to its support (181) by means of the bolt (461), the retaining items
(460) (composed of the washer (463), the washers set (466) and the split pin (465)) and the
locking nut (464) (also refer to § 2.2.1.1).
The attenuation of the recoil forces generated by the M3P machine gun is obtained by the front
compression springs (414) used in combination with the rear compression springs (435/1).
The elastic cradle [ 4 ] consists of the elastic cradle frame (D1) onto or into which the
following assemblies and components have been installed :
• The 2 elastic cradle guides (412/1) which support the elastic cradle slide assembly
(420) and which allow the attenuated back and forth movement of the assembly
The elastic cradle guides (412/1) have been fitted, from the front side, into the front
and rear lugs of the elastic cradle frame (D1) and each guide has been provided with
the following components :
- A front stop bush (413/1) and a front compression spring (414), both located
between the corresponding front lug of the elastic cradle frame (D1) and the front
side of the elastic cradle slide assembly (420)
- A rear compression spring (435/1) and a rear stop bush (439/1), both located
between the rear side of the elastic cradle slide assembly (420) and the
corresponding rear lug of the elastic cradle frame (D1)
- A spring washer (436), a locking nut (437) and a split pin (438) used to secure the
elastic cradle guide (412/1) into position on the elastic cradle frame (D1)
The elastic cradle slide assembly (420) consists of the elastic cradle slide body (D2)
with, at the left and right sides, the 2 spring pins (422) which have been provided to
allow the installation of the locking pin retaining spring (423).
The elastic cradle slide body (D2) has also been provided with the 2 holes for the insertion of
the locking pin (431/1) which is used to secure the M3P machine gun into position on the
elastic cradle [ 4 ].
The locking pin (431/1), composed of the pin body and the ring (433/1), should be inserted
from the side opposite to the feeding side of the M3P machine gun.
The locking pin retaining spring (423) has been designed to engage the groove in the
locking pin (431/1) so that the pin is correctly retained once it has been installed. In order to
be able to carry out this operation, the locking pin retaining spring (423) should be fitted
onto the spring pin (422) at the side opposite to the feeding side of the M3P machine gun.
• The bush (415/1) which has been fitted, from underneath, into the elastic cradle frame
(D1) and which allows the passage of the bolt (461) in order to ensure a correct
installation of the elastic cradle [ 4 ] onto its support (181)
2006 07 EN - 37 - Catalog n° 3640084260

513/1
E2
511
271
(Fig. 2.d)
512
512
237
512
512
E3 237
6x
546
522/1
E1
545
520
536/1
523/1
530/1 501
Fig. 2.f - Recocking system [ 5 ]
2006 07 EN - 38 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.5. Recocking system [ 5 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.f)
237 Lockwire 1 (*)

501 Recocking system assembly 1
511 > Actuator, linear assembly 1
513/1 > > Safety pin, cocking actuator 1
520 > Locking system assembly 1
522/1 > > Base 1
523/1 > > Pin, pawl 1
530/1 > > Pawl, recocking stud assembly 1
536/1 > > Spring type straight pin, slotted 1
545 > > Spring, pawl 1
546 > Screw, mushroom, cross-recessed head 6
512 Screw, fixing 4
(*) The lockwire (237) should be cut into 2 pieces which should then be used to secure
each of the 2 pairs of screws (512)
E1 Cocking device 1
E2 Actuator pin 1
E3 Cocking device guide plate 1
(b) Description
The recocking system [ 5 ] allows to cock the M3P machine gun and to place it into the
safe condition.
The recocking system [ 5 ] consists of the recocking assembly (501) which has been fixed onto
the recocking system supporting plate (271) (also refer to § 2.2.3) by means of the 4 screws
(512) secured by the lockwire (237).
The recocking assembly (501) consists of the locking assembly (520) (composed of the
cocking device (E1) and its guide plate (E3)) which has been fixed onto the actuator
assembly (511) by means of the 6 screws (546).
The safety pin (513/1) correctly secures the rear nut of the actuator assembly (511).
The cocking device (E1) fits onto the actuator pin (E2) and consists of the pawl (530/1) which
has been fixed in a spring-tensioned position on the base (522/1) by means of the hinge pin
(523/1), the spring pin (536/1) and the spring (545).
2006 07 EN - 39 - Catalog n° 3640084260

349
Also part of 900

308 283
(Fig. 2.b.1)
3x
280
2x
F1
292
291
2x
2x
282
296 (°)
2x
2x
2x
284 (*) 2x
307
286 297
6x
6x
6x
4x
285
329 350
Fig. 2.g.1 - Links collector [ 6 ] (only HMP 400 LC and HMP 400 LC-GFH)
(*) Three rollers (284) have been provided at the left side and three at the right side.
(°) One slide (296) has been provided at the left side and the other at the right side.
2006 07 EN - 40 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.6. Links collector [ 6 ] (only HMP 400 LC and HMP 400 LC-GFH)
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.g.1)

280 > Links collector 1
329 > > Links collector subassembly 1
282 > > > Pin, centering, collector 2
283 > > > Pass cable 3
284 > > > Roller 6
285 > > > Screw, roller 6
286 > > > Washer, screw, roller 6
291 > > > Washer 2
292 > > > Nut 2
296 > > > Slide 2
297 > > > Screw 2
307 > > > Washer 2
308 > > > Nut 2
349 > > Box case drain lower assembly 1
350 > > Screw, machine pan head, cross-recessed 4
F1 Links collector body 1
(b) Description
The links collector [ 6 ] (catalog number (280)) is installed, from the rear side, underneath
the container body (A2) and is used, in combination with the links collector (217) (also refer
to § 2.2.1.1), to collect the links ejected by the M3P machine gun. It consists of the links
collector subassembly (329) into which the cases drain box (349) (for the ejection of the
empty cases (and some active cartridges)) has been fixed by means of the 4 screws (350).
On its turn, the links collector subassembly (329) consists of the links collector body (F1)
onto which the following components have been installed :
• The 2 collector centering pins (282) (one at each side) which ensure a correct
positioning of the front part of the links collector [ 6 ] and which are secured by means of
the 2 nuts (292), used in combination with the 2 washers (291)
• The 3 cable pass rings (283) fitted into the corresponding holes at the rear side of the
links collector body (F1)
• The 6 rollers (284) (three at each side) which ensure a smooth installation of the links
collector [ 6 ] and which are secured by means of the 6 screws (285), used in
combination with the 6 washers (286)
• The 2 slides (296) (one at each side) which ensure a correct positioning of the rear part
of the links collector [ 6 ] and which are secured by means of the 2 screws (297) and the
2 nuts (308), used in combination with the 2 washers (307)
2006 07 EN - 41 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Also part of 900 308 283
(Fig. 2.b.1)
3x
280 2x
F2
292
291
2x
2x
282
296 (°)
2x
2x
2x
2x
284 (*) 307
286 297
6x
6x
6x
285
Fig. 2.g.2 - Links and cases collector [ 6 ] (only HMP 400 LCC and HMP 400 LCC-GFH)
2006 07 EN - 42 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.6. Links and cases collector [ 6 ] (only HMP 400 LCC and HMP 400 LCC-GFH)
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.g.2)

280 > Links and cases collector 1
282 > > Pin, centering, collector 2
283 > > Pass cable 3
284 > > Roller 6
285 > > Screw, roller 6
286 > > Washer, screw, roller 6
291 > > Washer 2
292 > > Nut 2
296 > > Slide 2
297 > > Screw 2
307 > > Washer 2
308 > > Nut 2
F2 Links and cases collector body 1
(b) Description
The links and cases collector [ 6 ] (catalog number (280)) is installed, from the rear side,
underneath the container body (A2) and is used, in combination with the links collector
(217) (also refer to § 2.2.1.1), to collect the links and the empty cases (and some active
cartridges) ejected by the M3P machine gun.
The links and cases collector [ 6 ] consists of the links and cases collector body (F2) onto
which the following components have been installed :
• The 2 collector centering pins (282) (one at each side) which ensure a correct
positioning of the front part of the links and cases collector [ 6 ] and which are secured
by means of the 2 nuts (292), used in combination with the 2 washers (291)
• The 3 cable pass rings (283) fitted into the corresponding holes at the rear side of the
links and cases collector body (F2)
• The 6 rollers (284) (three at each side) which ensure a smooth installation of the links
and cases collector [ 6 ] and which are secured by means of the 6 screws (285), used
in combination with the 6 washers (286)
• The 2 slides (296) (one at each side) which ensure a correct positioning of the rear part
of the links and cases collector [ 6 ] and which are secured by means of the 2 screws
(297) and the 2 nuts (308), used in combination with the 2 washers (307)
2006 07 EN - 43 - Catalog n° 3640084260

351
301
383
f a
4x 356
b
355 a
355
j p
354
G1
354
355 n
4x k p 355
353
h
d
e o
4x o
354 j
n d 354
4x
355
m 4x 355 i
c
352/1 l k
h c
353 i
353
352
g 4x
354
f 354
e
352
4x b
a
Fig. 2.h - Ammunition box [ 7 ]
2006 07 EN - 44 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.7. Ammunition box [ 7 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.h)
301 Ammunition box 400 rds assembly + blades 1

351 > Blade, superior, ammunition box for 400 rds 1
352 > Spring, blade, ammunition box 5
352/1 > Spring, blade, ammunition box 1
353 > Axis, blade, ammunition box 6
354 > Plain washer 12
355 > Split pin 12
356 > Blade, inferior, ammunition box for 400 rds 4
383 > Blade, central, ammunition box for 400 rds 1
G1 Ammunition box body 1
(b) Description
The ammunition box [ 7 ] (catalog number (301)) consists of the ammunition box body
(G1) into which the 4 inferior ammunition blades (356), the central ammunition blade
(383) and the superior ammunition blade (351) have been installed.
The 6 ammunition blades have been provided inside the ammunition box body (G1) in order to
ensure an easy and correct loading of the ammunition belt into the box.
Each ammunition blade has been fixed into a spring-tensioned position onto the front inner side
of the ammunition box body (G1) by means of an ammunition blade axis (353) and a
corresponding spring, held in place (at the outer side of the box) by means of 2 washers (354)
and 2 split pins (355).
The 4 inferior ammunition blades (356) and the central ammunition blade (383) are used in
combination with an ammunition blade spring (352) while a different spring (352/1) is used
with the superior ammunition blade (351).
An ammunition guide roller (a) has been provided inside the ammunition box body (G1)
in order to facilitate the feeding of the ammunition belt from the ammunition box towards
the feed channel (220) located in the container body (A2) (also refer to § 2.2.1.2).
2006 07 EN - 45 - Catalog n° 3640084260

712 H1
760
742
714 H1
737
719 745 781 12x
4x 4x 734
4x
718
719 741
735
712 738
797 744
752
4x
736
795
4x 737
795
796 737 796
794
797
797
731
794
732 721
742
712 4x
794
797
822
788
6x
701 797
823
Fig. 2.i - ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ]
2006 07 EN - 46 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.8. ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.i)
701 Adaptation box assembly for HMP 400-250-RMP-RL 1

712 > Slotted cheese head screw 6
714 > Plain washer, large 4
718 > Spacer, shock absorber 4
719 > Spacer 8
721 > Connector 1
731 > Connector 1
732 > Connector 1
734 > Receptacle, dummy 1
737 > Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut, PA insert 9
738 > Receptacle, dummy 1
741 > Connector 1
742 > Blind rivet 16
744 > Serrated lock, washer 1
745 > Circuit breaker 1
752 > Slotted countersunk flat head screw 4
760 > Printed, circuit complete for HPM/RLSTD 1
781 > Slotted countersunk flat head screw 4
788 > Screw, countersunk head, 1000 cross-recessed 1
794 > Collar, wiring 3
795 > Collar, wiring 2
797 > Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut, PA insert 7
822 > Cross recessed countersunk (flat)head screw 6
823 > Nut 6
H1 Manual cocking switch 2
2006 07 EN - 47 - Catalog n° 3640084260

712 H1
760
742
714 H1
737
719 745 781 12x
4x 4x 734
4x
718
719 741
735
712 738
797 744
752
4x
736
795
4x 737
795
796 737 796
794
797
797
731
794
732 721
742
712 4x
794
797
822
788
6x
701 797
823
Fig. 2.i - ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ]
2006 07 EN - 48 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2.2.8. ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ] (continued)
(b) Description
The ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ] (catalog number (701)) controls the operation of
the M3P machine gun and the recocking system [ 5 ] and allows user interventions via the
circuit breaker (745) and the 2 manual cocking switches (H1).
The ABA [ 8 ] has been fixed and connected as follows :
• The electronic box ABA [ 8 ] has been fixed to the inner frame of the container body
(A2) by means of 4 screws (712), the 4 washers (714), the 4 shock absorption spacers
(718) and the 8 spacers (719).
• The weapon system connector (721) has been fixed, from the inside, into the hole
which can be found on top of the container body (A2) by means of the 6 screws (822)
and the 6 nuts (823).
The weapon system connector (721) itself consists of a connector fixed to a mounting plate
by means of 4 rivets (742).
The cable of the weapon system connector (721) has been fixed to the inner frame of the
container body (A2) by means of the 3 wiring collars (794) : 2 of these wiring collars have
been fixed by means of a screw (712) and 2 nuts (797) while the third one has been fixed by
means of the screw (788) and a nut (797).
• The machine gun connector (731) has been connected to the connector at the rear
side of the M3P machine gun.
Just when it leaves the electronic box ABA [ 8 ], the cable of the machine gun connector
(731) is held in place by a wiring collar (795) which has been secured to the box by means
of a screw (796) and a nut (797).
• The recocking system connector (732) has been connected to the connector at the
lower rear side of the recocking system [ 5 ].
Just when it leaves the electronic box ABA [ 8 ], the cable of the recocking system connector
(732) is held in place by a wiring collar (795) which has been secured to the box by means
of a screw (796) and a nut (797).
The following components of the electronic box ABA [ 8 ] are available as spare parts :
• The dummy receptacle (734), fixed to the frame of the box by means of 4 rivets (742)
• The dummy receptacle (738), fixed to the frame of the box by means of the screw
(735), the lock washer (744), the 2 washers (736) and a nut (737)
• The connector (741), fixed to the frame of the box by means of 4 rivets (742)
• The circuit breaker (745), fixed to the frame of the box by means of 4 rivets (742)
• The 4 screws (752) and 4 nuts (737) securing the inner contact assembly of the box
• The printed circuit (760) as well as the 4 screws (781) and the 4 nuts (737) securing it
to the box
2006 07 EN - 49 - Catalog n° 3640084260

3.1. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
The following warnings and cautions should be read before any intervention (installation,
loading, preparing for firing, unloading, maintenance, disassembling, adjusting, ...) on the HMP
400 pod weapon system.
x Depending on the version, the HMP 400 pod weapon system weighs 86.5 - 89.5 kg
(without ammunition) / 138.5 - 141.5 kg (completely loaded) : extreme care should be
taken when handling the equipment, especially when installing it on the carrier.
x Before any intervention on a HMP 400 pod weapon system mounted on a carrier, the
carrier should be located in a designated safe area and be pointed in a safe direction.
The safe area should be delimited by warning notices and/or safety fences.
x The HMP 400 pod weapon system should always be approached sidewards or from the
rear side (it should never be approached from the front side).
x Never stand before the HMP 400 pod weapon system.
x The carrier should never fly with a HMP 400 pod weapon system without machine gun
and/or without ammunition box [ 7 ].
x In case of the HMP 400 LCC and the HMP 400 LCC-GFH, be aware that the links and
cases collector [ 6 ] (provided underneath the pod) may contain some active cartridges.
x Before closing the side door ((210) or (230)) at the side opposite to the feeding side of the
machine gun after the latter has been removed, do not forget to push the locking pin
(431/1) completely back into the elastic cradle [ 4 ].
Safety cautions for (inflight) firing :

For firing operation and especially for inflight firing operation, please refer to the applicable
procedures (see flight manual or applicable checklist / procedure).
Those procedures will detail how to control and fire the HMP 400 through the armament controls
installed in the cockpit (i.e. FN Herstal PC17 and BT14 when installed, or other armament control
panels).
In addition to those procedures and for safety reasons, the following instructions are
mandatory :
Just before firing : The M3P machine gun has to be armed by setting the bolt (411) in
forward position (‘ARM’ position).
Note that switching from Safe to Arm may take up to 4 seconds according to gun pod
configuration.
After each firing : The gun has to be cleared by setting the bolt (411) of the M3P
machine gun in backward position (‘SAFE’ position) within 10 seconds after the end of the
firing sequence if a further firing is not immediately required.
Failure to comply with this instruction may yield to potential risk of inadvertent firing,
cook-off of ammunition and ammunition overheat (and subsequent primer perforation).
NOTE : Those operations can be performed through the weapons controls (ARM switch of the
PC17 and MAS switch of the BT14, when installed or through equivalent control
panels) in accordance with the applicable procedure.
2006 07 EN - 50 - Catalog n° 3640084260

3.2. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ESPECIALLY APPLYING TO THE M3P
MACHINE GUN
The following warnings and cautions should be read before any intervention (installation,
loading, preparing for firing, unloading, maintenance, disassembling, adjusting, ...) on the
M3P machine gun.
x The M3P machine gun can cause injury or death up to 6500 metres.
x Always handle the M3P machine gun, like any other weapon, with extreme care and
with the respect due to a loaded gun, even though you are certain the gun is
unloaded.
x Never modify parts of the gun. Repairs and disassembly exceeding the basic field
stripping may only be carried out by qualified armourers or by FN HERSTAL.
x If the weapon has been heavily oiled or greased for shipment or storage, clean it
thoroughly and lightly lubricate the metal parts before firing.
x The barrel should be perfectly dry before firing.
x Never try to clear a barrel obstruction by firing.
x Before manipulating the machine gun, always ensure that it is empty.
x Before installing the machine gun into the pod, ensure that the headspace as well as
the timing have been checked and, if necessary, adjusted.
x Before loading or unloading the M3P machine gun, all the usual safety precautions
applicable to weapon loading and unloading should be observed.
x For any intervention on the M3P machine gun, the field operator / technician should
work alone.
An exception is made when removing / inserting the gun out of / into the pod : as the gun
weighs approx. 39 kg and in order to avoid damages to the inner structure of the pod and
injuries to the hands, it is recommended that these operations are carried out by 2 persons.
x If an intervention requires the collaboration of the pilot, the field operator / technician
should have a good contact with him.
The pilot may only start a procedure after having received a clear signal from the field
operator / technician that the latter is no longer intervening on the M3P machine gun. This
is normally done by moving away from the pod until the pilot has terminated the procedure.
Once the pilot has terminated a procedure, he must give a clear signal to the field
operator / technician to indicate him that it is safe to continue the intervention on the M3P
machine gun. This is normally done by holding both hands in a clearly visible position until
the field operator / technician has terminated the intervention.
x In case of stoppage of the ammunition (belt) or an internal problem of the gun, wait
at least 15 min. after the carrier has been turned off before intervening on the gun.
This time-period is necessary in order to ensure that the gun has cooled down sufficiently to
eliminate any risk of inadvertent discharge of the ammunition due to ‘cook-off’.
2006 07 EN - 51 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 52 - Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 4 : RECEPTION OF THE WEAPON SYSTEM
Before any intervention on the HMP 400 pod weapon system, ensure to be
familiar with the safety information given in chapter 3 of this Maintenance Manual.
• Inspect the packing case for damage.
If the packing case shows traces of deterioration, take note of them (detailed description or photo)
and report it to FN Herstal.
• Open the packing case and check its contents.
If there is a problem, report it to FN Herstal.
• Carry out the operations required at the reception of the M3P machine gun.
Refer to the corresponding documentation.
2006 07 EN - 53 - Catalog n° 3640084260

HMP 400 LC
120 140
HMP 400 LC-GFH
. .
125
125
HMP 400 LCC

HMP 400 LCC-GFH 140
. .
120
Fig. 5.1.a - Unlocking and removing the front and rear fairings (120) and (140)
230
HMP 400 LC
HMP 400 LC-GFH
a HMP 400 LCC
HMP 400 LCC-GFH
230
Fig. 5.1.b - Unlocking and opening the left side door (230)
(left-hand feeding)
2006 07 EN - 54 - Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 5 : USING THE HMP 400 POD WEAPON SYSTEM
5.1. PREPARATORY OPERATIONS

As long as the HMP 400 pod weapon system has not been mounted on the carrier, it can be
connected to the TBU (Test Box Unit).
The TBU can be used to supply the necessary power to the HMP 400 pod weapon system and to test it
(for more information, refer to the Operator’s Manual of the TBU).
5.1.1. Installation of the M3P machine gun into the pod

In some cases, it is possible that the HMP 400 pod weapon system does not contain a M3P
machine gun. The M3P machine gun could have been removed to :
- carry out a maintenance intervention on it.
- recover a stoppage of the ammunition (belt) or to solve any other internal problem of the
gun.
- replace it by another M3P machine gun.
NOTES : - In this chapter, the installation of the M3P machine gun into the pod is explained
before the installation of the HMP 400 pod weapon system on the carrier.
It is nevertheless also possible (e.g. to avoid too heavy weights) to install the M3P
machine gun into the pod when the HMP 400 is already mounted on the carrier.
- The procedure to be followed for the installation of the M3P machine gun into the
pod is similar for pods which have been set for either right- or left-hand feeding.
(a) Before the installation
• Ensure that the M3P machine gun is empty and safe by carrying out the corresponding
safety checks (refer to the documentation of the machine gun).
Please note that, for a correctly unloaded and removed M3P machine gun, the moving parts
are at their most forward position.
• Ensure that the M3P machine gun has correctly been prepared (cleaned and lubricated)
for the firing operation and that its headspace and timing have been checked and, if
necessary, adjusted (refer to the documentation of the machine gun).
• Check the correct follow-up of the periodical maintenance by consulting the logbooks.
• Using their latches (125), unlock the front and rear fairings (120) and (140) and then
remove them (Fig. 5.1.a).
Both the front and rear fairings (120) and (140) are locked into position by a left and a right
latch (125).
• Using their latches (a), unlock both side doors (210) and (230) and then open them
(Fig. 5.1.b for the left side door (230)).
Both side doors (210) and (230) are locked into position by 3 latches.
2006 07 EN - 55 - Catalog n° 3640084260

[5]
E1
Fig. 5.1.c - Cocking device (E1) of the recocking system

[ 5 ] positioned at its most forward position
Fig. 5.1.d - Nut-shaped screw at the rear side of the

recocking system [ 5 ]
H1
[8]
[8]
ON
OFF H1
745
Fig. 5.1.e - Right view of the ABA [ 8 ] Fig. 5.1.f - Left view of the ABA [ 8 ]
2006 07 EN - 56 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.1. PREPARATORY OPERATIONS (continued)
5.1.1. Installation of the M3P machine gun into the pod (continued)
(b) Checking the position of the cocking device (E1) of the recocking
system [ 5 ]
Inside the pod, the cocking device (E1) of the recocking system [ 5 ] should be at its most
forward position (Fig. 5.1.c).
This is necessary in order to ensure that the bolt stud (451) of the M3P machine gun is correctly
engaged by the cocking device (E1) when the latter moves rearwards.
If the cocking device (E1) of the recocking system [ 5 ] is not positioned at its most forward
position, there are 3 possibilities :
1. The HMP 400 pod weapon system is not mounted on the carrier yet and the TBU (Test
Box Unit) is not available.
In such a case, and using the speeder UT 2360 and the bush UT 2361, the nut-
shaped screw at the rear side of the recocking system [ 5 ] should be turned in the
direction of the arrow ‘FWD’ (counterclockwise when viewed from the rear side) until
the cocking device (E1) has reached its most forward position (Fig. 5.1.d).
When carrying out this operation, do not apply excessive force in order to avoid damage to
the safety pin (513/1) securing the nut-shaped screw.
2. The HMP 400 pod weapon system is not mounted on the carrier yet but it has been
connected to the TBU.
In such a case, move the cocking device (E1) towards its most forward position by
using the TBU.
For more information, refer to the Operator’s Manual of the TBU.
3. The HMP 400 pod weapon system is already mounted on the carrier.
As the following short procedure only results in a limited discharge of its batteries, it is not
necessary to start the carrier.
Proceed as follows to move the cocking device (E1) towards its most forward position :
• Ensure that the MAS (Master Armament Switch) is ‘OFF’.
• Ensure that all the circuit breakers of the armament system are ‘OFF’.
• Switch on the general power supply of the carrier.
Refer to the flight manual of the carrier.
• Set the ‘COCK’ circuit breaker of the armament system at the ‘ON’ position.
• Inside the pod, set the circuit breaker (745) of the ABA (Adaptation Box
Assembly) [ 8 ] at the ‘ON’ position (Fig. 5.1.e).
• Press one of the 2 manual cocking switches (H1) of the ABA [ 8 ] until the
cocking device (E1) of the recocking system [ 5 ] has moved towards its most
forward position (Fig. 5.1.e and Fig. 5.1.f).
Do not release the manual cocking switch (H1) yet.
• Set the circuit breaker (745) of the ABA [ 8 ] back at the ‘OFF’ position and then
release the manual cocking switch (H1).
• Set the ‘COCK’ circuit breaker of the armament system at the ‘OFF’ position.
• Switch off the general power supply of the carrier.
2006 07 EN - 57 - Catalog n° 3640084260

[3]
.
M3P
[5]
M3P
Fig. 5.1.g - Inserting the M3P machine gun, from the rear side, into the pod (left-hand feeding)
423
431/1
.
A651
[4]
.
Left-hand feeding
[8]
423
431/1 731
.
[4]
Right-hand feeding
Fig. 5.1.h - Pushing in the locking pin (431/1) of Fig. 5.1.i - Connecting the machine gun
the M3P machine gun and locking it into position connector (731) of the ABA [ 8 ] to the connector
by using its retaining spring (423) (A651) at the rear side of the M3P machine gun
2006 07 EN - 58 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.1.1. Installation of the M3P machine gun into the pod (continued)
(c) Inserting the M3P machine gun into the pod (Fig. 5.1.g)
When inserting the M3P machine gun into the pod, take into account that it weighs
approx. 39 kg and be very careful not to damage the inner structure of the pod and
to avoid injuries to the hands.
It is recommended that this operation is carried out by 2 persons.
• Take the M3P machine gun and then insert it, from the rear side, with the barrel first,
through the opening in the rear inner frame of the pod.
When inserting the M3P machine gun into the pod, it should be held slightly inclined towards
the left side (counterclockwise when viewed from the rear side) (also refer to the left part of
Fig. 5.1.g).
• Correctly supporting the M3P machine gun inside the pod, let the barrel of the
machine gun pass through the opening provided in the front inner frame of the pod.
• Carefully lower the M3P machine gun onto the elastic cradle [ 4 ] (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.h) and the boresighting assembly [ 3 ].
If, for any reason, the locking pin (431/1) of the elastic cradle [ 4 ] (also refer to Fig. 5.1.h)
has been pushed back inwards, first pull it as far as possible out of the body of the elastic
cradle.
Ensure that the M3P machine gun correctly engages the guides of the support (251) of the
boresighting assembly [ 3 ] so that the machine gun can correctly move back and forth when
the recoil forces generated when firing the gun are attenuated by the elastic cradle [ 4 ].
(d) Fixing and connecting the M3P machine gun
• Standing at the side opposite to the feeding side of the machine gun, align the holes in
the lugs of the M3P machine gun with the 2 holes of the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and then
completely push the locking pin (431/1) into the aligned holes (Fig. 5.1.h).
• Ensure that the locking pin (431/1) has been pushed fully home and then lock the pin
into position by hooking its retaining spring (423) into its groove (Fig. 5.1.h).
• Connect the machine gun connector (731) of the ABA [ 8 ] to the connector (A651) at
the rear side of the M3P machine gun (Fig. 5.1.i).
(e) After the installation
• Proceed to the following paragraph.
If the pod will not immediately be subjected to the checking procedure which should be
carried out before its installation on the carrier, proceed as follows :
- Close the side doors (210) and (230) and lock them into position by using their latches.
- Reinstall the front and rear fairings (120) and (140) and lock them into position by using
their latches (125).
2006 07 EN - 59 - Catalog n° 3640084260

732
Fig. 5.1.j - Correctly connected recocking system connector

(732)
2006 07 EN - 60 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.1.2. Checking procedure before installing the HMP 400 pod weapon system on
the carrier
(a) Preparatory operations (if not already done)
• Using their latches (125), unlock the front and rear fairings (120) and (140) and then
remove them (also refer to Fig. 5.1.a).
Both the front and rear fairings (120) and (140) are locked into position by a left and a right
latch (125).
• Using their latches, unlock both side doors (210) and (230) and then open them (also
refer to Fig. 5.1.b).
Both side doors (210) and (230) are locked into position by 3 latches.
(b) Checking the pod

• In case of the HMP 400 LC and the HMP 400 LC-GFH, ensure that the links collector
(217) on one of the side doors ((210) or (230)) and the links collector [ 6 ] underneath
the pod are empty.
If not, empty the links collectors (217) and [ 6 ] as described in § 5.4.5 (a).
In case of the HMP 400 LCC and the HMP 400 LCC-GFH, ensure that the links
collector (217) on one of the side doors ((210) or (230)) and the links and cases
collector [ 6 ] underneath the pod are empty.
If not, empty the links collector (217) and the links and cases collector [ 6 ] as described in
§ 5.4.5 (b).
• Ensure that the recocking system connector (732) has been connected correctly
(Fig. 5.1.j).
(c) Checking the M3P machine gun
• Ensure that the machine gun connector (731) of the ABA [ 8 ] has been connected
correctly to the connector (A651) at the rear side of the M3P machine gun (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.i).
• Ensure that the M3P machine gun has correctly been fixed to the elastic cradle [ 4 ] :
the locking pin (431/1) should be fully home and correctly engaged by its retaining
spring (423) (also refer to Fig. 5.1.h).
• Ensure that the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the M3P machine gun is
free from loose belt links.
If there is a link, push it out by using a screwdriver or any other appropriate tool.
• Ensure that the feed cover (601) of the M3P machine gun is closed correctly.
• Ensure that the flash-hider (355) of the M3P machine gun is correctly oriented and
tightened.
(d) After the checking procedure
If the pod will not immediately be installed on the carrier, proceed as follows :
- Close the side doors (210) and (230) and lock them into position by using their latches.
- Reinstall the front and rear fairings (120) and (140) and lock them into position by using
their latches (125).
2006 07 EN - 61 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 62 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.1.3. Installation of the HMP 400 pod weapon system on the carrier
Unless in case of pre-adjusted harmonization, the following procedure assumes that

the HMP 400 pod weapon system has previously been harmonized (i.e. its firing
precision has been checked and/or adjusted (also refer to § 9.1 of this Maintenance
Manual)) for the specified side of the specified carrier.
After this harmonization adjustment, the HMP 400 pod weapon system should never
be installed on the other side or on another carrier !
Please note that, in case of pre-adjusted harmonization, the HMP 400 pod weapon system has
been pre-adjusted at the factory in such a way that it can, without further procedures, be
installed on any side of any of the carriers for which it has been adjusted.
• At the appropriate side of the carrier, cock the release unit.
For more information, refer to the Operator’s Manual of the release unit.
When installing the HMP 400 pod weapon system on the carrier, take into account
that it weighs 86.5 - 89.5 kg (without ammunition) / 138.5 - 141.5 kg (completely
loaded).
It is recommended that this operation is carried out by using a lifting device or by at

least 2 persons.
Please note that one way to reduce the weight of the HMP 400 pod weapon system during its
installation on the carrier, is to first mount the (empty) pod onto the carrier and then to install
the M3P machine gun into it.
• Lift the HMP 400 pod weapon system and then engage its suspension lugs (175) into the
release unit of the carrier.
• Lock the HMP 400 pod weapon system against the ejector arms of the release unit and
then apply the prescribed torque on the sway braces or on the lifting device of the release
unit.
• Insert the release unit security pin with ‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer into the
ejector of the release unit.
• Connect the connector of the carrier to the weapon system connector (721) which can be
found on top of the HMP 400 pod weapon system.
After the installation of the HMP 400 pod weapon system on the carrier, it is
recommended to perform a functional and electrical test of the equipment by using
the weapon system control boxes inside the cockpit as well as the TBU (Test Box Unit).
Proceed as described in the special elaborated and carrier-depended procedure and/

or checklist.
2006 07 EN - 63 - Catalog n° 3640084260

HMP 400 LC
HMP 400 LCC
.
238/1 [7]
.
238/1
.
HMP 400 LC-GFH
HMP 400 LCC-GFH
[7]
[7]
.
Fig. 5.2.a - Taking out the retaining pins (238/1)
which secure the ammunition box [ 7 ]
(left-hand feeding)
Fig. 5.2.b - Removal of the ammunition box [ 7 ]
(left-hand feeding)
. OREA 740
Incorrect Correct
Fig. 5.2.c - Assembly of the ammunition belt
4 x 356 383
351
x
y
[7]
Fig. 5.2.d - Unlocking and opening the cover of the ammunition box [ 7 ] and then placing the
6 ammunition blades ((351), (383) and 4 x (356)) of the box at the vertical position
2006 07 EN - 64 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.2. LOADING THE HMP 400 POD WEAPON SYSTEM
5.2.1. Loading the ammunition box [ 7 ] for the M3P machine gun
As no power supply is required, it is not necessary that the HMP 400 pod weapon system has
been installed on the carrier or that the TBU (Test Box Unit) has been provided in order to be
able to carry out the following loading procedure.
• Using its 2 latches (125), unlock the front fairing (120) and then remove it (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.a).
The front fairing (120) is locked into position by a left and a right latch (125).
(b) Removal of the ammunition box [ 7 ]
• At the left and right sides, take out the 2 retaining pins (238/1) which secure the
ammunition box [ 7 ] to its supporting rails (Fig. 5.2.a).
A retaining pin (238/1) can only be taken out while pressing down on its central spring-
loaded button.
• Slide the ammunition box [ 7 ] forwards along its supporting rails and then take it out
of the pod (Fig. 5.2.b).
(c) Assembly of the ammunition belt (Fig. 5.2.c)
• Using the cartridge insertion/extraction tool OREA 740, assemble a belt of up to

400 cartridges.
Ensure that the cartridges are clean (no sand, mud, ...) and that they are not oily.
Scratched or shortened ammunition or ammunition showing signs of corrosion or deformation
must be rejected !!
• Check if the belt has been assembled correctly.
(d) Loading the belt into the ammunition box [ 7 ]
Besides the orientation of the ammunition, the following loading procedure is identical for
ammunition boxes for pods which have been set for either right-hand or left-hand feeding.
For the correct orientation of the ammunition, refer to the appropriate diagrams.
• Place the ammunition box [ 7 ] with its cover facing upwards.
• Using its latch (x), unlock the cover of the ammunition box [ 7 ] and then open it (left
part of Fig. 5.2.d).
• Raise the 6 ammunition blades ((351), (383) and 4 x (356)) of the ammunition box
[ 7 ] and then lock them at the vertical position by using the retainer (y) which can be
found inside the box (right part of Fig. 5.2.d).
2006 07 EN - 65 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Left-hand
feeding
Correct
Right-hand
feeding
Incorrect
Correct Incorrect
Fig. 5.2.e - Loading the first double layer of Fig. 5.2.f - Loading the ammunition belt at the axis of
ammunition in the ammunition box [ 7 ] the 1st ammunition blade (356) (left-hand feeding)
Correct
Correct Incorrect
Red part
Incorrect
Fig. 5.2.g - Loading the ammunition belt at the Fig. 5.2.h - Loading the ammunition belt at the
curved end of the 1st ammunition blade (356) end and the red part of the 5th ammunition
(left-hand feeding) blade (383) (left-hand feeding)
2006 07 EN - 66 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.2. LOADING THE HMP 400 POD WEAPON SYSTEM (continued)
5.2.1. Loading the ammunition box [ 7 ] for the M3P machine gun (continued)
(d) Loading the belt into the ammunition box [ 7 ] (continued)
• Start loading the ammunition belt into the ammunition box [ 7 ] (Fig. 5.2.e).
Start at the labelled side of the ammunition box [ 7 ] and orient the ammunition according to
the label (pay special attention to the orientation of the links).
• Arrange a double layer of ammunition in the ammunition box [ 7 ] (also refer to
Fig. 5.2.e).
Do not position a cartridge under the axis of the 1st ammunition blade (356) (Fig. 5.2.f).
• While holding the other 5 blades in position, release the 1st ammunition blade (356)
and then lower the blade onto the upper layer of the ammunition.
Ensure that the blade rests parallel on top of the ammunition.
• Repeat the 2 previous steps until the 5th ammunition blade (383) has been lowered.
Take into account that, for the 4 first ammunition blades, a cartridge should correctly be
resting on the slightly curved end of the blade (Fig. 5.2.g for the 1st ammunition blade).
Do not position a cartridge under the axis of an ammunition blade and ensure that the 5th
ammunition blade rests parallel on top of the ammunition.
• Load a new double layer of ammunition on the 5th ammunition blade (383).
The ammunition belt should be turned directly around the end of the 5th ammunition blade
(upper parts of Fig. 5.2.h).
Do not place ammunition on the red part of the 5th ammunition blade (lower parts of
Fig. 5.2.h) !
• Lower the 6th ammunition blade (351), load a final double layer of ammunition and
then leave approx. 15 cartridges hanging free out of the feeding opening of the
ammunition box [ 7 ].
The ammunition belt should be turned directly around the end of the 6th ammunition blade.
Ensure that the top layer of the ammunition does not surpass the upper edge of the
ammunition box frame. If so, the ammunition box [ 7 ] should be loaded again.
The ammunition box [ 7 ] should be closed with 15 cartridges hanging free : If the box has
been filled with 400 cartridges, it is necessary to open the box, pull out the first 15 cartridges
and then close the box (do not try to pull out the cartridges without opening the cover as they
will jam at the outlet of the box).
• Close the cover of the ammunition box and lock it into position (Fig. 5.2.i).
Fig. 5.2.i - Correctly prepared ammunition box [ 7 ] (left-hand feeding)
2006 07 EN - 67 - Catalog n° 3640084260

HMP 400 LC
HMP 400 LCC HMP 400 LC-GFH
HMP 400 LCC-GFH
. .
Fig. 5.2.j - Installation of the ammunition box [ 7 ] (left-hand feeding)
220
220
[7] [7]
Left-hand feeding Right-hand feeding
Fig. 5.2.k - Inserting a few cartridges into the feed channel (220) for the M3P machine gun
.
238/1 238/1
.
[7]
Fig. 5.2.l - Reinserting the retaining pins (238/1) which

secure the ammunition box [ 7 ] (left-hand feeding)
2006 07 EN - 68 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.2.1. Loading the ammunition box [ 7 ] for the M3P machine gun (continued)
(e) Installation of the loaded ammunition box [ 7 ] (Fig. 5.2.j)
This procedure assumes that the ammunition box [ 7 ] has correctly been loaded and that a
few cartridges are left hanging free out of the feeding opening of the ammunition box.
• While holding the ammunition box [ 7 ] so that the feeding opening at its rear side
faces the entrance of the feed channel (220) of the pod, align the lateral grooves of the
ammunition box with the supporting rails of the pod.
If the HMP 400 pod weapon system has been set for left/right-hand feeding, the feed
channel (220) of the pod is at the left/right side.
• Fit the ammunition box [ 7 ] onto the supporting rails and then move it slightly
rearwards, just enough to let the supporting rails engage the lateral grooves of the box.
• Ensure that the supporting rails of the pod have correctly engaged the lateral grooves
of the ammunition box [ 7 ].
• Move the ammunition box [ 7 ] rearwards along its supporting rails.
• Once the ammunition box [ 7 ] has almost reached its correct rear position, insert a
few of the free cartridges into the feed channel (220) for the M3P machine gun
(Fig. 5.2.k).
• At the left and right sides, align the fixing holes of the ammunition box [ 7 ] with the
holes in the supporting rails and then secure the ammunition box by fitting the 2
retaining pins (238/1) back into position (Fig. 5.2.l).
(f) After the loading procedure
• Reinstall the front fairing (120) and lock it into position by using its latches (125).
As it is, for safety reasons, forbidden to work at the front side or in front of a loaded machine
gun, it is absolutely necessary to reinstall the front fairing (120) before loading the gun !
If no further loading procedures will be carried out, proceed as follows :
- If they are open, close the side doors (210) and (230) and lock them into position by
using their latches.
- If it has been removed, reinstall the rear fairing (140) and lock it into position by using its
latches (125).
2006 07 EN - 69 - Catalog n° 3640084260

220
.
. 220
Fig. 5.2.m - Pulling the ammunition belt through the feed channel (220) for the M3P machine gun
Fig. 5.2.n - Hooking the first cartridge of the ammunition belt over the outer edge of the feed channel
(220)
2006 07 EN - 70 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.2.2. Loading the M3P machine gun
Before any intervention on the M3P machine gun, ensure to be familiar with the
safety information especially applying to the machine gun, given in paragraph 3.2
of this Maintenance Manual.
For safety reasons, it is strongly recommended only to load the M3P machine gun just before
take-off, in a safety area, when the HMP 400 pod weapon system has already been installed
on the carrier.
• Using its 3 latches, unlock the side door ((210) or (230)) at the machine gun feeding
side and then open it.
Please note that it is recommended but not absolutely necessary also to open the side door
at the opposite side.
• If not already done, reinstall the front fairing (120) and lock it into position by using its
latches (125).
As it is, for safety reasons, forbidden to work at the front side or in front of a loaded machine
gun, it is absolutely necessary to reinstall the front fairing (120) before loading the gun !
(b) Pulling the ammunition belt up to the feed tray (212) of the M3P machine
gun
This procedure assumes that a few free cartridges of a correctly loaded and installed
ammunition box [ 7 ] have already been inserted into the feed channel (220) for the M3P
machine gun.
• Pull the ammunition belt further through the feed channel (220) for the M3P machine
gun (Fig. 5.2.m).
Ensure that the cartridges are smoothly fed out of the ammunition box [ 7 ].
If some force is required to pull the cartridges out of the ammunition box [ 7 ], the box should
be removed and then examined for correct loading.
• Once the first cartridge has reached the top of the feed channel (220), hook it over the
outer edge of the channel (Fig. 5.2.n).
• Give a clear signal to the pilot that he can proceed as described in the following
paragraph.
2006 07 EN - 71 - Catalog n° 3640084260

H1
[8]
ON
OFF
745
Fig. 5.2.o - Right view of the ABA [ 8 ]
635 635
601 601
Fig. 5.2.p - Checking if the belt feed slide (635) protrudes from the feeding side of the feed cover (601)
of the M3P machine gun
212
212
Fig. 5.2.q - Loading the ammunition belt into the feed tray (212) of the M3P machine gun
2006 07 EN - 72 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.2.2. Loading the M3P machine gun (continued)
(c) Actions to be carried out by the pilot
• Wait for a clear signal from the field operator that he has finished the interventions
described in the previous paragraph.
• Ensure that all the circuit breakers of the armament system are ‘OFF’.
• Start the carrier or switch on its general power supply.
It is not absolutely necessary, but strongly recommended, to start the carrier in order to avoid
an excessive discharge of its batteries during the following procedure.
It is nevertheless also possible only to switch on the general power supply of the carrier (for
more information, refer to the flight manual of the carrier).
• Set the ‘COCK’ circuit breaker of the armament system at the ‘ON’ position.
• Clearly indicate to the field operator that he can continue intervening on the M3P
machine gun.
(d) Loading the ammunition belt into the feed tray (212) of the M3P machine
gun
• Wait for a clear signal from the pilot that he has finished the cockpit operations
• Inside the pod, set the circuit breaker (745) of the ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ]
at the ‘ON’ position (Fig. 5.2.o).
• Ensure that the cocking device (E1) (also refer to Fig. 5.1.c) of the recocking system
[ 5 ] of the pod pulls the moving parts of the M3P machine gun completely rearwards.
If the recocking system [ 5 ] of the pod operates for the first time after the M3P machine gun
has been reinstalled or replaced, ensure that the cocking device (E1) of the recocking system
correctly engages the bolt stud (451) of the M3P machine gun.
• Ensure that the belt feed slide (635) protrudes from the feeding side of the feed cover
(601) of the M3P machine gun (Fig. 5.2.p).
This indicates that the moving parts of the M3P machine gun really are at their most rearward
position.
• Insert the first cartridge into the feed tray (212) of the M3P machine gun (Fig. 5.2.q).
• Using both thumbs, push in the 2 first cartridges in order to engage them behind the 2
lower spring-loaded pawls.
After this operation, pull on the ammunition belt in order to check the correct engagement of
the cartridges.
2006 07 EN - 73 - Catalog n° 3640084260

H1 [8]
[8]
H1
Fig. 5.2.r - Right view of the ABA [ 8 ] Fig. 5.2.s - Left view of the ABA [ 8 ]
480
Left-hand feeding
a 480
b
a
Right-hand feeding
b
Fig. 5.2.t - Ensuring that the extractor (480) has correctly engaged the rim (a) of the first cartridge (b)
2006 07 EN - 74 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.2.2. Loading the M3P machine gun (continued)
(e) Cocking the M3P machine gun
• Press one of the 2 manual cocking switches (H1) of the ABA [ 8 ] until the cocking
device (E1) of the recocking system [ 5 ] has let the moving parts of the M3P machine
gun return completely forwards (Fig. 5.2.r and Fig. 5.2.s).
In order to avoid a jam during the feeding operation of the first cartridge, do not release the
pressure on the manual cocking switch (H1) before the moving parts have reached their most
forward position.
Before releasing the pressure on the manual cocking switch (H1), ensure that the extractor
(480) has correctly engaged the rim (a) of the first cartridge (b) (Fig. 5.2.t).
• After having released the pressure on the manual cocking switch (H1), ensure that the
moving parts of the M3P machine gun are again pulled completely rearwards by the
cocking device (E1) of the recocking system [ 5 ].
When the moving parts of the M3P machine gun have reached their most rearward position,
ensure that the first cartridge has correctly been extracted from the ammunition belt.
After having ensured that the rearward movement of the moving parts is really terminated,
insert a finger from underneath in the frame of the M3P machine gun in order to check the
presence of a cartridge on the front face of the bolt (411).
• Check if the ammunition belt can still move smoothly from the ammunition box [ 7 ]
and through the feed channel (220) towards the M3P machine gun.
5.2.3. After having loaded the HMP 400 pod weapon system
If it will take a few hours before the carrier takes off or in case of a stand-by (alert, ...) situation,
proceed to the following § 5.3.
• Carry out a visual check of the inside of the pod.

Especially check if the connectors inside the pod are connected correctly.
• Close the opened side door(s) ((210) and/or (230)) of the pod and lock it (them) into
position by using its (their) latches.
• If it has been removed previously, reinstall the rear fairing (140) and lock it into position by
using its latches (125).
• Carry out a visual check of the outside of the pod.
Especially check if all the latches are locked correctly.
• Check if the connector of the carrier has been connected correctly to the weapon system
connector (721) which can be found on top of the HMP 400 pod weapon system.
• Take out the release unit security pin with ‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer.
• Give a clear signal to the pilot that he can start the carrier (if not already done) and that he
can take off.
From now on, and during the flight, the pilot should proceed as described in the special
elaborated flight procedures and/or checklists.
The carrier should never fly with a HMP 400 pod weapon system without machine
gun and/or without ammunition box [ 7 ].
2006 07 EN - 75 - Catalog n° 3640084260

260
Fig. 5.3.a - Inserted M3P machine gun security pin

(260)
2006 07 EN - 76 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.3. PROCEDURE IF THE CARRIER WILL NOT TAKE OFF IMMEDIATELY
If it will take a few hours before the carrier takes off or in case of a stand-by (alert, ...) situation,
proceed as follows :
• At the most visible side of the pod, insert the M3P machine gun security pin (260) with
‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer (Fig. 5.3.a).
• Leave the side door ((210) or (230)) at the side with the M3P machine gun security pin
(260) open so that the ‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer of the pin remains visible.
Just before take-off of the carrier, first take out the M3P machine gun security pin (260) with
‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer (Fig. 5.3.a) and then proceed as described in
§ 5.2.3.
2006 07 EN - 77 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 78 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.4. AFTER LANDING
5.4.1. Safety procedure after the carrier has landed
After the carrier has landed, it should be located in a designated safe area where the M3P
machine gun should be checked and, if necessary, unloaded.
The carrier should be pointed in a safe direction and only be approached sidewards or
from the rear side.
(a) Actions to be carried out by the pilot

• Ensure that the ‘FIRE’ circuit breaker of the armament system is ‘OFF’.
• Ensure that the ‘COCK’ circuit breaker of the armament system is ‘ON’.
• Clearly indicate to the field operator that he can start the safety actions described in the
following paragraph.
(b) Safety actions to be carried out by the field operator

In case of stoppage of the ammunition (belt) or an internal problem of the gun, wait at least
15 min. after the carrier has been turned off before intervening on the gun !
This time-period is necessary in order to ensure that the gun has cooled down sufficiently to
eliminate any risk of inadvertent discharge of the ammunition due to ‘cook-off’.
• Wait for a clear signal from the pilot that he has finished the cockpit operations
• Insert the release unit security pin with ‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer (also
refer to § 5.1.3).
• Insert the M3P machine gun security pin (260) with ‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’
streamer into the machine gun (also refer to Fig. 5.3.a).
If it is not possible to insert the M3P machine gun security pin (260) with ‘REMOVE PIN
BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer, this means that an internal problem of the gun has occurred :
immediately proceed to § 5.4.4 to safely take the M3P machine gun out of the HMP 400 pod
weapon system and then check the gun (refer to the corresponding documentation).
• Check if the belt feed slide (635) protrudes from the feeding side of the feed cover
(601) of the M3P machine gun (also refer to Fig. 5.2.p).
If so, this indicates that the moving parts of the M3P machine gun are correctly positioned at
their most rearward position : the machine gun can now be checked and/or unloaded as
described in § 5.4.2 (all the ammunition has been used) or § 5.4.3 (there is still ammunition
at the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the M3P machine gun).
If not, this means that a stoppage of the ammunition (belt) and/or an internal problem of the
gun have occurred : immediately proceed to § 5.4.4 to safely take the M3P machine gun out
of the HMP 400 pod weapon system and then check the gun (refer to the corresponding
documentation).
2006 07 EN - 79 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Cartridge on the front face of the bolt (411)
411 411
No cartridge on the front face of the bolt (411)
Fig. 5.4.a - Checking the presence of a cartridge on the front face of the bolt (411)
2006 07 EN - 80 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.4. AFTER LANDING (continued)
5.4.2. Checking the M3P machine gun in case all the ammunition has been used
Before carrying out the following checking procedure, ensure that the safety
procedure described in § 5.4.1 has been carried out.
(a) Checking if the M3P machine gun really does not contain any cartridge
really empty.
If not, proceed to § 5.4.3.
• Taking into account that, for more experienced operators, this operation can also be
carried out by just inserting a finger, from underneath, in the frame of the gun, check
the presence of a cartridge on the front face of the bolt (411) by proceeding as
follows :
- Taking into account that it can have some weight, release and remove the links (and
cases) collector [ 6 ] from underneath the pod as described in the first 2 steps of the
corresponding § 5.4.5 (a) or (b).
- Looking from underneath the pod, visually check if there is still a cartridge remaining
on the front face of the bolt (411) (Fig. 5.4.a).
If there is a cartridge, proceed as described in ‘(b) Removal of a cartridge remaining on
the front face of the bolt (411) of the M3P machine gun’.
If there is no cartridge on the front face of the bolt (411), immediately proceed to ‘(c) After
the checking procedure’.
(b) Removal of a cartridge remaining on the front face of the bolt (411) of the
M3P machine gun
• Press one of the 2 manual cocking switches (H1) of the ABA [ 8 ] (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.e and Fig. 5.1.f) until the cocking device (E1) (also refer to Fig. 5.1.c) of the
recocking system [ 5 ] has let the moving parts of the M3P machine gun return
completely forwards : this causes the cartridge remaining on the front face of the bolt
(411) to be ejected.
In order to avoid a jam during the ejection operation of the cartridge, do not release the
pressure on the manual cocking switch (H1) before the moving parts have reached their most
forward position.
• After having released the pressure on the manual cocking switch (H1), ensure that the
moving parts of the M3P machine gun are again pulled completely rearwards by the
cocking device (E1) of the recocking system [ 5 ].
• Return to ‘(a) Checking if the M3P machine gun really does not contain any cartridge’.
2006 07 EN - 81 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 82 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.4.2. Checking the M3P machine gun in case all the ammunition has been used
(continued)
(c) After the checking procedure
• If they are not empty, empty the links collector (217) on one of the side doors ((210) or
(230)) and the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] underneath the pod as described in the
Unless the presence of a cartridge on the front face of the bolt (411) has been checked with a
finger, the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] is already removed from underneath the pod (refer
to (a)).
free from loose belt links.
If there is a link, push it out by using a screwdriver or any other appropriate tool.
• Take out the M3P machine gun security pin (260) with ‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’
streamer (also refer to Fig. 5.3.a).
• In order to ensure an optimum longevity of the springs, move the moving parts of the
machine gun towards their most forward position by proceeding as follows :
- Press one of the 2 manual cocking switches (H1) of the ABA [ 8 ] (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.e and Fig. 5.1.f) until the cocking device (E1) (also refer to Fig. 5.1.c) of the
recocking system [ 5 ] has let the moving parts of the M3P machine gun return
completely forwards.
Do not release the manual cocking switch (H1) yet.
- Set the circuit breaker (745) of the ABA [ 8 ] at the ‘OFF’ position and then release
the manual cocking switch (H1).
• Close the side doors (210) and (230) of the pod and lock them into position by using
their latches.
• Indicate to the pilot that the machine gun is safe and that he can continue his checklist.
• Record the firing details as well as the relevant observations in the machine gun and
pod logbooks.
2006 07 EN - 83 - Catalog n° 3640084260

212
212
OREA 740 OREA 740
Fig. 5.4.b - Breaking the ammunition belt at the feed tray (212) of the machine gun
.
.
220 220
Fig. 5.4.c - Completely removing the ammunition belt
. .
222 222
221 250
250 221
Fig. 5.4.d - Removal of the links chute adapter (250)
2006 07 EN - 84 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.4.3. Unloading and checking the M3P machine gun if there is still ammunition
at its ammunition feeding and ejection section (no problem was detected
when carrying out the safety procedure after the carrier has landed)
Before carrying out the following procedure, ensure that the safety procedure
described in § 5.4.1 has been carried out.
(a) Breaking the ammunition belt at the feed tray (212) of the machine gun
• Using the cartridge insertion/extraction tool OREA 740, break the ammunition belt by
extracting the cartridge next to the inlet opening of the feed tray (212) of the machine
gun (Fig. 5.4.b).
(b) Emptying the ammunition box [ 7 ]
• Unload the ammunition box [ 7 ] by pulling the ammunition belt completely out of the
box and the feed channel (220) (Fig. 5.4.c).
(c) Removal of the remaining piece of ammunition belt from the machine gun
• At the opposite side of the feeding side of the M3P machine gun, take out the locking
pin (222) which secures the links chute adapter securing axis (221), take out the axis
and then remove the links chute adapter (250) (Fig. 5.4.d).
• Carefully take the remaining piece of ammunition belt out of the machine gun.
• Inspect the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the machine gun and, if
present, carefully remove any loose belt link.
• Reinstall the links chute adapter (250), secure it into position with its securing axis (221)
and then fit the locking pin (222) back into position.
(d) Proceed to § 5.4.2
From now on, proceed as described in § 5.4.2. taking into account that there is
CERTAINLY a cartridge remaining on the front face of the bolt (411) of the machine gun.
2006 07 EN - 85 - Catalog n° 3640084260

451
OREAA 6B
OREAA 6A
Fig. 5.4.e - Installing the adjusting loop OREAA 6B and the safety rod OREAA 6A in
order to move the moving parts of the M3P machine gun as far as possible rearwards
411
OREA 240
OREA 869
Fig. 5.4.f - Using the clamping screw OREA 869 to block the firing pin (439) of the machine gun
212
212
OREA 740 OREA 740
Fig. 5.4.g - Breaking the ammunition belt at the feed tray (212) of the machine gun
2006 07 EN - 86 - Catalog n° 3640084260

when carrying out the safety procedure after the carrier has landed
Before any intervention on the M3P machine gun, ensure to be familiar with the safety information
especially applying to the machine gun, given in paragraph 3.2 of this Maintenance Manual.
Before carrying out the following procedure, ensure that the safety procedure described in § 5.4.1
has been carried out.
(a) Preparing the safe removal of the M3P machine gun

• Using its 2 latches (125), unlock the rear fairing (140) and then remove it (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.a).
• Disconnect the machine gun connector (731) of the ABA [ 8 ] (also refer to Fig. 5.1.i)
from the connector (A651) at the rear side of the M3P machine gun.
• Install the safety rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop OREAA 6B by proceeding as
follows (Fig. 5.4.e) :
- While orienting it so that its knob is at the top, fit the adjusting loop OREAA 6B onto
the rear end of the M3P machine gun.
Ensure that the inner pins (not visible on Fig. 5.4.e) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B
correctly engage the holes at the rear side of the machine gun.
- At the right side of the M3P machine gun, hook the (front) end of the safety rod
OREAA 6A onto the bolt stud (451).
- Lower the rear end of the safety rod OREAA 6A and ensure that the hub of its knurled
wheel (a) fits into the right support of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B.
If necessary, turn the knurled wheel (a) so that it fits correctly into the support.
• Carefully turn the knurled wheel (a) of the safety rod OREAA 6A as far as possible in the
clockwise direction when viewed from the rear side in order to move the moving parts of
the M3P machine gun as far as possible rearwards and to block them into position.
Do not apply excessive force in order to avoid damage to the safety rod.
• If, during the safety procedure of § 5.4.1, it was not possible to insert the M3P machine
gun security pin (260) with ‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer, try to insert it now.
Although not absolutely necessary, the security pin (260) would guarantee an extra safety.
• Taking into account that it can have some weight, release and remove the links (and
cases) collector [ 6 ] from underneath the pod as described in the first 2 steps of the
• Block the firing pin (439) of the M3P machine gun into position by screwing the
clamping screw OREA 869, from underneath and by using the special tool OREA 240,
into the hole in the front part of the bolt (411) (Fig. 5.4.f).
Using the clamping screw OREA 869 causes deformation of the firing pin (439) so that the
latter must be replaced by a new one (proceed as described in the documentation of the
machine gun) !!
(b) Breaking the ammunition belt at the feed tray (212) of the machine gun (if
necessary)
• Using the cartridge insertion/extraction tool OREA 740, break the ammunition belt by
extracting the cartridge next to the inlet opening of the feed tray (212) of the machine
gun (Fig. 5.4.g).
2006 07 EN - 87 - Catalog n° 3640084260

.
.
220
220
Fig. 5.4.h - Completely removing the ammunition belt
M3P 423
[4]
M3P
431/1
.
OREAA 6B
.
M3P
OREAA 6A
Fig. 5.4.i - Taking the M3P machine gun out of the pod (left-hand feeding)
2006 07 EN - 88 - Catalog n° 3640084260

(continued)
(c) Emptying the ammunition box [ 7 ] (if necessary)
• Unload the ammunition box [ 7 ] by pulling the ammunition belt completely out of the
box and the feed channel (220) (Fig. 5.4.h).
(d) Removal of the M3P machine gun from the pod
When removing the M3P machine gun from the pod, take into account that it weighs
approx. 39 kg and be very careful not to damage the inner structure of the pod and
to avoid injuries to the hands.
It is recommended that this operation is carried out by 2 persons.
When carrying out the next steps, take into account that the machine gun contains
live ammunition.
Always point the machine gun in a safe direction and never stand in front of the
barrel !
• Take the M3P machine gun out of the pod by proceeding as follows (Fig. 5.4.i) :
- Standing at the side opposite to the feeding side of the machine gun, pull the
locking pin (431/1) as far as possible out of the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the machine
gun (upper left part of Fig. 5.4.i).
- Correctly supporting the M3P machine gun, take it, from the rear side, carefully out
of the pod.
When taking the M3P machine gun out of the pod, it should be held slightly inclined
towards the left side (counterclockwise when viewed from the rear side) (also refer to the
upper right part of Fig. 5.4.i).
- Take the M3P machine gun completely out of the pod and place it on a clean
surface or on the ground.
- Push the locking pin (431/1) completely back into the elastic cradle [ 4 ].
Before closing the side door ((210) or (230)) at the side opposite to the feeding side
of the machine gun after the latter has been removed, do not forget to push the
locking pin (431/1) completely back into the elastic cradle [ 4 ].
2006 07 EN - 89 - Catalog n° 3640084260

601 601
M3P
M3P
Fig. 5.4.j - Opening the feed cover (601) of the machine gun and removing the remaining cartridges
485
485 .
.
411
Fig. 5.4.k - Raising the extractor (485) Fig. 5.4.l - Removing the cartridge from the front
face of the bolt (411)
2006 07 EN - 90 - Catalog n° 3640084260

(continued)
(e) After having removed the M3P machine gun from the pod
• Open the feed cover (601) of the machine gun by turning its latch and then remove the
remaining piece of ammunition belt and, if present, any separate link from the
ammunition feeding and ejection section of the gun (Fig. 5.4.j).
• If possible, raise the extractor (485) with a finger and then use a suitable tool to push
the cartridge remaining on the front face of the bolt (411) downwards so that it is
released from the bolt and falls out of the machine gun (Fig. 5.4.k and Fig. 5.4.l).
• Check the machine gun as described in the corresponding documentation.
• Reinstall the rear fairing (140) and lock it into position by using its latches (125).
• Close the side doors (210) and (230) of the pod and lock them into position by using
their latches.
• Indicate to the pilot that the machine gun has been removed and that he can continue
his checklist.
• Record the firing details as well as the relevant observations in the machine gun and
pod logbooks.
2006 07 EN - 91 - Catalog n° 3640084260

HMP 400 LC
HMP 400 LC-GFH
[6]
HMP 400 LC
HMP 400 LC-GFH
.
289
.
[6]
HMP 400 LCC

HMP 400 LCC-GFH
.
[6]
289
HMP 400 LCC .
HMP 400 LCC-GFH [6]
Fig. 5.4.m - Taking out the left retaining pin (289) Fig. 5.4.n - Removing the links (and cases)
of the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] collector [ 6 ]
217
210
Fig. 5.4.o - The links collector (217) on the right side door (210) of the
pod (left-hand feeding)
2006 07 EN - 92 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.4.5. Emptying the links (and cases) collectors
(a) In case of the HMP 400 LC and the HMP 400 LC-GFH
• At the left and right sides of the pod, take out the retaining pins (289) which hold the
links collector [ 6 ] (provided underneath the pod) in place (Fig. 5.4.m for the left
retaining pin).
• Sliding the links collector [ 6 ] rearwards and taking into account that it can have some
weight, release and remove it from underneath the pod (Fig. 5.4.n).
• Empty the links collector [ 6 ].
• Reinstall the links collector [ 6 ] and then secure it into position by reinserting its 2
retaining pins (289).
• Proceed to (c).
(b) In case of the HMP 400 LCC and the HMP 400 LCC-GFH
In case of the HMP 400 LCC and the HMP 400 LCC-GFH, be aware that the links
and cases collector [ 6 ] (provided underneath the pod) may contain some active
cartridges.
• At the left and right sides of the pod, take out the retaining pins (289) which hold the
links and cases collector [ 6 ] (provided underneath the pod) in place (Fig. 5.4.m for
the left retaining pin).
• Sliding the links and cases collector [ 6 ] rearwards and taking into account that it can
have some weight, release and remove it from underneath the pod (Fig. 5.4.n).
• Empty the links and cases collector [ 6 ].

Identify the active cartridges present in the links and cases collector [ 6 ] and collect them
separately from the empty cases.
• Reinstall the links and cases collector [ 6 ] and then secure it into position by reinserting
its 2 retaining pins (289).
• Proceed to (c).
(c) Emptying the links collector (217) on one of the side doors of the pod
• If not already done, and using its latches, unlock the side door ((210) or (230)) at the
side opposite to the feeding side of the machine gun and then open it (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.b).
• If there are links in the links collector (217) provided on the inner side of the side door,
empty the collector (Fig. 5.4.o).
• Close the side door(s) (210) and/or (230) and lock it (them) into position by using its
(their) latches.
2006 07 EN - 93 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 94 - Catalog n° 3640084260

5.4.6. Removal of the HMP 400 pod weapon system from the carrier
When removing the HMP 400 pod weapon system from the carrier, take into account
that it weighs 86.5 - 89.5 kg (without ammunition) / 138.5 - 141.5 kg (completely
loaded).
It is recommended that this operation is carried out by using a lifting device or by at
least 2 persons.
• Disconnect the connector of the carrier from the weapon system connector (721) which can
be found on top of the HMP 400 pod weapon system.
• Take out the release unit security pin with ‘REMOVE PIN BEFORE FLIGHT’ streamer.
• Unlock the HMP 400 pod weapon system from the ejector arms of the release unit.
• Carefully remove the HMP 400 pod weapon system from the release unit of the carrier by
disengaging its suspension lugs (175).
2006 07 EN - 95 - Catalog n° 3640084260

A651
.
[8]
731
Fig. 6.a - Disconnecting the machine gun

connector (731) of the ABA [ 8 ] from the connector
(A651) at the rear side of the M3P machine gun
M3P 423
[4]
M3P
431/1
.
.
M3P
Fig. 6.b - Taking the M3P machine gun, from the rear side, out of the pod (left-hand feeding)
Before closing the side door ((210) or (230)) at the side opposite to the feeding side of
the machine gun after the latter has been removed, do not forget to push the locking
pin (431/1) completely back into the elastic cradle [ 4 ].
2006 07 EN - 96 - Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 6 : TAKING THE M3P MACHINE GUN OUT OF THE POD
The following removal procedure assumes that the M3P machine gun is empty and that
the moving parts of the machine gun are at their most forward position.
- If the HMP 400 pod weapon system has been used on a carrier, ensure that the safety
procedure described in § 5.4.1 as well as the checking procedure described in § 5.4.2
have been carried out.
Please note that, if, after landing, there was still ammunition at the ammunition feeding and
ejection section of the M3P machine gun (and no problem was detected when carrying out the
safety procedure after the carrier has landed), the safety procedure described in § 5.4.1 has
asked to unload the machine gun (as described in § 5.4.3) before proceeding to the checking
procedure described in § 5.4.2.
Also note that, if a problem was detected when carrying out the safety procedure after the
carrier has landed, the safety procedure described in § 5.4.1 has already asked to (safely) take
the machine gun out of the pod as described in § 5.4.4.
- If, in case the HMP 400 pod weapon system has not been used on a carrier, and, for any
reason, the M3P machine gun is already loaded, unload it as described in § 5.4.3 and
then carry out the checking procedure described in § 5.4.2.
- In case of doubt about the condition of the M3P machine gun, carry out the checking
procedure described in § 5.4.2 in order to ensure that the machine gun is really empty.
- In any case, ensure that, at the end of the checking procedure described in § 5.4.2, the
moving parts of the machine gun have been moved towards their most forward position.
In order to take the M3P machine gun out of the HMP 400 pod weapon system, proceed as
follows :
• Using their latches, unlock both side doors (210) and (230) and then open them (also refer
to Fig. 5.1.b).
• Using its 2 latches (125), unlock the rear fairing (140) and then remove it (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.a).
• Take the M3P machine gun out of the pod by proceeding as follows :
- Disconnect the machine gun connector (731) of the ABA [ 8 ] from the connector (A651)
at the rear side of the M3P machine gun (Fig. 6.a).
- Standing at the side opposite to the feeding side of the machine gun, pull the locking pin
(431/1) as far as possible out of the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the machine gun (upper left
part of Fig. 6.b).
- Correctly supporting the M3P machine gun, take it, from the rear side, carefully out of
the pod (Fig. 6.b).
When taking the M3P machine gun out of the pod, it should be held slightly inclined towards
the left side (counterclockwise when viewed from the rear side) (also refer to the upper right
part of Fig. 6.b).
- Push the locking pin (431/1) completely back into the elastic cradle [ 4 ].
• Reinstall the rear fairing (140) and lock it into position by using its latches (125).
• Close the side doors (210) and (230) of the pod and lock them into position by using their
latches.
2006 07 EN - 97 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 98 - Catalog n° 3640084260

The following maintenance instructions only apply to the HMP 400 container. For more
information about the M3P machine gun, refer to the corresponding documentation.
For intervening on the HMP 400 container, it is recommended to use the following
products :
• Cleaning :
R-TROOP (or another equivalent solvent)
MIL-PRF-680, Type I (dry cleaning solvent)
• Lubrication :
For temperatures ≥ -17°C :
MIL-L-46000 (NATO O-158) (or another equivalent lubricant)
For temperatures < -17°C :
MIL-PRF-14107 (NATO O-157) (or another equivalent lubricant)
• Preservation :
MIL-PRF-63460 (NATO S-758) (or another equivalent lubricant)
• Locking :
Loctite 243 (or another equivalent locking compound)
7.1. CONTAINER FRAME [ 1 ]
Unless it has been used in very sandy or dusty conditions, the container frame [ 1 ] of the
HMP 400 pod weapon system does not require special periodical maintenance.
If the container frame [ 1 ] is soiled, clean it with a soft, dry cloth. If necessary, use water (with a
soft solvent).
7.2. FRONT AND REAR FAIRINGS [ 2 ]
Unless they have been used in very sandy or dusty conditions, the front and rear fairings (120)
and (140) of the HMP 400 pod weapon system do not require special periodical maintenance.
If the front fairing (120) and/or the rear fairing (140) are soiled, clean them with a soft, dry
cloth. If necessary, use water (with a soft solvent).
2006 07 EN - 99 - Catalog n° 3640084260

7.3. BORESIGHTING ASSEMBLY [ 3 ]
In normal conditions, it is recommended to clean the boresighting assembly [ 3 ] after every

10,000 rounds.
Clean the boresighting assembly [ 3 ] with a soft, dry cloth. If necessary, use water (with a soft
solvent).
If, due to the use of the HMP 400 pod weapon system in very sandy or dusty conditions, the
boresighting assembly [ 3 ] is very soiled, it should be cleaned earlier and more thoroughly.
For a more thorough cleaning, proceed as follows :
- Remove and disassemble the boresighting assembly [ 3 ] (refer to § 8.3).
- Clean the components of the boresighting assembly [ 3 ] with an adequate solvent (refer
to the list at the beginning of this chapter).
- Thoroughly dry the components cleaned in the previous step.
- Lightly lubricate the lateral adjustment axis (261) as well as the vertical adjustment axis
(267).
Use an adequate lubricant (refer to the list at the beginning of this chapter).
- Reassemble and reinstall the boresighting assembly [ 3 ].
7.4. ELASTIC CRADLE [ 4 ]

The elastic cradle [ 4 ] should be subjected to a maintenance intervention after every 10,000
rounds.
If, due to the use of the HMP 400 pod weapon system in very sandy or dusty conditions, the elastic
cradle [ 4 ] is very soiled, it should be cleaned earlier.
The maintenance intervention consists of a thorough cleaning combined with the replacement
of the parts contained in the Periodical Replacement Parts kit “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/9).
Proceed as follows :
- Remove and disassemble the elastic cradle [ 4 ] (refer to § 8.4).
- Replace the parts supplied in the Periodical Replacement Parts kit “PRP 10000 RDS”
(905/9).
- Clean the other parts of the elastic cradle [ 4 ] with an adequate solvent (refer to the list
at the beginning of this chapter).
- Lightly lubricate the elastic cradle guides (412/1) as well as the 4 springs (2 x (414) and
2 x (435/1)).
- Reassemble and reinstall the elastic cradle [ 4 ].
NOTE : Do not apply excessive lubrication in order to avoid a bad functioning of the elastic
cradle [ 4 ] due to the build-up of grease and firing residues.
2006 07 EN - 100 - Catalog n° 3640084260

7.5. RECOCKING SYSTEM [ 5 ]
In normal conditions, it is recommended to clean the recocking system [ 5 ] after every 10,000
rounds.
Clean the recocking system [ 5 ] with a soft, dry cloth. If necessary, use water (with a soft solvent).
If, due to the use of the HMP 400 pod weapon system in very sandy or dusty conditions, the
recocking system [ 5 ] is very soiled, it should be cleaned earlier and more thoroughly.
For a more thorough cleaning, proceed as follows :

- Remove and disassemble the recocking system [ 5 ] (refer to § 8.5).
- Clean the components of the recocking system [ 5 ] with an adequate solvent (refer to the
list at the beginning of this chapter).
- Lightly lubricate the surfaces of the cocking device (E1) which are subjected to friction.
- Reassemble and reinstall the recocking system [ 5 ].
NOTE : Wipe off any excess of lubrication from the cocking device (E1) and ensure that no
lubrication enters the actuator assembly (511).
7.6. LINKS (AND CASES) COLLECTOR [ 6 ]

Unless it has been used in very sandy or dusty conditions, the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] of
the HMP 400 pod weapon system does not require special periodical maintenance.
If the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] is soiled, clean it with a soft, dry cloth. If necessary, use
water (with a soft solvent).
7.7. AMMUNITION BOX [ 7 ]
In order to guarantee a correct feeding of the ammunition out of the ammunition box [ 7 ], the
latter should regularly be checked and, if necessary, cleaned.
Clean the ammunition box [ 7 ] with a soft, dry cloth. If necessary, use water (with a soft solvent).
Even for a thorough cleaning, it is normally not necessary to disassemble the ammunition box [ 7 ].
A regular and light lubrication of the left and right extremities of the 6 ammunition blade axes
(353) is also recommended in order to ensure that the axes can smoothly carry out their
restricted vertical movement in the corresponding elongated holes in the ammunition box body
(G1).
2006 07 EN - 101 - Catalog n° 3640084260

217
210
216 (°)
3x
A1
161
218
7x
A2
247
A3
249
260
461
2x
a
289
4x 182 246
See Fig. 8.4.a
184 216 (°)

183 4x
3x
4x
See Fig. 8.1.b
460
463
181
466 465
230
464
See Fig. 8.4.a
a
Fig. 8.1.a - Container frame [ 1 ] (part I)
2006 07 EN - 102 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Before any intervention on the HMP 400 pod weapon system, ensure to be familiar with
the safety information given in chapter 3 of this Maintenance Manual.
When removing, disassembling, reassembling or reinstalling any component of the
weapon system, NEVER use a hammer, unless explicitly mentioned in the procedure.
The following disassembly and reassembly procedures only apply to the HMP 400
container. For more information about the M3P machine gun, refer to the
corresponding documentation.
The following procedures assume that the HMP 400 pod weapon system has been
removed from the carrier and that the M3P machine gun has been taken out of the
pod.
8.1. CONTAINER FRAME [ 1 ]
8.1.1. Removal and reinstallation of the links collector (217)
Requirements : • UT 1936 (Screwdriver support tip)

• UT 2376 (Adapter ETORM.104)
• Torque wrench
• Using its latches, unlock the side door ((210) or (230)) at the side opposite to the feeding
side of the machine gun and then open it (also refer to Fig. 5.1.b).
• If there are links in the links collector (217), empty the collector.
• Using the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2376, take out the 7 screws
(218) which secure the links collector (217) to the side door and then release and remove
the collector.
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the 7 screws
(218) should be tightened with a torque of 1.4 Nm.
2006 07 EN - 103 - Catalog n° 3640084260

217
210
216 (°)
3x
A1
161
218
7x
A2
247
A3
249
260
461
2x
a
289
4x 182 246
See Fig. 8.4.a
184 216 (°)

183 4x
3x
4x
See Fig. 8.1.b
460
463
181
466 465
230
464
See Fig. 8.4.a
a
2006 07 EN - 104 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.1. CONTAINER FRAME [ 1 ] (continued)
8.1.2. Removal and reinstallation of a side door ((210) or (230))
Requirements : • UT 1817 (Universal pliers)

• If necessary, requirements of § 8.1.1
• Using its latches, unlock the side door ((210) or (230)) and then open it (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.b).
• If the side door has been provided with the links collector (217), and if necessary, remove
the collector as described in § 8.1.1.
NOTE : When carrying out the next step, take into account that a side door is rather heavy.
• While supporting the side door ((210) or (230)) and using the pliers UT 1817, take out the
3 hinge pins (216) which secure the side door to the container body (A2) and then release
and remove the door.
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account the following
points :
- The 3 hinge pins (216) securing a side door ((210) or (230)) are not all oriented the
same :
- The front and middle hinge pins (216) should be reinserted from the rear side.
- The rear hinge pin (216) should be reinserted from the front side.
- Ensure that the hinge pins (216) are pushed fully home.
- After its reinstallation, ensure that the side door ((210) or (230)) can correctly and
smoothly be opened and closed.
2006 07 EN - 105 - Catalog n° 3640084260

217
210
216 (°)
3x
A1
161
218
7x
A2
247
A3
249
260
461
2x
a
289
4x 182 246
See Fig. 8.4.a
184 216 (°)

183 4x
3x
4x
See Fig. 8.1.b
460
463
181
466 465
230
464
See Fig. 8.4.a
a
2006 07 EN - 106 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.1.3. Removal and reinstallation of a links (and cases) collector retaining pin
(289)
Requirements : • UT 1817 (Universal pliers) (If pin (289) should be disassembled)
• 5 mm screwdriver
• 5.5 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
• Using its latches, unlock the side door ((210) or (230)) at the corresponding side of the pod
and then open it (also refer to Fig. 5.1.b).
• If not already done, take the links (and cases) collector retaining pin (289) out of the
container body (A2).
If the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] is still present underneath the pod, only remove one links
(and cases) collector retaining pin (289) at a time.
If both links (and cases) collector retaining pins (289) should be removed, first remove the links
(and cases) collector [ 6 ] from underneath the pod as described in the corresponding § 5.4.5 (a)
or (b).
• While holding the nut (247) in position with the 5.5 mm wrench and using the 5 mm
screwdriver, take out the screw (246) and then release and remove the links (and cases)
collector retaining pin (289) from the container body (A2).
• If necessary, disassemble the links (and cases) collector retaining pin (289) by using the
pliers UT 1817.
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the screw (246)
should be tightened with a torque of 1 Nm.
8.1.4. Removal and reinstallation of the elastic cradle support (181)

• UT 2369 (Adapter EBNA.104)
• 8 mm wrench
• 11 mm wrench
• Requirements of § 8.4.1
• Remove the elastic cradle [ 4 ] as described in § 8.4.1.
• Using the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2369, take out the screw
(232) which secures the front end of the cases ejection channel (231) to the rear end of the
elastic cradle support (181) (also refer to Fig. 8.1.b).
• While each time holding the corresponding nut (184) in position with the 8 mm wrench,
while using the 11 mm wrench and taking care not to lose the corresponding washers
(183), take out the 4 screws (182) and then release and remove the elastic cradle support
(181) from the rear side of the front inner frame of the container body (A2).
points :
- A screw (182) should be tightened with a torque of 12 Nm.
- The (front) screw (232) should be tightened with a torque of 2.5 Nm.
After any intervention on the elastic cradle support (181), carry out the harmonization
procedure given in § 9.1.
2006 07 EN - 107 - Catalog n° 3640084260

238/1
2x
2x 175
529
2x
2x c
d 2x
419 2x 161
(Fig. 8.1.a)
4x
232
c1
231
d1 a
d2 4x
4x
c2 4x
229 b
192
228 309
224
181
(Fig. 8.1.a)
4x
191 (*) 229
228
220
b
Fig. 8.1.b - Container frame [ 1 ] (part II)
the rear side.
2006 07 EN - 108 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.1.5. Removal and reinstallation of the suspension lugs (175)

Requirements : • OREA 741 (Pin assembly)
• Using the stem of the OREA 741 inserted into the holes of the suspension lugs (175),
unscrew and remove the lugs from the upper side of the container body (A2).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the 2
suspension lugs (175) should be tightened until they are flush with the upper side of the
container body (A2).
After any intervention on the suspension lugs (175), carry out the harmonization
procedure given in § 9.1.
8.1.6. Removal and reinstallation of a fairing fixing loop (191)

Requirements : • UT 1908 (Screwdriver 8 x 150 mm)
• 2 x 14 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
Two fairing fixing loops (191) are screwed from the front side and two are screwed from the rear side.
When intervening on a front/rear fairing fixing loop (191), it is recommended to carry out the same
intervention on the other front/rear fixing loop.
• Using its latches (125), unlock the fairing ((120) or (140)) at the corresponding side of the
pod and then remove it (also refer to Fig. 5.1.a).
• While holding the first nut (192) in position with one of the 14 mm wrenches and using the
other wrench, unscrew and remove the second nut (192) from the thread of the fairing
fixing loop (191).
• While holding the fairing fixing loop (191) in position with the stem of the screwdriver
UT 1908, taking into account that the washer (309) will be released and using one of the
14 mm wrenches, unscrew and remove the first nut (192) from the thread of the fixing loop.
• Using the stem of the screwdriver UT 1908, loosen the fairing fixing loop (191) until it can
be unscrewed manually.
• Manually unscrew the fairing fixing loop (191) and then take it out of the container body
(A2).
points :
- Before screwing and tightening the first nut (192) on its thread, ensure that a fairing fixing
loop (191) is perfectly vertical and that it correctly catches the corresponding latch (125)
of the corresponding fairing ((120) or (140)) when the latter is reinstalled.
If necessary, screw or unscrew the fairing fixing loop (191) in order to obtain a correct
positioning of the corresponding side of the fairing onto the container body (A2).
- A first nut (192) should be tightened with a torque of 10 Nm.

- A second (counter)nut (192) should be tightened with a torque of 25 Nm.
2006 07 EN - 109 - Catalog n° 3640084260

238/1
2x
2x 175
529
2x
2x c
d 2x
419 2x 161
(Fig. 8.1.a)
4x
232
c1
231
d1 a
d2 4x
4x
c2 4x
229 b
192
228 309
224
181
(Fig. 8.1.a)
4x
191 (*) 229
228
220
b
the rear side.
2006 07 EN - 110 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.1.7. Removal and reinstallation of the feed channel (220)

• Torque wrench
• Remove the links (and cases) collector [ 6 ] from underneath the pod as described in the
• Using its latches (125), unlock the front fairing (120) and then remove it (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.a).
• Using its latches, unlock the side door ((210) or (230)) at the side corresponding to the
feeding side of the machine gun and then open it (also refer to Fig. 5.1.b).
• Using the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2369 from underneath,
unscrew and remove the screw (224) which secures the lower front side of the feed channel
(220) to the inner bottom frame of the container body (A2).
• Again using the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2369 from
underneath and taking care not to lose the corresponding washer (229), unscrew and
remove the screw (228) which secures the lower rear side of the feed channel (220) to the
inner bottom frame of the container body (A2).
• Using the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2369 from the front side
and taking care not to lose the corresponding washer (229), unscrew and remove the screw
(228) which secures the front side of the feed channel (220) to the rear side of the front
inner frame of the container body (A2).
• Take the feed channel (220) out of the container body (A2).
points :
- For fixing the front side of the feed channel (220), and depending if the weapon system
has been configured for left/right-hand feeding, only the most right/left hole of the
mounting support provided at the upper front side of the channel is used.
- A screw (228) should be tightened with a torque of 2.5 Nm.
- The screw (224) should be tightened with a torque of 2.5 Nm.
2006 07 EN - 111 - Catalog n° 3640084260

238/1
2x
2x 175
529
2x
2x c
d 2x
419 2x 161
(Fig. 8.1.a)
4x
232
c1
231
d1 a
d2 4x
4x
c2 4x
229 b
192
228 309
224
181
(Fig. 8.1.a)
4x
191 (*) 229
228
220
b
the rear side.
2006 07 EN - 112 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.1.8. Removal and reinstallation of the cases ejection channel (231)

• Torque wrench
• Remove the elastic cradle [ 4 ] as described in § 8.4.1.
(232) which secure the cases ejection channel (231).
4 of the screws (232) are used to fix the cases ejection channel (231) to the inner bottom frame of
the container body (A2) while the 5th screw fixes the front end of the channel to the rear end of
the elastic cradle support (181).
• Take the cases ejection channel (231) out of the container body (A2).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the screws
8.1.9. Removal and reinstallation of a retaining pin (238/1)
Requirements : • 5 mm screwdriver
• 5.5 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
• Remove the ammunition box [ 7 ] as described in § 5.2.1 (a) and (b).
• While holding the nut (419) in position with the 5.5 mm wrench and using the 5 mm
screwdriver, take out the screw (529) and then release and remove the retaining pin
(238/1) from the corresponding support at the front side of the container body (A2).
2006 07 EN - 113 - Catalog n° 3640084260

128
140
4x
122
B1
b
142
127
144
6x
123 b 125
126
a 142
122 B1
123
128
127
4x
144
6x
a
126
125
120
Fig. 8.2.a - Front and rear fairings [ 2 ]
2006 07 EN - 114 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.2. FRONT AND REAR FAIRINGS [ 2 ]
A centering pin (122) is fixed onto the corresponding inner side of the body of the
corresponding fairing by means of 4 rivets (128).
A latch assembly (B1) is fixed, by way of its bracket (123), onto the corresponding
inner side of the body of the corresponding fairing by means of 6 rivets (144).
Please note that rivets may only be replaced by qualified technicians.
8.2.1. Removal and reinstallation of a latch (125)
Requirements : • UT 1803 (Half-round nose pliers)

• UT 1817 (Universal pliers)
• Using its latches (125), unlock the fairing ((120) or (140)) at the corresponding side of the
pod and then remove it (also refer to Fig. 5.1.a).
• Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the retaining pin (127) and pull it out of the upper end
of the axis (126) which holds the latch (125) in a pivoting position.
• Using the pliers UT 1817 from underneath and taking care not to lose the corresponding
washer (142), pull out the axis (126) in order to release and then remove the latch (125).
points :
- Ensure that the latch (125) is oriented as shown in Fig. 8.2.a.
- After having reinstalled the retaining pin (127), lock it by bending its 2 extremities.
2006 07 EN - 115 - Catalog n° 3640084260

250
272
259
3x
251 264
271
268
273 3x
a
274 3x
265
278
267
263
c
266
275
d C2
262
276
277
d
257 4x b
b C1 261
2x
253
256
255
A2 2x
(Fig. 8.1.a)
254
2x
Fig. 8.3.a - Boresighting assembly [ 3 ]
After any intervention on the boresighting assembly [ 3 ], carry out the adjustment of
the distance between the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking system [ 5 ] given in
§ 9.2 as well as the harmonization procedure given in § 9.1.
2006 07 EN - 116 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.3. BORESIGHTING ASSEMBLY [ 3 ]
A nut plate (256) is fixed onto the corresponding side of the lateral guide support
(253) by means of 2 rivets (257).
8.3.1. Removal and reinstallation of the boresighting assembly (250)

Please note that the catalog number of the boresighting assembly [ 3 ] is (250).
Requirements : • UT 1031 (Combination wrench 3/8”)

• Torque wrench
• Remove the recocking system [ 5 ] as described in § 8.5.1.
• Release the electronic box ABA [ 8 ] as described in § 8.8.1.
• Using the wrench UT 1031 from the front side, unscrew and remove the 2 nuts (265) and
then release and remove the spacer plate (268) from the front extremities of the 2 fixing
screws (264).
NOTE : Once they have been removed, the 2 nuts (265) must always be replaced by new
ones !
• Pull the 2 fixing screws (264) rearwards out of their holes in the mounting support provided
on the inner bottom frame of the container body (A2), the boresighting support (251) and
the lateral adjustment slider (C1).
• Using the wrench UT 1031 from underneath and taking care not to lose the 2 washers
(255), take out the 2 bolts (254).
• Lift the boresighting assembly (250) up and off its mounting support provided on the inner
bottom frame of the container body (A2) and then take the assembly out of the container
body.
points :
- Ensure that the boresighting assembly (250) is oriented as shown in Fig. 8.3.a.
- Ensure that the lugs of the boresighting support (251) fit correctly between the lugs of the
mounting support provided on the inner bottom frame of the container body (A2).
- A bolt (254) should be tightened with a torque of 3 Nm.
- Before reinserting the 2 fixing screws (264), ensure that their holes in the mounting
support provided on the inner bottom frame of the container body (A2), the boresighting
support (251) and the lateral adjustment slider (C1) are aligned correctly.
If necessary, use a tool such as a drift punch to correctly align the holes.
- A (new) nut (265) should be tightened with a torque of 20 Nm.
2006 07 EN - 117 - Catalog n° 3640084260

250
272
259
3x
251 264
271
268
273 3x
a
274 3x
265
278
267
263
c
266
275
d C2
262
276
277
d
257 4x b
b C1 261
2x
253
256
255
A2 2x
(Fig. 8.1.a)
254
2x
2006 07 EN - 118 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.3. BORESIGHTING ASSEMBLY [ 3 ] (continued)
8.3.2. Removal and reinstallation of the recocking system supporting plate (271)
Requirements : • UT 1009 (Combination wrench, short 10 mm)

• Torque wrench
• Using the wrench UT 1009 from underneath and taking care not to lose the 3 washers
(273), unscrew and remove the 3 nuts (274).
NOTE : Once they have been removed, the 3 nuts (274) must always be replaced by new
ones !
• Lift the recocking system supporting plate (271) up and off the boresighting support (251)
and then, if not already done, separate the 3 bolts (272) from the supporting plate.
points :
- Ensure that the recocking system supporting plate (271) is oriented as shown in
Fig. 8.3.a.
- Ensure that the heads of the 3 bolts (272) correctly engage the groove in the recocking
system supporting plate (271).
- A (new) nut (274) should be tightened with a torque of 10 Nm.
8.3.3. Removal and reinstallation of the vertical adjustment and supporting

assembly (278)
Requirements : • UT 1609 (Hexagonal key 6 mm)
• Requirements for removing the nuts (265) given in § 8.3.1
• If necessary, requirements of § 8.3.2
• If necessary, remove the recocking system supporting plate (271) as described in § 8.3.2.
• Remove the 2 fixing screws (264), the spacer plate (268) and the 2 nuts (265) as described
in § 8.3.1.
• Using the hexagonal key UT 1609 in the radially drilled holes in the upper end of the
vertical adjustment axis (267), unscrew the axis until the vertical adjustment and supporting
assembly (278) is released and then take the assembly out of the container body (A2).
During this operation, it is recommended to count the number of turns in order to be able, when
reassembling, to obtain a situation as close as possible to the original one.
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that, in order to
reduce the length of time necessary for the harmonization procedure, it is recommended to
screw the vertical adjustment axis (267) by the same number of turns it was unscrewed during
the disassembly.
2006 07 EN - 119 - Catalog n° 3640084260

250
272
259
3x
251 264
271
268
273 3x
a
274 3x
265
278
267
263
c
266
275
d C2
262
276
277
d
257 4x b
b C1 261
2x
253
256
255
A2 2x
(Fig. 8.1.a)
254
2x
2006 07 EN - 120 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.3.4. Disassembly of the vertical adjustment and supporting assembly (278) into
the boresighting support (251) and the vertical adjustment axis (267) (and
reassembly)

• UT 1908 (Screwdriver 8 x 150 mm)
• UT 2015 (Drift punch, dia. 2.9 mm, lg 24 mm)
• UT 2112 (Hammer 300 g)
• If necessary, 3.2 mm drill for drilling a hole for the pin (263)
• Remove the vertical adjustment and supporting assembly (278) as described in § 8.3.3.
• Using the drift punch UT 2015 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out the pin (263).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the pin (263) must always be replaced by a new one !
• While holding the vertical adjustment axis (267) in place by means of the hexagonal key
UT 1609 inserted into its lower hole and using the screwdriver UT 1908, completely
unscrew the screw (259) and then separate the boresighting support (251) from the vertical
adjustment axis.
points :
- If necessary, the screw (259) and the vertical adjustment axis (267) must always be
replaced at the same time.
Take into account that, if the screw (259) and the vertical adjustment axis (267) will be replaced
by new ones, it will be necessary to drill into them (see further) and that this work may only be
carried out by qualified technicians.
- Lightly lubricate the threads of the screw (259) and the vertical adjustment axis (267).
- If the screw (259) and the vertical adjustment axis (267) are not replaced by new ones,
ensure that their holes for the pin (263) are perfectly aligned before reinserting the (new)
pin.
If necessary, use the drift punch UT 2015 to correctly align the holes.
If the screw (259) and the vertical adjustment axis (267) are replaced by new ones, first
reassemble the vertical adjustment and supporting assembly (278) until there is a
clearance of 0.04 ± 0.02 mm between the head of the screw and the boresighting
support (251). After that, and using the 3.2 mm drill, drill into the screw and the axis in
order to create a hole for the (new) pin (263).
After having drilled, remove any drilling residues.
- The pin (263) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
2006 07 EN - 121 - Catalog n° 3640084260

250
272
259
3x
251 264
271
268
273 3x
a
274 3x
265
278
267
263
c
266
275
d C2
262
276
277
d
257 4x b
b C1 261
2x
253
256
255
A2 2x
(Fig. 8.1.a)
254
2x
2006 07 EN - 122 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.3.5. Removal and reinstallation of the lateral adjustment assembly (275)
Requirements : • Requirements of § 8.3.1
• Remove the boresighting assembly (250) as described in § 8.3.1.
• Separate the vertical adjustment and supporting assembly (278) from the lateral adjustment
assembly (275) by proceeding as described in § 8.3.3.
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order.
8.3.6. Disassembly of the lateral adjustment assembly (275) into the lateral
adjustment axis (261), the lateral guide assembly (276) and the lateral
guide support assembly (277) (and reassembly)
Requirements : • UT 2015 (Drift punch, dia. 2.9 mm, lg 24 mm)
• UT 2112 (Hammer 300 g)
• UT 2359 (Bush with handle 12 mm)
• 12 mm wrench
• If necessary, 3.2 mm drill for drilling a hole for the pin (266)
• Remove the lateral adjustment assembly (275) as described in § 8.3.5.
• Using the drift punch UT 2015 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out the pin (266).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the pin (266) must always be replaced by a new one !
• While holding the lateral adjustment axis (261) in place by means of the 12 mm wrench
and using the bush with handle UT 2359, completely unscrew the nut (262).
• Taking into account that the lateral guide support assembly (277) will be released, screw
the lateral adjustment axis (261) completely out of the lateral guide assembly (276).
points :
- If necessary, the nut (262) and the lateral adjustment axis (261) must always be replaced
at the same time.
Take into account that, if the nut (262) and the lateral adjustment axis (261) will be replaced by
new ones, it will be necessary to drill into them (see further) and that this work may only be
carried out by qualified technicians.
- Lightly lubricate the threads of the lateral adjustment axis (261).
- If the nut (262) and the lateral adjustment axis (261) are not replaced by new ones,
ensure that their holes for the pin (266) are perfectly aligned before reinserting the (new)
pin.
If necessary, use the drift punch UT 2015 to correctly align the holes.
If the nut (262) and the lateral adjustment axis (261) are replaced by new ones, first
reassemble the lateral adjustment assembly (275) until there is a distance of
0.04 ± 0.02 mm between the nut and the lateral adjustment slider (C1). After that, and
using the 3.2 mm drill, drill into the nut and the axis in order to create a hole for the
(new) pin (266).
After having drilled, remove any drilling residues.
2006 07 EN - 123 - Catalog n° 3640084260

423
420 422
401 D2
433/1
422
413/1 431/1
2x
2x
414 435/1
439/1
461
2x
(Fig. 8.1.a)
2x
438
2x
2x
D1 2x
a
436
2x 437
412/1 415/1
463
(Fig. 8.1.a)
466
(Fig. 8.1.a)
465
464 (Fig. 8.1.a)
(Fig. 8.1.a)
b
Fig. 8.4.a - Elastic cradle [ 4 ]
After any intervention on the elastic cradle [ 4 ], carry out the adjustment of the
distance between the elastic cradle and the recocking system [ 5 ] given in § 9.2 as
well as the harmonization procedure given in § 9.1.
2006 07 EN - 124 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.4. ELASTIC CRADLE [ 4 ]
8.4.1. Removal of the elastic cradle (401)

Please note that the catalog number of the elastic cradle [ 4 ] is (401).

• OREA 734 (Hexagonal tubular wrench 27x160 modified)
• OREA 741 (Pin assembly)
• Torque wrench
to Fig. 5.1.b).
• Inside the container body (A2) and using the pliers UT 1817, unbend the split pin (465)
and then pull it out.
• Using the OREA 734 and the OREA 741, loosen the locking nut (464) until it can be
unscrewed manually.
• Taking care not to lose the washers ((463) and (466)), manually unscrew and remove the
locking nut (464) from the thread of the bolt (461).
• Taking into account that the bush (415/1) has been inserted in the bottom of the elastic
cradle frame (D1), carefully take the elastic cradle (401) out of the container body (A2).
• If not already done, separate the bolt (461) from the elastic cradle frame (D1).
points :
- Ensure that the elastic cradle (401) is oriented as shown in Fig. 8.4.a.
- Ensure that the head of the bolt (461) correctly engages its housing in the elastic cradle
frame (D1).
- The locking nut (464) should be tightened with a torque of 5 Nm.
- After having reinstalled the split pin (465), lock it by bending its 2 extremities.
2006 07 EN - 125 - Catalog n° 3640084260

423
420 422
401 D2
433/1
422
413/1 431/1
2x
2x
414 435/1
439/1
461
2x
(Fig. 8.1.a)
2x
438
2x
2x
D1 2x
a
436
2x 437
412/1 415/1
463
(Fig. 8.1.a)
466
(Fig. 8.1.a)
465
464 (Fig. 8.1.a)
(Fig. 8.1.a)
b
OREAA 43B
D2
435/1
OREAA 6A
D1
438 414
OREAA 43A
Fig. 8.4.b - Installing the safety rod OREAA 6A onto the elastic cradle (401)
2006 07 EN - 126 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.4. ELASTIC CRADLE [ 4 ] (continued)
8.4.2. Disassembly and reassembly of the elastic cradle (401)
Requirements : • UT 1030 (Combination wrench 24 mm)
• UT 2112 (Hammer 300 g)
• OREAA 6A (Safety rod)
• OREAA 43A (Rest, cradle slide)
• OREAA 43B (Rest, cradle seat)
• Torque wrench
• Remove the elastic cradle (401) as described in § 8.4.1.
• Install the safety rod OREAA 6A by proceeding as follows (Fig. 8.4.b) :
- Fit the OREAA 43B onto the front part of the elastic cradle frame (D1).
- Fit the OREAA 43A onto the rear part of the elastic cradle slide body (D2).
- Fit the safety rod OREAA 6A into the grooves of the OREAA 43B and the OREAA 43A.
- Turn the knurled wheel (a) of the safety rod OREAA 6A in order to compress the front
compression springs (414) until the rear compression springs (435/1) are no longer under
tension.
NOTE : Unless it is necessary to remove the elastic cradle slide assembly (420), only remove
and reinstall one elastic cradle guide (412/1) at a time.
• Using the pliers UT 1817, unbend the split pin(s) (438) and then pull it (them) out.
• Using the wrench UT 1030, loosen the locking nut(s) (437) until it (they) can be unscrewed
manually.
• Taking care not to lose the spring washer(s) (436), manually unscrew and remove the locking
nut(s) (437).
• Slide the elastic cradle guide(s) (412/1) approx. 100 mm out of the elastic cradle frame (D1)
and then remove the rear stop bush(es) (439/1) and the rear compression spring(s) (435/1).
• Turn the knurled wheel (a) of the safety rod OREAA 6A in order to completely release the
pressure on the front compression springs (414) and then remove the safety rod.
• Remove the front compression spring(s) (414) and the front stop bush(es) (413/1) by sliding
the elastic cradle guide(s) (412/1) completely out of the elastic cradle frame (D1).
Please note that, if the above procedure has been carried out on both elastic cradle guides
(412/1), the elastic cradle slide assembly (420) will now also be released.
• If the elastic cradle guides (412/1) are removed and reinstalled one by one (see above),
reinstall (or replace) the presently removed guide and then repeat the 6 previous steps in
order to remove the other guide.
• If necessary, complete the disassembly of the elastic cradle (401) by proceeding as follows :
- Pull out the locking pin (431/1) and then, using the pliers UT 1817, separate the ring
(433/1) from the pin body.
- Using the pliers UT 1817, remove the locking pin retaining spring (423) and then, using
the drift punch UT 2018 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out one or both spring pins
(422).
2006 07 EN - 127 - Catalog n° 3640084260

423
420 422
401 D2
433/1
422
413/1 431/1
2x
2x
414 435/1
439/1
461
2x
(Fig. 8.1.a)
2x
438
2x
2x
D1 2x
a
436
2x 437
412/1 415/1
463
(Fig. 8.1.a)
466
(Fig. 8.1.a)
465
464 (Fig. 8.1.a)
(Fig. 8.1.a)
b
2006 07 EN - 128 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.4. ELASTIC CRADLE [ 4 ] (continued)
8.4.2. Disassembly and reassembly of the elastic cradle (401) (continued)
points :
- If they have been removed, the spring pins (422) must be reinstalled so that they protrude
outwards from the elastic cradle slide body (D2).
The inner extremity of a spring pin (422) must be flush with the inner side of the corresponding
lug of the elastic cradle slide body (D2).
- If they have been removed, both the locking pin (431/1) and its retaining spring (423)
must be reinstalled at the side opposite to the feeding side of the M3P machine gun.
- If it has been removed, ensure that the elastic cradle slide assembly (420) is oriented as
shown in Fig. 8.4.a.
- A locking nut (437) should be tightened with a torque of 8 to 20 Nm.
Ensure that, at the end of this operation, one of the grooves of the locking nut (437) is perfectly
aligned with the hole in the corresponding elastic cradle guide (412/1).
- After having reinstalled a split pin (438), lock it by bending its 2 extremities.
2006 07 EN - 129 - Catalog n° 3640084260

513/1
E2
511
271
(Fig. 8.3.a)
512
512
237
512
512
E3 237
6x
546
522/1
E1
545
520
536/1
523/1
530/1 501
Fig. 8.5.a - Recocking system [ 5 ]
After any intervention on the recocking system [ 5 ], carry out the adjustment of the
distance between the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking system given in § 9.2 as
2006 07 EN - 130 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.5. RECOCKING SYSTEM [ 5 ]
8.5.1. Removal and reinstallation of the recocking assembly (501)

• UT 1814 (Cutting pliers)
• UT 1816 (Joint-twist pliers)
• Torque wrench
to Fig. 5.1.b).
• Disconnect the recocking system connector (732) (also refer to Fig. 5.1.j).
• Using the cutting pliers UT 1814 underneath the recocking system supporting plate (271),
remove the 2 lockwires (237) from between the 2 x 2 screws (512).
• Using the hexagonal key UT 1609 from underneath, take out the 4 screws (512) in order to
release the recocking assembly (501).
• Carefully take the recocking assembly (501) out of the container body (A2).
points :
- Ensure that the recocking assembly (501) is oriented as shown in Fig. 8.5.a.
- A screw (512) should be tightened with a torque of 10 Nm.
- A lockwire (237) should be reinstalled by using the joint-twist pliers UT 1816 and so that,
when tension is applied to it, this results in a tightening (and not a loosening) effort on
the screws (512).
8.5.2. Removal and reinstallation of the safety pin (513/1)
• Using its latches (125), unlock the rear fairing (140) and then remove it (also refer to
Fig. 5.1.a).
• Using the pliers UT 1817, pull out the safety pin (513/1).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the safety pin (513/1) must always be replaced by a new
one !
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the (new) safety
pin (513/1) should protrude equally from the rear nut of the actuator assembly (511).
2006 07 EN - 131 - Catalog n° 3640084260

513/1
E2
511
271
(Fig. 8.3.a)
512
512
237
512
512
E3 237
6x
546
522/1
E1
545
520
536/1
523/1
530/1 501
Fig. 8.5.a - Recocking system [ 5 ]
After any intervention on the recocking system [ 5 ], carry out the adjustment of the
distance between the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking system given in § 9.2 as
2006 07 EN - 132 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.5. RECOCKING SYSTEM [ 5 ] (continued)
8.5.3. Removal and reinstallation of the locking assembly (520) which is

composed of the cocking device (E1) and its guide plate (E3)
• UT 2360 (Speeder, square 3/8”)
• UT 2361 (Bush, 16 mm, hex. opening, square 3/8”, lg 32.5 mm)
• Loctite 243
• Torque wrench
• Using their latches, unlock the side doors (210) and (230) and then open them (also refer
to Fig. 5.1.b).
• Using the speeder UT 2360 with the bush UT 2361, carefully disengage and remove the
cocking device (E1) from the actuator pin (E2) at the left side of the actuator assembly
(511).
(546) and then release and remove the cocking device guide plate (E3) from the left side of
the actuator assembly (511).
Take into account that Loctite 243 has been applied to the threads of the 6 screws (546).
points :
- Before installing the screws (546), apply Loctite 243 to their threads.
- Lightly lubricate the cocking device (E1) before reinstalling it.
- Ensure that the hole in the cocking device (E1) correctly engages the actuator pin (E2)
and that the body of the cocking device fits between the guides of its guide plate (E3).
8.5.4. Disassembly and reassembly of the cocking device (E1)

Requirements : • UT 2019 (Drift punch, dia. 1.9 mm, lg 35 mm)
• UT 2112 (Hammer 300 g)
• Requirements for removing the cocking device (E1) given in § 8.5.3
• Remove the cocking device (E1) as described in § 8.5.3.
• Using the drift punch UT 2019 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out the spring pin (536/1)
and then, taking care not to lose the spring (545), separate the cocking device (E1) into the
base (522/1), the hinge pin (523/1) and the pawl (530/1).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the spring pin (536/1) must always be replaced by a
new one !
points :
- Ensure that the components of the cocking device (E1) are oriented as shown in
Fig. 8.5.a.
- Ensure that the pawl (530/1) operates smoothly under the force of the spring (545).
- The (new) spring pin (536/1) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
2006 07 EN - 133 - Catalog n° 3640084260

HMP 400 LC 349
HMP 400 LC-GFH
308 283
3x
280
2x
F1
292
291
2x
2x
282
296 (°)
2x
2x
2x
284 (*) 2x
307
286 297
6x
6x
6x
4x
285
329 350
HMP 400 LCC

HMP 400 LCC-GFH 283
308
3x
280 2x
F2
292
291
2x
2x
282
296 (°)
2x
2x
2x
2x
284 (*) 307
286 297
6x
6x
6x
285
Fig. 8.6.a - Links (and cases) collector [ 6 ]
2006 07 EN - 134 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.6. LINKS (AND CASES) COLLECTOR [ 6 ]
8.6.1. Removal and reinstallation of a collector centering pin (282)
Requirements : • 2 x UT 1032 (Combination wrench 13 mm)

• Torque wrench
• While holding the collector centering pin (282) in position with one of the wrenches
UT 1032 and taking care not to lose the washer (291), use the other wrench UT 1032 to
unscrew and to remove the nut (292).
• Release and remove the collector centering pin (282) from the corresponding front side of
the links collector body (F1) / the links and cases collector body (F2).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the nut (292)
8.6.2. Removal and reinstallation of a cable pass ring (283)
Requirements : • UT 1908 (Screwdriver 8 x 150 mm)
• Using the screwdriver UT 1908, carefully disengage and remove the cable pass ring (283)
out of its hole in the rear side of the links collector body (F1) / the links and cases collector
body (F2).
8.6.3. Removal and reinstallation of a roller (284)

• Torque wrench
• Using the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2369 and taking care not
to lose the corresponding washer (286), take out the corresponding screw (285) and then
release and remove the roller (284) from its support provided on the links collector body
(F1) / the links and cases collector body (F2).
2006 07 EN - 135 - Catalog n° 3640084260

HMP 400 LC 349
HMP 400 LC-GFH
308 283
3x
280
2x
F1
292
291
2x
2x
282
296 (°)
2x
2x
2x
284 (*) 2x
307
286 297
6x
6x
6x
4x
285
329 350
HMP 400 LCC

HMP 400 LCC-GFH 283
308
3x
280 2x
F2
292
291
2x
2x
282
296 (°)
2x
2x
2x
2x
284 (*) 307
286 297
6x
6x
6x
285
Fig. 8.6.a - Links (and cases) collector [ 6 ]
2006 07 EN - 136 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.6. LINKS (AND CASES) COLLECTOR [ 6 ] (continued)
8.6.4. Removal and reinstallation of a slide (296)

• UT 2364 (Adapter ETORM.110)
• 6 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
• While holding the corresponding nut (308) in position with the 6 mm wrench, while using
the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2364 and taking care not to lose
the corresponding washer (307), take out the corresponding screw (297) and then release
and remove the slide (296) from its support provided on the links collector body (F1) / the
links and cases collector body (F2).
8.6.5. Removal and reinstallation of the cases drain box (349) (only HMP 400 LC and
HMP 400 LC-GFH)

• Torque wrench
• Remove the links collector [ 6 ] from underneath the pod as described in § 5.4.5 (a).
(350) which secure the cases drain box (349).
• Take the cases drain box (349) out of the links collector body (F1).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the screws
2006 07 EN - 137 - Catalog n° 3640084260

351
301
383
4x 356
b
355 a
355
j p
354
G1
354
355 n
4x k p 355
353
h
d
e o
4x o
354 j
n d 354
4x
355
m 4x 355 i
c
352/1 l k
h c
353 i
353
352
g 4x
354
f 354
e
352
4x b
a
Fig. 8.7.a - Ammunition box [ 7 ]
2006 07 EN - 138 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.7. AMMUNITION BOX [ 7 ]
8.7.1. Removal and reinstallation of an ammunition blade

The ammunition box [ 7 ] has been provided with 4 inferior ammunition blades (356), a central
ammunition blade (383) and a superior ammunition blade (351).

• UT 2112 (Hammer 300 g)
• Remove the ammunition box [ 7 ] as described in § 5.2.1 (a) and (b).
• Using its latch, unlock the cover of the ammunition box [ 7 ] and then open it.
• Using the pliers UT 1803 and taking care not to lose the corresponding washers (354),
unbend the corresponding 2 split pins (355) and then pull them out.
• Using the drift punch UT 2014 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out the corresponding
ammunition blade axis (353).
• Withdraw the drift punch UT 2014.
As a result, the ammunition blade and its spring will be released from the ammunition box body
(G1).
Take into account that the 4 inferior ammunition blades (356) and the central ammunition blade
(383) are used in combination with an ammunition blade spring (352) while a different spring
(352/1) is used with the superior ammunition blade (351).
points :
- Ensure that the ammunition blade and its spring are oriented as shown in Fig. 8.7.a.
- After having reinstalled a split pin (355), lock it by bending its 2 extremities.
- Ensure that, after the reassembly, the ammunition blade pivots smoothly on its axis (353).
2006 07 EN - 139 - Catalog n° 3640084260

712 H1
760
742
714 H1
737
719 745 781 12x
4x 4x 734
4x
718
719 741
735
712 738
797 744
752
4x
736
795
4x 737
795
796 737 796
794
797
797
731
794
732 721
742
712 4x
794
797
822
788
6x
701 797
823
Fig. 8.8.a - ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ]
2006 07 EN - 140 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.8. ABA (ADAPTATION BOX ASSEMBLY) [ 8 ]
The weapon system connector (721) consists of a connector fixed to a mounting plate
by means of 4 rivets (742).
The dummy receptacle (734), the connector (741) and the circuit breaker (745) have
been secured to the box of the ABA [ 8 ] by means of 4 rivets (742).
8.8.1. Releasing and reinstalling the electronic box ABA [ 8 ]
Fig. 5.1.a).
• Using its latches, unlock the left side door (230) and then open it (also refer to Fig. 5.1.b).
• Using the 6 mm screwdriver and taking care not to lose the 4 washers (714), the 4 shock
absorption spacers (718) and the 8 spacers (719), take out the 4 screws (712) which
secure the electronic box ABA [ 8 ] to the bottom frame of the container body (A2).
• The electronic box ABA [ 8 ] can now be released from the bottom frame of the container
body (A2).
Take into account that the ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ] is still fixed by way of the weapon
system connector (721) and its cable and by way of the recocking system connector (732).
If it is necessary to remove the complete ABA [ 8 ], disconnect the recocking system connector
(732) (also refer to Fig. 5.1.j) and then release the weapon system connector (721) and its
cable as described in § 8.8.2.
Also note that the machine gun connector (731) is not connected anymore as it is assumed that
the M3P machine gun has been taken out of the pod.
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the 4 washers
(714), the 4 shock absorption spacers (718) and the 8 spacers (719) should be reinstalled
according to Fig. 8.8.a.
2006 07 EN - 141 - Catalog n° 3640084260

712 H1
760
742
714 H1
737
719 745 781 12x
4x 4x 734
4x
718
719 741
735
712 738
797 744
752
4x
736
795
4x 737
795
796 737 796
794
797
797
731
794
732 721
742
712 4x
794
797
822
788
6x
701 797
823
2006 07 EN - 142 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.8. ABA (ADAPTATION BOX ASSEMBLY) [ 8 ] (continued)
8.8.2. Releasing and reinstalling the weapon system connector (721) and its
cable
For more information about the removal of the complete ABA [ 8 ], refer to § 8.8.1.

• 6 mm screwdriver
• 5 mm wrench
• 2 x 7 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
Fig. 5.1.a).
• Using its latches, unlock the left side door (230) and then open it (also refer to Fig. 5.1.b).
• While each time holding the corresponding nut (823) in position with the 5 mm wrench and
using the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2369, take out the 6 screws
(822) and then, from the inside, release and remove the weapon system connector (721)
from the hole on top of the container body (A2).
• While holding the corresponding nut (797) in position with one of the 7 mm wrenches and
using the screwdriver support tip UT 1936 with the adapter UT 2369, take out the screw
(788) which secures the wiring collar (794) close to the weapon system connector (721) in
order to release the wiring collar.
If necessary, separate the wiring collar (794) from the cable of the weapon system connector
(721).
• While each time holding the first nut (797) in position with one of the 7 mm wrenches and
using the other 7 mm wrench, unscrew and remove the corresponding second nut (797)
from the thread of the 2 screws (712) which secure the 2 not released wiring collars (794).
As a result, the 2 wiring collars (794), which are still secured to the cable of the weapon system
connector (721), will be released from the corresponding mounting bracket provided on the inner
frame of the container body (A2).
• If necessary, and while again each time holding the first nut (797) in position with one of
the 7 mm wrenches and using the 6 mm screwdriver, unscrew and remove the 2 screws
(712) which secure the 2 wiring collars (794) (refer to the previous step) to the cable of the
weapon system connector (721) and then separate the wiring collars from the cable.
points :
- If they have been separated from the cable of the weapon system connector (721), fit the
wiring collars (794) back at their original position (also refer to Fig. 8.8.a).
- When they are screwed back into position with a first nut (797) (in order to secure the
corresponding wiring collar (794) to the cable of the weapon system connector (721)),
the 2 screws (712) should be tightened with a torque of 2.5 Nm.
- The screw (788) should be tightened with a torque of 3 Nm.
2006 07 EN - 143 - Catalog n° 3640084260

712 H1
760
742
714 H1
737
719 745 781 12x
4x 4x 734
4x
718
719 741
735
712 738
797 744
752
4x
736
795
4x 737
795
796 737 796
794
797
797
731
794
732 721
742
712 4x
794
797
822
788
6x
701 797
823
2006 07 EN - 144 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.8.3. Removal and reinstallation of the other spare parts of the ABA [ 8 ]
(a) A wiring collar (795)

One of the wiring collars (795) is used to secure the cable of the machine gun connector (731)
while the other wiring collar secures the cable of the recocking system connector (732).
• 7 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
• While holding the corresponding nut (797) in position with the 7 mm wrench and using
the 4 mm screwdriver, unscrew and remove the screw (796) which secures the wiring
collar (795) to the frame of the electronic box ABA [ 8 ] in order to release the wiring
collar.
• If necessary, separate the wiring collar (795) from the corresponding cable.
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that a screw
(b) The dummy receptacle (738)

• 5.5 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
• While holding the nut (737) in position with the 5.5 mm wrench, taking care not to lose
the lock washer (744) and the 2 washers (736) and using the 4 mm screwdriver,
unscrew and remove the screw (735) which secures the dummy receptacle (738) to the
frame of the electronic box ABA [ 8 ] in order to release the receptacle.
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the screw
(735) should be tightened with a torque of 1 Nm.
(c) The 4 screws (752) and 4 nuts (737) securing the inner contact assembly of
the box of the ABA [ 8 ].
• 5.5 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
• While each time holding the corresponding nut (737) in position with the 5.5 mm
wrench and using the 4 mm screwdriver, unscrew and remove the 4 screws (752) which
secure the inner contact assembly of the box of the ABA [ 8 ].
2006 07 EN - 145 - Catalog n° 3640084260

712 H1
760
742
714 H1
737
719 745 781 12x
4x 4x 734
4x
718
719 741
735
712 738
797 744
752
4x
736
795
4x 737
795
796 737 796
794
797
797
731
794
732 721
742
712 4x
794
797
822
788
6x
701 797
823
2006 07 EN - 146 - Catalog n° 3640084260

8.8.3. Removal and reinstallation of the other spare parts of the ABA [ 8 ]
(continued)
(d) The printed circuit (760) of the box of the ABA [ 8 ].
• 5.5 mm wrench
• Torque wrench
• While each time holding the corresponding nut (737) in position with the 5.5 mm
wrench and using the 4 mm screwdriver, unscrew and remove the 4 screws (781) which
secure the printed circuit (760) of the box of the ABA [ 8 ].
• The printed circuit (760) can now be released from the box of the ABA [ 8 ].
If it is necessary to completely remove the printed circuit (760), first take note of the position
of its connectors and then disconnect them.
2006 07 EN - 147 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 148 - Catalog n° 3640084260

The following inspection and adjustment procedures only apply to the HMP 400 container.
For more information about the M3P machine gun, refer to the corresponding documentation.
9.1. HARMONIZATION PROCEDURE

9.1.1. Introduction
The harmonization procedure ensures a correct firing precision at a particular range (Y) for the
M3P machine gun of the HMP 400 weapon system.
The range (Y) (expressed in m) should be determined depending on the shooting conditions and the
target.
Under normal conditions and if no special shooting conditions are involved, it is recommended to
carry out the following harmonization procedure for a range (Y) of 1000 m.
The procedure should be carried out on the left and/or right HMP 400 weapon system in
one of the following cases :
- After having moved or removed the support of the sight of the carrier.
- After having changed the setting of the support of the sight of the carrier.
- After having moved or removed the corresponding release unit of the carrier.
- After having changed the setting of the corresponding release unit of the carrier.
- When the HMP 400 weapon system is moved to another carrier.
- When the HMP 400 weapon system is used on the other side of the same carrier.
- After having changed any internal setting of the HMP 400 pod weapon system.
The procedure is not required in one of the following cases :

- After having removed the sight of the carrier without modifying the setting and the
position of the support of the sight.
- After having replaced the sight of the carrier by an identical one.
- After having replaced the M3P machine gun by another one.
- After having replaced the barrel of the M3P machine gun.
- If the harmonization has been pre-adjusted
In case of pre-adjusted harmonization, the HMP 400 weapon system has been pre-adjusted at
the factory in such a way that it can, without further procedures, be installed on any side of any
of the carriers for which it has been adjusted.
The harmonization procedure described in this chapter assumes that 2 HMP 400 pod
weapon systems have been mounted on the carrier (one weapon system at each side).
In the more usual case of a carrier only provided with one HMP 400 pod weapon system,
the harmonization procedure should only be carried out for the corresponding side.
2006 07 EN - 149 - Catalog n° 3640084260

25 - 100 m
Carrier
Central line of the carrier
Wall/panel
Fig. 9.1.a - Placing the carrier in front of a wall/panel
Wall/panel Carrier
Vertical central line of the carrier
Sight
M3P machine gun

V
HMP 400
Fig. 9.1.b - Measuring the harmonization parameters
2006 07 EN - 150 - Catalog n° 3640084260

9.1. HARMONIZATION PROCEDURE (continued)
9.1.2. Preparatory operations
(a) Placement of the carrier
• Place the carrier at a distance of 25 to 100 m from a wall/panel (Fig. 9.1.a).
The wall/panel should have the following minimum dimensions :
Minimum length : center-to-center distance between the 2 HMP 400 pod weapon
systems mounted on the carrier
Minimum height : distance between the sight of the carrier and the ground or, if higher,
between the HMP 400 pod weapon system and the ground
Ensure that the central line of the carrier is perfectly perpendicular to the wall/panel.
• Correctly level the carrier (e.g. by using a jack).
The carrier is correctly leveled when its reference line is perfectly horizontal.
The reference line of the carrier can be determined by using special marks made by the
manufacturer.
• Ensure that the 2 HMP 400 pod weapon systems are perfectly horizontal and parallel
to the carrier.
If necessary, the position of a HMP 400 pod weapon system can be modified by changing
the position of the corresponding release unit of the carrier.
(b) Measurement of the harmonization parameters (Fig. 9.1.b)
Accurately measure the harmonization parameters listed in the following table.
Use special measurement tools (water level, water pipe, plumbline, ...) in order to obtain
optimum measurement results.
Parameter Description Unit
R Distance between the sight of the carrier and the wall/panel m
L Distance between the muzzle of the barrel of the M3P machine gun and m
the wall/panel
V Difference in height between the sight of the carrier and the muzzle of m
the barrel of the M3P machine gun
X Horizontal distance between the sight and the vertical central line of the m
carrier
W Horizontal distance between the muzzle of the barrel of the M3P m

machine gun and the vertical central line of the carrier
Y Shooting range (refer to § 9.1.1) m
2006 07 EN - 151 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Theodolite
(b) (a) (a)
Fig. 9.1.c - Placing a theodolite between the carrier and the wall/panel
Horizontal reference line Z

of the theodolite
Fig. 9.1.d - Measuring the parameter Z
Vertical reference line Vertical reference line

S S
X' X'
V Horizontal V Horizontal
reference line reference line
ML MR Z ML MR Z
W W W' W'
Without convergence With convergence
Fig. 9.1.e - Plotting the boresighting frame onto the wall/panel
2006 07 EN - 152 - Catalog n° 3640084260

9.1.3. Plotting the boresighting frame onto the wall/panel
• Plot the vertical reference line of the boresighting frame onto the wall/panel by proceeding
as follows :
- Hang 2 plumblines (a) (one at the front and one at the rear) exactly under the central line
of the carrier (Fig. 9.1.c).
- Place a theodolite approximately halfway between the carrier and the wall/panel and
then hang a plumbline (b) under the theodolite (Fig. 9.1.c).
- Position the theodolite so that the 3 plumblines are visually aligned (Fig. 9.1.c).
- Using its 3 knobs, adjust the theodolite so that its 2 spirit levels are perfectly horizontal.
- Looking through the theodolite, project its vertical reference line exactly onto the vertical
central line of the carrier and then set the angle knob of the theodolite at 0°.
- Turn the theodolite by exactly 180° so that it faces the wall/panel.
- Looking through the theodolite, project its vertical reference line onto the wall/panel and
then plot the line onto the wall/panel (Fig. 9.1.e).
• Looking through the theodolite, project its horizontal reference line onto the wall/panel and
then plot the line onto the wall/panel (Fig. 9.1.e).
• Turn the theodolite back towards the 0° position so that it again faces the carrier.
• Looking through the theodolite, project its horizontal reference line onto the carrier.
• Measure the difference in height (Z) (expressed in m) between the projection of the
horizontal reference line of the theodolite and the muzzle of the barrel of the M3P machine
gun (Fig. 9.1.d).
• Calculate the distance X’ = X ( Y - R ) / Y which ensures a correct target acquisition by the

sight of the carrier at the predetermined range (Y).
• Using the distances V, W, X’ and Z, complete the boresighting frame on the wall/panel by
plotting the following points (left part of Fig. 9.1.e) :
- the sight of the carrier (S)

- the muzzles of the barrels of the left and right M3P machine guns (ML and MR)
NOTE : The presently obtained boresighting frame applies to the harmonization

procedure without convergence at the predetermined range (Y)
If convergence is required for the left and right M3P machine guns, replace the
distance W by the distance W’ = W ( Y - L ) / Y (right part of Fig. 9.1.e).
2006 07 EN - 153 - Catalog n° 3640084260

251
265
Fig. 9.1.f - Loosening the 2 nuts (265) which secure the

boresighting support (251)
210/230
UT 2359
Fig. 9.1.g - Lateral M3P harmonization adjustment
2006 07 EN - 154 - Catalog n° 3640084260

9.1.4. Harmonization adjustments
(a) Harmonizing a M3P machine gun
• Remove the flash-hider (355) of the M3P machine gun by proceeding as follows :
- Using the cutting pliers UT 1814, remove the lockwire (257) from the 2 screws (368)
which secure the securing lock (367) to the flash-hider body.
- Using the screwdriver UT 1908, loosen the 2 screws (368).
- Using the torque wrench OREA 867, screw the flash-hider body out of the flash-
hider sleeve (361) of the barrel (110)/(110/1).
• Insert the .50 telescope rod OREAA 10A into the muzzle of the barrel of the M3P
machine gun.
• Fit the boresighting telescope OREAA 10B into the .50 telescope rod OREAA 10A.
• Looking through the boresighting telescope OREAA 10B, check if its cross line
coincides with the corresponding point (ML or MR) of the boresighting frame on the
wall/panel.
If so, the following adjustment procedure should not be carried out.
If not, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
• Using the wrench UT 1031, loosen the 2 nuts (265) which secure the boresighting
support (251) (Fig. 9.1.f).
• If a lateral (azimuth) correction of the impact of the telescope cross line is required,
proceed as follows :
- Insert the bush with handle UT 2359 through the hole at the left or right side of the
HMP 400 container, just underneath the corresponding side door (Fig. 9.1.g).
Ensure that the bush with handle UT 2359 fits correctly onto the corresponding end of the
assembly formed by the lateral adjustment axis (261) and the nut (262).
- Turn the bush with handle UT 2359 in order to correct the lateral position of the
impact of the telescope cross line.
2006 07 EN - 155 - Catalog n° 3640084260

267
Fig. 9.1.h - Vertical M3P harmonization adjustment
Range Elevation angle Range Elevation angle

(m) (mil) (m) (mil)
100 0.75 1300 29.25

200 1.61 1400 34.24
300 2.59 1500 39.65
400 3.73 1600 45.49
500 5.06 1700 51.75
600 6.63 1800 58.47
700 8.51 1900 65.67
800 10.77 2000 73.36
900 13.53 2100 81.58
1000 16.79 2200 90.36
1100 20.51 2300 99.74
1200 24.67 2400 109.77
2500 120.49
Elevation angle to be set in case of a sight not provided with an automatic

adjusting feature
2006 07 EN - 156 - Catalog n° 3640084260

9.1.4. Harmonization adjustments (continued)
(a) Harmonizing a M3P machine gun (continued)
• If a vertical correction of the impact of the telescope cross line is required, proceed as
follows :
- Insert the drift punch UT 2014 into one of the radially drilled holes in the upper part
of the vertical adjustment axis (267) (Fig. 9.1.h).
- Turn the vertical adjustment axis (267) in order to correct the vertical position of the
impact of the telescope cross line.
In order to raise the impact of the telescope cross line, turn the vertical adjustment axis
(267) to the left.
In order to lower the impact of the telescope cross line, turn the vertical adjustment axis
(267) to the right.
• Check if the impact of the telescope cross line is now at the correct position.
If so, the adjustment is terminated : directly proceed to the next step.
If not, repeat the adjustment procedure until a correct firing precision is obtained.
• Using the wrench UT 1031, tighten the 2 nuts (265) (also refer to Fig. 9.1.f).
• Close the side doors (210) and (230) and lock them into position by using their
latches.
• Take the boresighting telescope OREAA 10B out of the .50 telescope rod OREAA 10A.
• Take the .50 telescope rod OREAA 10A out of the muzzle of the barrel of the M3P
machine gun.
• Reinstall the flash-hider (355) by proceeding as follows :
- Manually screw the flash-hider body into the flash-hider sleeve (361) of the barrel
(110)/(110/1) and then, using the torque wrench OREA 867, tighten with a torque
of 100 Nm.
In case of the guided blast effect flash-hider (355), it should be oriented so that its grooves
are on top and down.
- After having screwed them into position with a torque of 11 Nm, secure the screws
(368) by using new lockwire (257) and the joint-twist pliers UT 1816.
The lockwire (257) should be installed so that tension is applied to it when the screws
(368) tend to unscrew.
(b) Harmonizing the sight of the carrier

• Check if the reticle of the sight of the carrier coincides with the corresponding point (S)
of the boresighting frame on the wall/panel.
If not, adjust the position of the sight in order to obtain the above condition.
• In case of a (new generation) sight which automatically adjusts its elevation angle in
function of the range, no further action is required.
In case of an (older generation) sight which has not been provided with an automatic
adjusting feature for its elevation angle, the latter should be set manually according to
the table given at the left side.
2006 07 EN - 157 - Catalog n° 3640084260

346.2 ± 1 mm
511
431/1
[5]
274
[4]
Fig. 9.2.a - Adjustment of the distance between the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking system [ 5 ]
2006 07 EN - 158 - Catalog n° 3640084260

9.2. ADJUSTMENT OF THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE ELASTIC CRADLE
[ 4 ] AND THE RECOCKING SYSTEM [ 5 ]
The adjustment of the distance between the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking system [ 5 ]
should be carried out after any intervention on the boresighting assembly [ 3 ], the elastic
cradle and/or the recocking system.
• Remove the M3P machine gun as described in chapter 6.
• Check if the distance between the central axis of the locking pin (431/1) of the elastic
cradle [ 4 ] and the front side of the actuator assembly (511) of the recocking system [ 5 ] is
346.2 ± 1 mm (Fig. 9.2.a).
If so, the distance between the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking system [ 5 ] is correct.
If not, adjust the distance between the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking system [ 5 ] by
proceeding as follows (Fig. 9.2.a) :
- Using the wrench UT 1009, slightly loosen the 3 nuts (274) which secure the recocking
system supporting plate (271).
- Move the recocking system [ 5 ] in order to obtain a correct distance between the elastic
cradle [ 4 ] and the recocking system.
- Tighten the 3 nuts (274) with a torque of 10 Nm.
- Check if the distance between the central axis of the locking pin (431/1) of the elastic
cradle [ 4 ] and the front side of the actuator assembly (511) of the recocking system [ 5 ]
is now 346.2 ± 1 mm.
If so, the adjustment is terminated.
If not, repeat the above adjustment procedure until a correct distance is obtained.
• Reinstall the M3P machine gun.
2006 07 EN - 159 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 160 - Catalog n° 3640084260

10.1. REVERSAL OF THE FEEDING DIRECTION
In order to change the HMP 400 pod weapon system from left-hand to right-hand feeding or
vice versa, proceed as follows :
• Remove the M3P machine gun as described in chapter 6.
• Remove the links collector (217) (refer to § 8.1.1).
• Remove the ammunition box [ 7 ] (refer to § 5.2.1(b)).
• Remove the feed channel (220) (refer to § 8.1.7).
• Using the pliers UT 1817, remove the locking pin retaining spring (423) from the spring pin
(422) onto which it is presently mounted and then refit it onto the spring pin (422) at the
opposite side.
• Pull the locking pin (431/1) out of the elastic cradle [ 4 ] and then reinsert it from the
opposite side.
• Reinstall the feed channel (220) at the new feeding side of the HMP 400 container.
• Reinstall the links collector (217) onto the side door ((210) or (230)) at the side opposite to
the new feeding side of the HMP 400 container.
• Change the M3P machine gun from left-hand to right-hand feeding or vice versa (refer to
the corresponding documentation) and then reinstall it into the pod as described in § 5.1.1.
• If the ammunition box [ 7 ] was not empty, empty it and then load it in accordance with the
new feeding side of the HMP 400 container (refer to § 5.2.1(d)).
• Reinstall the ammunition box [ 7 ] (refer to § 5.2.1(e)).
2006 07 EN - 161 - Catalog n° 3640084260

The following troubleshooting procedure only applies to the HMP 400 container. For more
Problem Cause Solution
No power in the pod ---> • Weapon system connector ---> Connect the connector
(721) not connected correctly correctly (§ 5.1.3)
• Circuit breaker (745) of the ---> Set the circuit breaker at the
ABA [ 8 ] at the ‘OFF’ ‘ON’ position (Fig. 5.1.e)
position
• Other ---> Test by using the TBU (*). If the

problem is not solved, check
all the cables and the
connections
No recocking ---> • Recocking system connector ---> Connect the connector

(732) not connected correctly correctly (Fig. 5.1.j)
• Circuit breaker (745) of the ---> Set the circuit breaker at the
ABA [ 8 ] at the ‘OFF’ ‘ON’ position (Fig. 5.1.e)
position
• Bad installation of the M3P ---> Refer to § 5.1.1

machine gun

all the cables, the connections
as well as the recocking system
[5]
No power at the M3P machine ---> • No power in the pod ---> See above
gun
• Machine gun connector ---> Connect the connector
(731) of the ABA [ 8 ] not correctly (Fig. 5.1.i)
connected correctly

all the cables and the
connections
(*) Refer to the Operator’s Manual of the TBU (Test Box Unit).
2006 07 EN - 162 - Catalog n° 3640084260

Too high vibrations of the pod ---> • Too high belt pull ---> Load the ammunition box [ 7 ]
when the M3P machine gun is correctly
firing
• Elastic cradle [ 4 ] defective ---> Replace the elastic cradle [ 4 ]
• Incorrect rate of firing ---> Adjust rate of firing
• Other ---> Check or replace the elastic

cradle [ 4 ]
Incorrect firing accuracy ---> Incorrect harmonization ---> Harmonize the M3P as
described in § 9.1
2006 07 EN - 163 - Catalog n° 3640084260

414 435/1
2x 2x
2x
438 905/9
465
Fig. 12.1.a - “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/9) for the elastic cradle [ 4 ]
2006 07 EN - 164 - Catalog n° 3640084260

The following lists of replacement parts only apply to the HMP 400 container. For more
12.1. LISTS OF PERIODICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS (PRP)
12.1.1. “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/9) for the elastic cradle [ 4 ] (Fig. 12.1.a)
Qty Fig.
CAT n° Description per parts
set lists
414 Spring, compression, front 2 2.e

435/1 Spring, compression, rear 2 2.e
438 Split pin 2 2.e
465 Split pin 1 2.b.1
2006 07 EN - 165 - Catalog n° 3640084260

4x 122 128
16x
7x
3x
218
216
905/7
250
Fig. 12.2.a - “Short-term RRP” (905/7) for the pod of the HMP 400
2006 07 EN - 166 - Catalog n° 3640084260

12.2. LISTS OF RANDOM REPLACEMENT PARTS (RRP)
12.2.1. “Short-term RRP” (905/7) for the pod of the HMP 400 (Fig. 12.2.a)
Qty Fig.
set lists
122 Pin, centering, fairing 4 2.c

128 Rivet, securing, centering pin 16 2.c
216 Pin, hinge, side panel 3 2.b.1
218 Screw, head flat, full thread 7 2.b.1
250 Boresighting system assembly 1 2.d
2006 07 EN - 167 - Catalog n° 3640084260

4x 8x
120
192
191
140
224 228
25x
220
50x
210 229
50x
238/1
231 232
7x
4x
230
301
280
415/1
289 905/130
4x
463 464
461
465 466
431/1
794
712 796
701
25x 25x
788 5x
797 823
25x 25x
50x
Fig. 12.2.b - “Long-term RRP” (905/130) for the pod of the HMP 400 LC and the HMP 400 LC-GFH
2006 07 EN - 168 - Catalog n° 3640084260

12.2. LISTS OF RANDOM REPLACEMENT PARTS (RRP) (continued)
12.2.2. “Long-term RRP” (905/130) for the pod of the HMP 400 LC and
the HMP 400 LC-GFH (Fig. 12.2.b)
Qty Fig.
set lists
120 Fairing, front, assembly 1 2.c

140 Fairing, rear, assembly 1 2.c
191 Loop, fixing fairings 4 2.b.2
192 Nut, securing loop 8 2.b.2
210 Side, door assembly (right) 1 2.b.1
220 Channel, feed, assembly 1 2.b.2
224 Cross recessed countersunk (flat)head screw 25 2.b.2
228 Cross recessed pan head screw 50 2.b.2
229 Plain washer 50 2.b.2
230 Side, door assembly (left) 1 2.b.1
231 Channel, ejection, cases 1 2.b.2
232 Screw, machine pan head, cross-recessed 7 2.b.2
238/1 Ammunition box pin, assembly 4 2.b.2
280 Links collector 1 2.g.1
289 Pin, retaining, compartment assembly 4 2.b.1
301 Ammunition box 400 rds assembly + blades 1 2.h
415/1 Bush 1 2.e
431/1 Pin, securing, assembly 1 2.e
461 Bolt, elastic cradle 1 2.b.1
463 Washer 1 2.b.1
464 Nut, locking 1 2.b.1
466 Set of thickness washers 1 2.b.1
701 Adaptation box assembly for HMP 400-250-RMP-RL 1 2.i
712 Slotted cheese head screw 25 2.i
788 Screw, countersunk head, 1000 cross-recessed 25 2.i
794 Collar, wiring 5 2.i
797 Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut, PA insert 25 2.i
823 Nut 50 2.i
2006 07 EN - 169 - Catalog n° 3640084260

4x 8x
120
192
191
140
224 228
25x
220
50x
210 229
50x
238/1
231 232
7x
4x
230
301
415/1
280 289 905/116
4x
463 464
461
465 466
431/1
794
712 796
701
25x 25x
788 5x
797 823
25x 25x
50x
Fig. 12.2.c - “Long-term RRP” (905/116) for the pod of the HMP 400 LCC and the HMP 400 LCC-GFH
2006 07 EN - 170 - Catalog n° 3640084260

12.2.3. “Long-term RRP” (905/116) for the pod of the HMP 400 LCC and
the HMP 400 LCC-GFH (Fig. 12.2.c)
Qty Fig.
set lists
120 Fairing, front, assembly 1 2.c

140 Fairing, rear, assembly 1 2.c
191 Loop, fixing fairings 4 2.b.2
192 Nut, securing loop 8 2.b.2
210 Side, door assembly (right) 1 2.b.1
220 Channel, feed, assembly 1 2.b.2
224 Cross recessed countersunk (flat)head screw 25 2.b.2
228 Cross recessed pan head screw 50 2.b.2
229 Plain washer 50 2.b.2
230 Side, door assembly (left) 1 2.b.1
231 Channel, ejection, cases 1 2.b.2
232 Screw, machine pan head, cross-recessed 7 2.b.2
238/1 Ammunition box pin, assembly 4 2.b.2
280 Links and cases collector 1 2.g.2
289 Pin, retaining, compartment assembly 4 2.b.1
301 Ammunition box 400 rds assembly + blades 1 2.h
415/1 Bush 1 2.e
431/1 Pin, securing, assembly 1 2.e
461 Bolt, elastic cradle 1 2.b.1
463 Washer 1 2.b.1
464 Nut, locking 1 2.b.1
466 Set of thickness washers 1 2.b.1
701 Adaptation box assembly for HMP 400-250-RMP-RL 1 2.i
788 Screw, countersunk head, 1000 cross-recessed 25 2.i
794 Collar, wiring 5 2.i
797 Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut, PA insert 25 2.i
823 Nut 50 2.i
2006 07 EN - 171 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 172 - Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 13 : ACCESSORIES
The HMP 400 container of the HMP 400 pod weapon system does not have special
accessories.
2006 07 EN - 173 - Catalog n° 3640084260

OREA 867
1072
1020
OREAA 27
1032
OREA 269 1031

1010
1040 UT 1803 OREA 822
1050
1060 UT 2112
1071
1073 UT 2113 UT 2819
UT 2203
911
OREA 740
997
OREA 240
UT 1817
UT 1814
UT 1816 OREA 741
UT 1908
UT 1032 OREA 154
UT 2014
UT 2018 201 UT 1703
UT 2019 OREA 869
434 OREAA 6B
UT 2012
UT 2015
OREA 881 OREAA 6
UT 1605
OREA 739
OREAA 6A
ACCE 895
Fig. 14.1.a - HMP tool kit for users (940) (part I) = M3P tool kit for users (910)
2006 07 EN - 174 - Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 14 : TOOLS FOR THE HMP 400
14.1. USER TOOL KITS FOR THE HMP 400
14.1.1. HMP tool kit for users (940)
(a) HMP tool kit for users (940) (part I) (Fig. 14.1.a)
Qty Depot
CAT n° Description per annual
unit stock
910 M3P tool kit for users 1

201 > Lockwire MS 9226-04 L 300mm 3
434 > Spring-type straight pin, coiled, standard duty 100
911 > Set : adjustment gauges weapon 1
997 > Gauge, locating, sensor 1
1010 > Cleaning rod 1
1020 > > Handle assembly 1
1031 > > Section, cleaning rod 3
1032 > > Swab, holder, section, cleaning rod 1
1040 > Brush, cleaning, complete, chamber 1
1050 > Complete barrel cleaning brush 1
1060 > Brush, cleaning, firing pin hole, cal .50 1
1071 > Rod cleaning for firing pin hole 1
1072 > Cleaning rod 1
1073 > Ruptured case extractor 1
ACCE 895 > Roll, tool (flexible) green (M3P) 1
OREA 154 > Cleaning brush 1
OREA 240 > Tool, clamping screw, firing pin M3P 1
OREA 269 > Rod, firing pin spring 1
OREA 739 > Slotted tubular wrench dia 19 lg 113 1
OREA 740 > Inserter and remover, cartridge belt, .50 1
OREA 741 > Pin assembly 1
OREA 822 > Spray, lubricant NATO S-758 - 250 ml 1
OREA 867 > Torque wrench for flash-hider M3P 1
OREA 869 > Clamping screw, firing pin M3P 1
OREA 881 > Drift punch, dia. 2.4 1
OREAA 6 > Safety rod and accessories 1
OREAA 6A > > Safety rod 1
OREAA 6B > > Loop, adjusting 1
OREAA 27 > Tester, captor 1
UT 1032 > Combination wrench 13 mm 1
UT 1605 > Hexagonal key 4 mm 1
UT 1703 > C-spanner 50/80 1
UT 1803 > Half-round nose pliers 1
UT 1814 > Cutting pliers 1
2006 07 EN - 175 - Catalog n° 3640084260

OREA 867
1072
1020
OREAA 27
1032
OREA 269 1031

1010
1040 UT 1803 OREA 822
1050
1060 UT 2112
1071
1073 UT 2113 UT 2819
UT 2203
911
OREA 740
997
OREA 240
UT 1817
UT 1814
UT 1816 OREA 741
UT 1908
UT 1032 OREA 154
UT 2014
UT 2018 201 UT 1703
UT 2019 OREA 869
434 OREAA 6B
UT 2012
UT 2015
OREA 881 OREAA 6
UT 1605
OREA 739
OREAA 6A
ACCE 895
Fig. 14.1.a - HMP tool kit for users (940) (part I) = M3P tool kit for users (910)
2006 07 EN - 176 - Catalog n° 3640084260

14.1. USER TOOL KITS FOR THE HMP 400 (continued)
14.1.1. HMP tool kit for users (940) (continued)
(a) HMP tool kit for users (940) (part I) (continued)
Qty Depot
unit stock
UT 1816 > Joint-twist pliers 1

UT 1817 > Universal pliers 1
UT 1908 > Screwdriver 8 x 150 mm 1
UT 2012 > Drift punch, dia 3.4 mm, lg 27 mm 1
UT 2112 > Hammer 300 g 1
UT 2113 > Hammer (plastic ends) 1
UT 2203 > Feeler gauge 1
UT 2819 > Steel hand brush 1
2006 07 EN - 177 - Catalog n° 3640084260

UT 1030
UT 2376 OREAA 8
OREAA 43B
UT 2364 OREAA 43A
UT 2377
UT 2369
UT 2363 UT 2359
UT 1930
UT 2361
UT 1936 UT 2365 UT 1609
OREA 734
UT 1031
UT 2360
ACCE 895/1
Fig. 14.1.b - HMP tool kit for users (940) (part II)
2006 07 EN - 178 - Catalog n° 3640084260

14.1. USER TOOL KITS FOR THE HMP 400 (continued)
14.1.1. HMP tool kit for users (940) (continued)
(b) HMP tool kit for users (940) (part II) (Fig. 14.1.b)
Qty Depot
unit stock
ACCE 895/1 Roll, tool olive green (HMP) 1

OREA 734 Hexagonal tubular wrench 27x160 modified 1
OREAA 8 Control cable M3P 1
OREAA 43A Rest, cradle slide, HMP 1
OREAA 43B Rest, cradle seat, HMP 1
UT 1030 Combination wrench 24 mm 1
UT 1031 Combination wrench 3/8” 1
UT 1609 Hexagonal key 6 mm 1
UT 1930 Cross-recessed screwdriver 5 x 75 mm 1
UT 1936 Screwdriver support tip 1
UT 2359 Bush with handle 12 mm 1
UT 2360 Speeder, square 3/8” 1
UT 2361 Bush, 16 mm, hex. opening, square 3/8”, lg 32.5 mm 1
UT 2363 Screwdriver socket, torque wrench 1
UT 2364 Adapter ETORM.110 1
UT 2365 Handle 1
UT 2369 Adapter EBNA.104 1
UT 2377 Adapter ETORM.101/4 1
2006 07 EN - 179 - Catalog n° 3640084260

550
Drawer A
Drawer B
Drawer C
Drawer D
Drawer E
Drawer F
Drawer G
Drawer H
Fig. 14.2.a.1 - M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1)
UT 2014
UT 1030 UT 2015 UT 2018

UT 1032 OREA 881 UT 2019 1031
UT 1031
UT 1009
UT 2012
1072
1032
UT 1930 1060 1040 1020

1073
UT 1936 1050
1071 1010 = 1020 + 3 x 1031 + 1032
Fig. 14.2.a.2 - Drawer A of the M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1)
2006 07 EN - 180 - Catalog n° 3640084260

14.2. ARMOURER TOOL KITS FOR THE HMP 400
14.2.1. M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1) (Fig. 14.2.a.1)
Qty Depot
unit stock
550 Tool kit with foam for tidying up 1
(a) Drawer A (Fig. 14.2.a.2)
Qty Depot
unit stock
1010 Cleaning rod 1

1020 > Handle assembly 1
1031 > Section, cleaning rod 3
1032 > Swab, holder, section, cleaning rod 1
1040 Brush, cleaning, complete, chamber 1
1050 Complete barrel cleaning brush 1
1060 Brush, cleaning, firing pin hole, cal .50 1
1071 Rod cleaning for firing pin hole 1
1072 Cleaning rod 1
1073 Ruptured case extractor 1
OREA 881 Drift punch, dia 2.4 1
UT 1009 Combination wrench, short 10 mm 1

UT 1031 Combination wrench 3/8” 1
UT 1930 Cross-recessed screwdriver 5 x 75 mm 1
UT 1936 Screwdriver support tip 1
UT 2012 Drift punch, dia 3.4 mm, lg 27 mm 1
2006 07 EN - 181 - Catalog n° 3640084260

UT 1816 UT 1803
OREA 739
OREAA 6BJ
UT 2819
UT 1817 OREA 154

UT 1703 OREA 741
UT 1814 997
Fig. 14.2.a.3 - Drawer B of the M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1)
UT 2113
OREAA 43B OREAA 43A UT 1908
201
23
OREA 740
OREA 269
OREAA 27 UT 2112
Fig. 14.2.a.4 - Drawer C of the M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1)
2006 07 EN - 182 - Catalog n° 3640084260

14.2. ARMOURER TOOL KITS FOR THE HMP 400 (continued)
14.2.1. M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1) (continued)
(b) Drawer B (Fig. 14.2.a.3)
Qty Depot
unit stock
997 Gauge, locating, sensor 1
OREA 154 Cleaning brush 1

OREA 739 Slotted tubular wrench dia 19 lg 113 1
OREA 741 Pin assembly 1
OREAA 6BJ Flame, safety pin with ring 1
UT 1703 C-spanner 50/80 1

UT 1803 Half-round nose pliers 1
UT 1814 Cutting pliers 1
UT 1816 Joint-twist pliers 1
UT 1817 Universal pliers 1
UT 2819 Steel hand brush 1
(c) Drawer C (Fig. 14.2.a.4)
Qty Depot
unit stock
23 Battery 9 Volts 1
201 Lockwire MS 9226-04 L 300mm 3
OREA 269 Rod, firing pin spring 1

OREA 740 Inserter and remover, cartridge belt, .50 1
OREAA 27 Tester, captor 1

OREAA 43A Rest, cradle slide, HMP 1
OREAA 43B Rest, cradle seat, HMP 1
UT 1908 Screwdriver 8 x 150 mm 1

UT 2112 Hammer 300 g 1
UT 2113 Hammer (plastic ends) 1
2006 07 EN - 183 - Catalog n° 3640084260

UT 2365 UT 2361
UT 2359 911
434 UT 2203
UT 1609
UT 2377
UT 2376
UT 1605
UT 2369
OREAA 6A
OREAA 6B OREA 869 UT 2364
OREAA 6 UT 2363
Fig. 14.2.a.5 - Drawer D of the M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1)
OREA 867
OREA 240
OREAA 8
UT 2360
Fig. 14.2.a.6 - Drawer E of the M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1)
2006 07 EN - 184 - Catalog n° 3640084260

(d) Drawer D (Fig. 14.2.a.5)
Qty Depot
unit stock
434 Spring-type straight pin, coiled, standard duty 100

911 Set : adjustment gauges weapon 1
OREA 869 Clamping screw, firing pin M3P 1
OREAA 6 Safety rod and accessories 1

OREAA 6A > Safety rod 1
OREAA 6B > Loop, adjusting 1

UT 2203 Feeler gauge 1
UT 2359 Bush with handle 12 mm 1
UT 2361 Bush, 16 mm, hex. opening, square 3/8”, lg 32.5 mm 1
UT 2363 Screwdriver socket, torque wrench 1
UT 2365 Handle 1
UT 2369 Adapter EBNA.104 1
UT 2377 Adapter ETORM.101/4 1
(e) Drawer E (Fig. 14.2.a.6)
Qty Depot
unit stock
OREA 240 Tool, clamping screw, firing pin M3P 1

OREA 867 Torque wrench for flash-hider M3P 1
OREAA 8 Control cable M3P 1
UT 2360 Speeder, square 3/8” 1
2006 07 EN - 185 - Catalog n° 3640084260

OREA 822
OREAA 57
OREA 734
OREAA 59
Fig. 14.2.a.7 - Drawer G of the M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1)
1670
OREAA 55
OREAA 43
OREAA 56
1690
Fig. 14.2.a.8 - Drawer H of the M3P-HMP tool kit for armourer (910/1)
2006 07 EN - 186 - Catalog n° 3640084260

(f) Drawer G (Fig. 14.2.a.7)
Qty Depot
unit stock
OREA 734 Hexagonal tubular wrench 27x160 modified 1

OREA 822 Spray, lubricant NATO S-758 - 250 ml 1
OREAA 57 Wrench for barrel tube M3P 1

OREAA 59 Pliers for fixing on bed M3 and M2 1
(g) Drawer H (Fig. 14.2.a.8)
Qty Depot
unit stock
1670 Gauge, barrel erosion 1

1690 Gauge, calibrating, wear gauge 1
OREAA 43 Handle, bolt (auxiliary use only) 1

OREAA 55 Wrench for recoil booster 1
OREAA 56 Wrench for clamp, barrel broaching 1
2006 07 EN - 187 - Catalog n° 3640084260

OREAA 10
OREAA 10B
OREAA 10A
Fig. 14.3 - Separate tools for the HMP 400
2006 07 EN - 188 - Catalog n° 3640084260

14.3. SEPARATE TOOLS FOR THE HMP 400 (Fig. 14.3)
Qty Depot
unit stock
G103 Firing pin protrusion (*) 1
OREAA 10 Rod and boresighting scope for HMP 1

OREAA 10A > .50 (12.7) alignment rod 1
OREAA 10B > Boresighting telescope 1
UT 1144 Open-end wrench 24 x 27 mm (*) (°) 1

UT 2011 Drift punch, dia. 2.9 mm, lg 30 mm (*) (°) 1
UT 2202 Rule (*) (°) 1
(*) Not illustrated

(°) For the recocking system [ 5 ]
2006 07 EN - 189 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 190 - Catalog n° 3640084260

15.1. ABA (ADAPTATION BOX ASSEMBLY) [ 8 ]
2006 07 EN - 191 - Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN - 192 - Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 16 : NOTES
2006 07 EN - 193 - Catalog n° 3640084260

FN HERSTAL
M3P
Machine Gun
Calibre .50 (12.7 x 99 mm)
August 2005
Catalog n° 3640084230
THIS DOCUMENT IS THE PROPERTY OF FN HERSTAL, S.A.
IT MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED

TO A THIRD PARTY WITHOUT PRIOR FORMAL
CONSENT OF FN HERSTAL, S.A.
2005 08 EN -1- Catalog n° 3640084230

NOTES : - The descriptions and illustrations in this maintenance manual may
differ slightly from the present configuration of the product. This would
reflect the constant evolution of the product during its industrial life.
- Data in this manual is technical only and of no contractual value.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................ 9

1.2. Description ......................................................................................................... 9
1.3. Technical data................................................................................................... 10
1.3.1. Dimensions and weight ........................................................................ 10
1.3.2. Functional data ................................................................................... 10
1.3.3. Ballistics .............................................................................................. 11
1.4. Abbreviations .................................................................................................... 12
2.1. How to order parts ............................................................................................ 15

2.2. Parts lists .......................................................................................................... 15
2.2.1. Barrel group [ 1 ] ................................................................................. 17
2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] ............................................................................. 21
2.2.3. Bolt group [ 3 ] .................................................................................... 39
2.2.4. Barrel buffer group [ 4 ] ........................................................................ 45
2.2.5. Feed cover group [ 5 ] .......................................................................... 49
2.2.6. Back plate group [ 6 ] .......................................................................... 55
2.2.7. Adaptation [ 7 ] ................................................................................... 59
CHAPTER 3 : OPERATING PRINCIPLES
3.1. Empty machine gun in the initial condition ........................................................... 65

3.2. Loading and cocking the machine gun ................................................................ 65
3.3. Firing the machine gun ...................................................................................... 65
3.3.1. The operation of the moving parts ......................................................... 67
3.3.2. The feeding operation .......................................................................... 73
3.3.3. The firing operation ............................................................................. 77
2005 08 EN -2- Catalog n° 3640084230

4.1. Warnings and cautions ...................................................................................... 79

4.2. Safety checks .................................................................................................... 79
CHAPTER 5 : RECEPTION OF THE GUN
....................................................................................................................... 81
CHAPTER 6 : USING THE MACHINE GUN
....................................................................................................................... 83
CHAPTER 7 : FIELD STRIPPING
7.1. Disassembling the machine gun ......................................................................... 85

7.2. Reassembling the machine gun .......................................................................... 89
8.1. Product specifications ........................................................................................ 93

8.2. Cleaning and lubrication before firing ................................................................. 95
8.3. Cleaning and lubrication after firing .................................................................... 97
9.1. Barrel group [ 1 ] ............................................................................................ 103

9.1.1. Separating the barrel group [ 1 ] into the barrel (110)/(110/1) and
the barrel extension assembly (150) (and reassembly) ........................... 103
9.1.2. Removal and reinstallation of the barrel locking spring blade (161) ........ 105
9.1.3. Removal and reinstallation of the breech lock (155) .............................. 105
2005 08 EN -3- Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] ......................................................................................... 107

9.2.1. Removal and reinstallation of the left and right belt holding pawls (216)
and (217) as well as the feed tray (212) ............................................... 107
9.2.2. Removal and reinstallation of the cover detent pawl (663) and its
spring (664) ...................................................................................... 107
9.2.3. Removal and reinstallation of the links chute assembly (250) ................. 109
9.2.4. Disassembling and reassembling the links chute assembly (250) ............ 109
9.2.5. Removal of the breech lock cam (271) ................................................. 111
9.2.6. Reinstallation of the breech lock cam (271) .......................................... 111
9.2.7. Removal of the extractor switch (231) and its spring (232) ..................... 113
9.2.8. Reinstallation of the extractor switch (231) and its spring (232)............... 113
9.2.9. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the sliding
blocks assembly (A110) ...................................................................... 115
9.2.10. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of a standard
flash-hider assembly (355) .................................................................. 117
9.2.11. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of a GFH (Guided
blast effect Flash-Hider) assembly (355) ............................................... 119
9.2.12. Removal and reinstallation of the flash-hider sleeve (361)...................... 121
9.2.13. Removal of the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322) ..................... 123
9.2.14. Reinstallation of the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322) .............. 125
9.2.15. Removal and reinstallation of the barrel jacket assembly (305) ............... 127
9.2.16. Removal and reinstallation of the barrel jacket (313) ............................. 127
9.2.17. Removal and reinstallation of the trunnion adapter locking pin (331)...... 129
9.2.18. Removal and reinstallation of the recoil booster (312) ........................... 131
9.3. Bolt group [ 3 ] ............................................................................................... 133
9.3.1. Removal and reinstallation of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) ......... 133
9.3.2. Removal and reinstallation of the bolt switches (412) ............................ 135
9.3.3. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking lever (421) and its axis (433) .. 137
9.3.4. Removal and reinstallation of the firing pin spring stop (435) ................. 139
9.3.5. Removal and reinstallation of the sear slide (431), the sear (415) and
its spring (416) .................................................................................. 141
9.3.6. Removal and reinstallation of the firing pin assembly (430) .................... 143
9.3.7. Disassembling and reassembling the firing pin assembly (430) ............... 143
9.3.8. Disassembling and reassembling the extractor/ejector assembly (480) .... 145
9.4. Barrel buffer group [ 4 ] ................................................................................... 147
9.4.1. Removal and reinstallation of the buffer body lock (537) ....................... 147
9.4.2. Removal and reinstallation of the accelerator (535) .............................. 149
2005 08 EN -4- Catalog n° 3640084230

9.5. Feed cover group [ 5 ] ..................................................................................... 151

9.5.1. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover assembly (601) ................. 151
9.5.2. Removal and reinstallation of the belt feed slide assembly (620) ............ 153
9.5.3. Removal and reinstallation of the belt feed lever (641) .......................... 155
9.5.4. Disassembling and reassembling the belt feed slide assembly (620) ....... 157
9.5.5. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover latch plate spring (645) ...... 157
9.5.6. Removal and reinstallation of the extractor plate spring (646) ................ 159
9.5.7. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover latch shaft (653) and
the feed cover latch (651) ................................................................... 159
9.6. Back plate group [ 6 ] ...................................................................................... 161
9.6.1. Removal and reinstallation of the back plate latch (715)........................ 161
9.6.2. Removal and reinstallation of the back plate latch lock (722) ................. 163
9.6.3. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the buffer
plate (731) and the back plate regulator assembly (750) ....................... 165
9.7. Adaptation [ 7 ] ............................................................................................... 169
9.7.1. Removal and reinstallation of the protective cover (A691) ...................... 169
9.7.2. Removal and reinstallation of the solenoid (G1) and the sensor support
plate assembly (A610) ........................................................................ 171
9.7.3. Disassembly and reassembly of the sensor support plate assembly
(A610) .............................................................................................. 175
10.1. Checking the firing precision ............................................................................ 181

10.2. Checking and gauging the barrel (110)/(110/1) ................................................ 183
10.3. Checking and adjustment of the firing rate ........................................................ 189
10.4. Checking and gauging the headspace .............................................................. 191
10.5. Timing adjustment ........................................................................................... 195
10.6. Checking and adjusting the sensor (A620) ........................................................ 201
10.6.1. Electrical check of the sensor (A620) ................................................... 201
10.6.2. Checking and, if necessary, adjusting the position of the sensor (A620) .. 203
11.1. Reception of an incorrect functioning machine gun ............................................ 204

11.2. Typical problems ............................................................................................. 205
11.3. Removal of a ruptured cartridge case ................................................................ 209
2005 08 EN -5- Catalog n° 3640084230

12.1. Changing the machine gun from left-hand to right-hand feeding ......................... 211
12.1.1. Interventions on the bolt group [ 3 ] ..................................................... 211
12.1.2. Interventions on the feed cover group [ 5 ] ........................................... 213
12.1.3. Interventions on the ammunition feeding and ejection section ................ 215
13.1. Lists of Periodical Replacement Parts (PRP) ......................................................... 217

13.1.1. “PRP 2500 RDS” (905/85) for the M3P machine gun............................ 217
13.1.2. “PRP 5000 RDS” (905/80) for the M3P machine gun............................ 219
13.1.3. “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/81) for the M3P machine gun with standard
flash-hider ......................................................................................... 221
13.1.4. “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/83) for the M3P machine gun with GFH
(Guided blast effect Flash-Hider) ......................................................... 225
flash-hider ......................................................................................... 229
13.1.6. “PRP 20000 RDS” (905/84) for the M3P machine gun with GFH
(Guided blast effect Flash-Hider) ......................................................... 233
13.2. Lists of Random Replacement Parts (RRP) ........................................................... 237
13.2.1. “Short-term RRP” (905/123) for the M3P machine gun ......................... 237
13.2.2. “Long-term RRP” (905/125) for the M3P machine gun .......................... 241
CHAPTER 14 : TOOLS FOR THE M3P MACHINE GUN
..................................................................................................................... 245
15.1. Solenoid (G1) + Sensor support plate assembly (A610)...................................... 247
CHAPTER 16 : NOTES
..................................................................................................................... 249
2005 08 EN -6- Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN -7- Catalog n° 3640084230

M3P with short standard flash-hider
M3P with long standard flash-hider
M3P with short GFH
M3P with long GFH
Fig. 1 - The 4 versions of the M3P machine gun
2005 08 EN -8- Catalog n° 3640084230

1.1. INTRODUCTION
This manual is intended for the personnel responsible for the maintenance of the M3P machine
gun.
The purpose of the manual is to familiarise the personnel with the operation and the
maintenance of the gun, to explain the removal, disassembly, repair and/or replacement of the
component parts and to supply the appropriate inspection, gauging and adjustment
procedures.
1.2. DESCRIPTION
The M3P machine gun, designed to be mounted onto the elastic cradle of a weapon system, is
a short-recoil-operated, automatic weapon firing the .50 (12.7 x 99 mm) ammunition.
The M3P machine gun is available in 4 versions (Fig. 1) :

• M3P with short standard flash-hider
• M3P with long standard flash-hider
• M3P with short GFH (Guided blast effect Flash-Hider)
• M3P with long GFH (Guided blast effect Flash-Hider)
For the rest, the 4 versions of the M3P machine gun have the following common features :
- Stellited chrome-plated barrel
- Left-hand ammunition feeding
The weapon can be changed from left-hand to right-hand feeding without the need of using
special accessories.
- Disintegrating M9 links ammunition belt

- Empty cases ejection : downwards
- Links ejection : to the right
When the weapon has been changed to right-hand feeding, the links are ejected towards the
left side.
- Cocking by means of the bolt stud (451) provided at the right side of the machine gun
The bolt stud (451) has been designed to be actuated by a recocking system provided in the
weapon system.
- Solenoid trigger action (controlled by the ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) of the
weapon system)
2005 08 EN -9- Catalog n° 3640084230

1.3. TECHNICAL DATA
1.3.1. Dimensions and weight
Short standard Long standard Short Long

flash-hider flash-hider GFH GFH
Overall length 1,680 mm (66.1”) 1,800 mm (70.9”) 1,916 mm (75.4”) 2,009 mm (79.1”)
Weight 36.5 kg (80.5 lb) 37.2 kg (82.0 lb) 38.5 kg (84.9 lb) 39.0 kg (86.0 lb)
1.3.2. Functional data
Operating principle : Short recoil of the barrel
Trigger action : Solenoid
Calibre : .50 (12.7 x 99 mm)
Firing mode : Automatic
Feeding : Belt-fed cartridges fitted on disintegrating links (M9 closed links)
Ejection : Empty cases :Downwards

Links : For right-hand feeding : To the left
For left-hand feeding : To the right
Barrel length : 915 mm (36.0”)
Barrel weight : For standard flash-hider : 5.0 kg (11.0 lb)

For guided blast effect flash-hider : 6.6 kg (14.6 lb)
Rifled length : 810 mm (31.9”)
Barrel cooling : By air
Number of grooves : 8
Twist and direction : 381 mm (15.0”) right-hand
Aiming : Depending on the weapon system
Rate of fire : 950 - 1100 rpm
2005 08 EN - 10 - Catalog n° 3640084230

1.3.3. Ballistics
.50 calibre munition
Overall length : 138.43 mm (5.45”)

Effective range : 1,850 m (± 6,000 ft)
Maximum range : 6,500 m (± 21,000 ft)
Main types of ammunition :
Bullet tip colour Ammunition type
None Ball
Black AP (Armour - Piercing)
Silver API (Armour - Piercing - Incendiary)
Red or orange T (Tracer)
Blue I (Incendiary)
Silver and red APIT (Armour - Piercing - Incendiary - Tracer)
Silver and yellow APEI (Armour - Piercing - Explosive - Incendiary)
The specifications and other figures are given for indication only and have no contractual value.
FN HERSTAL S.A. reserves the right to modify or to change the specifications at any time without prior notice.
2005 08 EN - 11 - Catalog n° 3640084230

1.4. ABBREVIATIONS
A: Ampere
ABA : Adaptation Box Assembly
CAT n° :Catalog number
cm : Centimetres
daN : Deca Newton (10 N)
dia. : Diametre
Fig. : Figure
ft : Feet
g: Grams
GFH : Guided blast effect Flash-Hider
J: Joule
kg : Kilograms
lb : Pounds
m: Metres
M3P : .50 calibre machine gun
mm : Millimetres
m/s : Metres/second
N: Newton
N° : Number
NATO : North Atlantic Treaty Organization
OREA : “Outil de Réparation et d’Entretien Armes” (special tool for weapon repair and
maintenance)
OREAA : “Outil de Réparation et d’Entretien Armes Aéronautiques” (special tool for
aeronautical weapon repair and maintenance)
PRP : Periodical Replacement Parts
Qty : Quantity
RDS : Rounds
rpm : Rounds per minute
RRP : Random Replacement Parts
s: Seconds
UT : Universal Tool (commercial tool not considered as a FN Herstal product, but which
can be supplied on special request)
V: Volt
“: Inch
2005 08 EN - 12 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 13 - Catalog n° 3640084230

M3P with long standard
flash-hider
M3P with long GFH
[2]
M3P with short GFH
a
M3P with short standard
[5] flash-hider
[5]
[6]
[2]
[7] b
[3]
M3P with standard

flash-hider
[3]
[1]
M3P with GFH
[4]
Fig. 2.a - The 7 main groups of the M3P machine gun
2005 08 EN - 14 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.1. HOW TO ORDER PARTS
For ordering parts of the M3P machine gun, refer to the ‘Catalog of parts and accessories’ of
the weapon system including the gun.
2.2. PARTS LISTS
The M3P machine gun is subdivided into 7 groups (Fig. 2.a) :
Group Description Fig. Paragraph
[1] Barrel group 2.b 2.2.1
[2] Receiver group (part I) 2.c.1 2.2.2.1
Receiver group (part II)

(For M3P machine gun with short flash-hider) 2.c.2 2.2.2.2
Receiver group (part II)

(For M3P machine gun with long flash-hider) 2.c.3 2.2.2.3
[3] Bolt group 2.d 2.2.3
[4] Barrel buffer group 2.e 2.2.4
[5] Feed cover group 2.f 2.2.5
[6] Back plate group 2.g 2.2.6
[7] Adaptation 2.h 2.2.7
2005 08 EN - 15 - Catalog n° 3640084230

211
(Fig. 2.c.1)
110/1
M3P with GFH
110
M3P with standard
flash-hider
161
155
A1
150
154
a
156
535
(Fig. 2.e)
Fig. 2.b - Barrel group [ 1 ]
2005 08 EN - 16 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2. PARTS LISTS (continued)
2.2.1. Barrel group [ 1 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.b)
110 Barrel, stellite, proved, spare (*) 1

110/1 Barrel, stellite, proved, spare, heavy type (**) 1
150 Barrel extension assembly 1
154 > Barrel extension subassembly 1
161 > > Spring blade, locking barrel 1
155 > Lock, breech 1
156 > Pin assembly, breech lock 1
(*) Only M3P with a standard flash-hider

(**) Only M3P with a GFH (Guided blast effect Flash-Hider)
A1 Barrel extension body 1
(b) Description
The barrel group [ 1 ] of the M3P machine gun is inserted, from the rear side, all the way
into the receiver (211) and is composed of the barrel (110)/(110/1) and the barrel
extension assembly (150).
The (standard) barrel (110) is used for a M3P machine gun provided with a standard flash-hider
assembly (355) while the heavy barrel (110/1) is used in combination with the guided blast
effect flash-hider assembly (355) (also refer to § 2.2.2.2 and § 2.2.2.3).
Please note that the standard flash-hider assembly (355) as well as the guided blast effect
flash-hider assembly (355) are available in a long and a short version.
The barrel (110)/(110/1) is screwed into the front opening of the barrel extension body
(A1).
In order to hold back the rotational movement of the barrel (110)/(110/1) after it has been
screwed into position, the lug on the front extremity of the barrel locking spring blade (161) (see
further) engages one of the locking grooves provided in the rear end of the barrel.
As the headspace is adjusted by turning the barrel (110)/(110/1) (refer to § 10.4), it is

absolutely necessary to check and, if necessary, adjust the headspace if the barrel has been
turned, even slightly.
2005 08 EN - 17 - Catalog n° 3640084230

211
(Fig. 2.c.1)
110/1
M3P with GFH
110
M3P with standard
flash-hider
161
155
A1
150
154
a
156
535
(Fig. 2.e)
Fig. 2.b - Barrel group [ 1 ]
2005 08 EN - 18 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.1. Barrel group [ 1 ] (continued)
The barrel extension assembly (150) forms the link between the barrel (110)/(110/1) and
the barrel buffer group [ 4 ].
The rear shank of the barrel extension body (A1) ensures the correct connection with the barrel
buffer group [ 4 ] (also refer to § 2.2.4).
The narrower part of the rear shank fits between and is engaged by the 2 claws of the
accelerator (535) while the rear nose of the shank engages the front nose of the buffer block
subassembly (520).
In addition, the barrel extension assembly (150) has been provided with the guides for the back-
and-forth movement of the bolt group [ 3 ].
The barrel extension assembly (150) consists of the barrel extension subassembly (154)
provided with the breech lock (155).
The breech lock (155) is inserted into the corresponding housing at the rear side of the barrel
extension subassembly (154) and is secured in a position allowing a restricted vertical movement
by means of the breech lock pin (156).
When, at the beginning of the rearward movement of the moving parts, the left and right
extremities of the breech lock pin (156) come into contact with the inclined face of the front
extremity of the corresponding breech lock depressor (fixed to the inner side of the
corresponding side plate of the receiver (211)), the pin, and therefore also the breech lock
(155) itself, will be pushed downwards.
The barrel extension subassembly (154) consists of the barrel extension body (A1) with, on its
right side, the barrel locking spring blade (161).
The barrel locking spring blade (161) is fitted, from the front side, into its housing in the right
side of the barrel extension body (A1) and then held into position by staking.
As explained above, the lug on the front extremity of the barrel locking spring blade (161)
engages one of the locking grooves provided in the rear end of the barrel (110)/(110/1) in
order to hold back any rotational movement of the latter.
2005 08 EN - 19 - Catalog n° 3640084230

257 256
e 257
250
255 d
251/1 255
c
222 e 221
b
252
c
d
b 231
a
232
a
222
h II
i I
211
f
g
236
B1
217 235
218
216 i
g
219
h 221
k
f
212
272
j
A113
o
n
A114 m A113
l
271 273 m
k n
j
A111 A111
A112
o l
274
A110 Also part of 9998 (Fig. 2.h)
Fig. 2.c.1 - Receiver group [ 2 ] (part I)
2005 08 EN - 20 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ]
2.2.2.1. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part I)
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.c.1)
211 Receiver subassembly, spare, proved 1

212 Feed tray 1
216 Pawl, belt holding, left-hand 1
217 Pawl, belt holding, right-hand 1
218 Sleeve, belt holding pawl 1
219 Spring, pawl 2
221 Axis, fixing pawls 2
222 Pin, locking 2
231 Switch, extractor 1
232 Spring, extractor switch 1
235 Nut, rear cam, extractor 1
236 Spring, safety, extractor cam nut 1
250 Adapter, links chute assembly 1
251/1 > Adapter 1
252 > Chute guide, cartridge links 1
256 > Screw 2
257 > Lockwire 1 (*)
271 Cam, breech lock 1
272 Screw, breech lock cam 1
273 Nut, locking cam 1
274 Pin, cotter 1
9998 Adjustment assembly (sliding block - sensor)
(refer to § 2.2.7) -
A110 > Sliding block, rear bracket assembly 1
A111 > > Sliding block 2
A112 > > Axis, sliding block 1
A113 > > Roll pin 2
A114 > > Spring type straight pin, slotted 1
(*) The lockwire (257) should be cut into 2 pieces which should then be used to secure
each of the 2 screws (256)
B1 Belt holding pawls assembly 1
2005 08 EN - 21 - Catalog n° 3640084230

257 256
e 257
250
255 d
251/1 255
c
222 e 221
b
252
c
d
b 231
a
232
a
222
h II
i I
211
f
g
236
B1
217 235
218
216 i
g
219
h 221
k
f
212
272
j
A113
o
n
A114 m A113
l
271 273 m
k n
j
A111 A111
A112
o l
274
2005 08 EN - 22 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] (continued)
2.2.2.1. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part I) (continued)
(b) Description
The receiver group [ 2 ] consists of the receiver (211) onto or into which the following
assemblies and components have been installed :
- In case of a M3P machine gun with short flash-hider, the assemblies and components
represented on Fig. 2.c.2 and described in § 2.2.2.2.
In case of a M3P machine gun with long flash-hider, the assemblies and components
represented on Fig. 2.c.3 and described in § 2.2.2.3.
- The belt holding pawls assembly (B1) and the feed tray (212), mounted onto the left
side of the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the receiver (211) and
contributing to the correct feeding of the ammunition belt
The belt holding pawls assembly (B1) and the feed tray (212) are held in place by an axis
(221) which, on its turn, is secured by means of a locking pin (222).
The belt holding pawls assembly (B1) consists of the left and right belt holding pawls (216)
and (217), held together by their (hollow) sleeve (218).
The left and right belt holding pawls (216) and (217) can pivot on their axis (221) and
each pawl is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of a pawl spring (219).
Please note that this configuration corresponds to the standard case of a left-hand fed M3P
machine gun : if the gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer to § 12.1), the belt
holding pawls assembly (B1) and the feed tray (212) will be installed at the right side.
- The links chute assembly (250), mounted onto the right side of the ammunition feeding
and ejection section of the receiver (211) and guiding the used links out of the
machine gun
The links chute assembly (250) is held in place by an axis (221) which, on its turn, is secured
by means of a locking pin (222).
The links chute assembly (250) consists of the adapter (251/1) provided with the links guide
(252) which has been fitted in the adapter from the right side before being secured by means
of the 2 screws (256) used in combination with the 2 washers (255).
Each screw (256) is secured to the corresponding edge of the adapter (251/1) by a
lockwire (257).
machine gun : if the gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer to § 12.1), the links
chute assembly (250) will be installed at the left side.
2005 08 EN - 23 - Catalog n° 3640084230

257 256
e 257
250
255 d
251/1 255
c
222 e 221
b
252
c
d
b 231
a
232
a
222
h II
i I
211
f
g
236
B1
217 235
218
216 i
g
219
h 221
k
f
212
272
j
A113
o
n
A114 m A113
l
271 273 m
k n
j
A111 A111
A112
o l
274
2005 08 EN - 24 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.2.1. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part I) (continued)
- The breech lock cam (271), fitted into its housing in the bottom of the receiver (211)
and used to guide the breech lock (155) (also refer to § 2.2.1)
The breech lock cam (271) is secured by the screw (272) and the nut (273) : in order to
ensure its correct operation, there should be a clearance of 0.10 - 0.30 mm between the
breech lock cam and the bottom plate of the receiver (211) (also refer to § 9.2.6).
In order to avoid loosening due to vibrations, the nut (273) is secured to the screw (272) by
means of the cotter pin (274).
- The extractor switch (231), provided on the inner side of the left side plate of the
receiver (211) and used, in combination with the extractor plate spring (646) and the
extractor guide cam in the feed cover (610) and with the special cam riveted to the
inner side of the left side plate of the receiver, to guide the front end of the extractor/
ejector assembly (480) (also refer to § 2.2.3 and § 2.2.5)
The extractor switch (231) is secured by means of the nut (235) which is screwed, at the left
outer side of the receiver (211), onto the pin of the switch.
In order to avoid loosening due to vibrations, the nut (235) is secured to the pin of the
extractor switch (231) by means of the safety spring (236).
The extractor switch (231) is held in its raised position by means of its spring (232) which
engages the special groove provided in the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver
(211).
The little curved extremity (I) of the extractor switch spring (232) fits into the hole provided
in the groove for the spring while the other extremity of the spring is located under the
shoulder (II) of the extractor switch (231).
- The sliding blocks assembly (A110), mounted onto the lower rear mounting lugs of the
receiver (211)
The sliding blocks assembly (A110) consists of the 2 sliding blocks (A111) mounted onto the
extremities of the sliding blocks axis (A112) which has been inserted into the holes of the
lower rear mounting lugs of the receiver (211).
Each sliding block (A111) is secured to the corresponding extremity of the sliding blocks
axis (A112) by means of a roll pin (A113).
Finally, and in order to ensure a rigid mounting of the sliding blocks assembly (A110), one
side of the sliding blocks axis (A112) has been provided with a spring pin (A114) which fits
into the outer notch of the hole of the corresponding rear mounting lug of the receiver
(211).
Please note that the sliding blocks assembly (A110) is also part of the adjustment assembly
(9998) (also refer to § 2.2.7).
2005 08 EN - 25 - Catalog n° 3640084230

B4
365 257
355 (**)
B3 368
355 (*) 367

362
257
a
B2 368
361
363
367
362
362
321
322/1 322/5 322/9
b 322/2 322/6 322/10
314
b 322/3 322/7 322/11
a
322/4 322/8 322/12
e
312
314
305
c
334 313
664
c
331 663
e
211
332 (Fig. 2.c.1)
333
260
Fig. 2.c.2 - Receiver group [ 2 ] (part II) (for M3P machine gun with short flash-hider)
2005 08 EN - 26 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.2.2. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part II) (for M3P machine gun with short flash-hider)
260 Pin, security assembly 1

305 Jacket, barrel assembly 1
312 > Recoil, booster 1
313 > Jacket, barrel 1
314 > Screw, fixing recoil booster 2
321 Adapter, trunnion 1
322/1 Shim for adapter (1.49) (°) 1
322/10 Shim for adapter (2.06) (°) 1
322/11 Shim for adapter (2.12) (°) 1
322/12 Shim for adapter (2.18) (°) 1
331 Pin, locking, trunnion block 1
332 Spring, trunnion block lock 1
333 Split pin 1
334 Screw, locking jacket barrel 1
355 Flash-hider assembly (*) 1
257 > Lockwire 1
367 > Lock, securing flash-hider 1
368 > Adjusting screw, securing flash-hider 2
355 Guided blast effect tube assembly (**) 1
257 > Lockwire 1
365 > Securing ring 1
361 Sleeve, flash-hider 1
362 Screw, fixing sleeve 3
363 Ring, securing sleeve screw 1
663 Pawl, cover detent 1
664 Spring, cover lock 1
(°) One shim (322) for each machine gun

(*) Only M3P with short standard flash-hider
(**) Only M3P with short GFH (Guided blast effect Flash-Hider)
2005 08 EN - 27 - Catalog n° 3640084230

B4
365 257
355 (**)
B3 368
355 (*) 367

362
257
a
B2 368
361
363
367
362
362
321
322/1 322/5 322/9
b 322/2 322/6 322/10
314
b 322/3 322/7 322/11
a
322/4 322/8 322/12
e
312
314
305
c
334 313
664
c
331 663
e
211
332 (Fig. 2.c.1)
333
260
2005 08 EN - 28 - Catalog n° 3640084230

(continued)
(a) List of parts (continued)
B2 Short standard flash-hider 1

B3 Short guided blast effect flash-hider body 1
B4 Guided blast effect flash-hider 1
(b) Description
The receiver group [ 2 ] consists of the receiver (211) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1) onto or into
which the following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The assemblies and components represented on Fig. 2.c.1 and described in § 2.2.2.1.
- The security pin assembly (260) which is used to block the (inadvertent) forward
movement of the moving parts of the machine gun
The security pin assembly (260) should be inserted into its hole in the left side plate of the
receiver (211) after having prepared the M3P machine gun for shooting and should be
removed just before firing (or just before take-off of the carrier onto which the corresponding
weapon system has been installed).
If possible, the security pin assembly (260) should also be inserted after firing (or
immediately after landing of the carrier onto which the corresponding weapon system has
been installed).
- The barrel jacket assembly (305) which is screwed into the threaded cylindrical
mounting support at the front side of the receiver (211) and which is locked by means
of the barrel jacket locking screw (334)
The barrel jacket assembly (305) consists of the barrel jacket (313) provided, at its front end,
with the recoil booster (312).
The recoil booster (312) has first been screwed into the front end of the barrel jacket (313)
and then secured by means of the 2 screws (314).
The barrel jacket locking screw (334) locks the barrel jacket (313).
- The flash-hider sleeve (361) which has been installed onto the front end of the barrel
jacket assembly (305)
The flash-hider sleeve (361) is secured to the barrel jacket assembly (305) by means of the 3
screws (362) which engage the front holes of the barrel jacket (313).
After the 3 screws (362) have been firmly tightened, and in order to avoid loosening due
to vibrations, their heads are secured by means of the securing ring (363).
2005 08 EN - 29 - Catalog n° 3640084230

B4
365 257
355 (**)
B3 368
355 (*) 367

362
257
a
B2 368
361
363
367
362
362
321
322/1 322/5 322/9
b 322/2 322/6 322/10
314
b 322/3 322/7 322/11
a
322/4 322/8 322/12
e
312
314
305
c
334 313
664
c
331 663
e
211
332 (Fig. 2.c.1)
333
260
2005 08 EN - 30 - Catalog n° 3640084230

(continued)
- The (short) standard flash-hider assembly (355) or the (short) guided blast effect flash-
hider assembly (355) which has been screwed into the front part of the flash-hider
sleeve (361)
The (short) standard flash-hider assembly (355) consists of the short standard flash-hider (B2)
provided with the securing lock (367).
The (short) guided blast effect flash-hider assembly (355) consists of the assembly formed by
the short guided blast effect flash-hider body (B3), the securing ring (365) and the guided
blast effect flash-hider (B4) also provided with the securing lock (367).
The securing ring (365) is fitted onto the front threaded part of the short guided blast effect
flash-hider body (B3) before the guided blast effect flash-hider (B4) is screwed onto it.
The securing lock (367), which is used to avoid loosening of the corresponding flash-hider
due to vibrations, is secured by means of the 2 screws (368) which, on their turn, are secured
by means of a lockwire (257).
- The trunnion adapter (321) which is screwed, together with a shim (322/1-12), onto
the thread of the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver (211)
The correct vertical position of the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322/1-12) is ensured
by the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) : the front end of the pin fits into the small lower
holes of the shim and the trunnion adapter.
The trunnion adapter locking pin (331) itself fits, from the front side, into its hole in the
lower front side of the receiver (211), is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of
the trunnion adapter locking pin spring (332) and is secured by means of the split pin
(333).
For more information about the choice of the correct trunnion adapter shim (322), refer to
§ 9.2.14.
- The cover detent pawl (663) and its spring (664) fitted, from the rear side, into their
housing in the upper front side of the receiver (211)
The cover detent pawl (663), held in a spring-tensioned position by its spring (664), ensures
that the feed cover assembly (601) does not close inadvertently after it has been opened.
2005 08 EN - 31 - Catalog n° 3640084230

B4
365
257
B6 355 (**)
368
355 (*)
367
362
257
B5 a
368
361
363
367
362
362
321
322/1 322/5 322/9
b 322/2 322/6 322/10
314
b 322/3 322/7 322/11
a 322/4 322/8 322/12
e
312
314
305
c
334 313
664
c
331 663
e
211
332 (Fig. 2.c.1)
333
260
Fig. 2.c.3 - Receiver group [ 2 ] (part II) (for M3P machine gun with long flash-hider)
2005 08 EN - 32 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.2.3. Receiver group [ 2 ] (part II) (for M3P machine gun with long flash-hider)
260 Pin, security assembly 1

305 Jacket, barrel assembly 1
312 > Recoil, booster 1
313 > Jacket, barrel 1
314 > Screw, fixing recoil booster 2
321 Adapter, trunnion 1
322/10 Shim for adapter (2.06) (°) 1
322/11 Shim for adapter (2.12) (°) 1
322/12 Shim for adapter (2.18) (°) 1
331 Pin, locking, trunnion block 1
332 Spring, trunnion block lock 1
333 Split pin 1
334 Screw, locking jacket barrel 1
355 Extended, flash-hider lock securing assembly (*) 1
257 > Lockwire 1
355 Flash-hider tube guided, blast effect extension assembly (**) 1
257 > Lockwire 1
365 > Securing ring 1
361 Sleeve, flash-hider 1
362 Screw, fixing sleeve 3
363 Ring, securing sleeve screw 1
663 Pawl, cover detent 1
664 Spring, cover lock 1
(°) One shim (322) for each machine gun

(*) Only M3P with long standard flash-hider
(**) Only M3P with long GFH (Guided blast effect Flash-Hider)
2005 08 EN - 33 - Catalog n° 3640084230

B4
365
257
B6 355 (**)
368
355 (*)
367
362
257
B5 a
368
361
363
367
362
362
321
322/1 322/5 322/9
b 322/2 322/6 322/10
314
b 322/3 322/7 322/11
a 322/4 322/8 322/12
e
312
314
305
c
334 313
664
c
331 663
e
211
332 (Fig. 2.c.1)
333
260
2005 08 EN - 34 - Catalog n° 3640084230

(continued)
B4 Guided blast effect flash-hider 1

B5 Long standard flash-hider 1
B6 Long guided blast effect flash-hider body 1
(b) Description
The receiver group [ 2 ] consists of the receiver (211) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1) onto or into
which the following assemblies and components have been installed :
- The assemblies and components represented on Fig. 2.c.1 and described in § 2.2.2.1.
- The security pin assembly (260) which is used to block the (inadvertent) forward
movement of the moving parts of the machine gun
The security pin assembly (260) should be inserted into its hole in the left side plate of the
receiver (211) after having prepared the M3P machine gun for shooting and should be
removed just before firing (or just before take-off of the carrier onto which the corresponding
weapon system has been installed).
If possible, the security pin assembly (260) should also be inserted after firing (or
immediately after landing of the carrier onto which the corresponding weapon system has
been installed).
- The barrel jacket assembly (305) which is screwed into the threaded cylindrical
mounting support at the front side of the receiver (211) and which is locked by means
of the barrel jacket locking screw (334)
The barrel jacket assembly (305) consists of the barrel jacket (313) provided, at its front end,
with the recoil booster (312).
The recoil booster (312) has first been screwed into the front end of the barrel jacket (313)
and then secured by means of the 2 screws (314).
The barrel jacket locking screw (334) engages the notch provided in the flange at the rear
end of the barrel jacket (313).
- The flash-hider sleeve (361) which has been installed onto the front end of the barrel
jacket assembly (305)
The flash-hider sleeve (361) is secured to the barrel jacket assembly (305) by means of the 3
screws (362) which engage the front holes of the barrel jacket (313).
After the 3 screws (362) have been firmly tightened, and in order to avoid loosening due
to vibrations, their heads are secured by means of the securing ring (363).
2005 08 EN - 35 - Catalog n° 3640084230

B4
365
257
B6 355 (**)
368
355 (*)
367
362
257
B5 a
368
361
363
367
362
362
321
322/1 322/5 322/9
b 322/2 322/6 322/10
314
b 322/3 322/7 322/11
a 322/4 322/8 322/12
e
312
314
305
c
334 313
664
c
331 663
e
211
332 (Fig. 2.c.1)
333
260
2005 08 EN - 36 - Catalog n° 3640084230

(continued)
- The (long) standard flash-hider assembly (355) or the (long) guided blast effect flash-
hider assembly (355) which has been screwed into the front part of the flash-hider
sleeve (361)
The (long) standard flash-hider assembly (355) consists of the long standard flash-hider (B5)
provided with the securing lock (367).
The (long) guided blast effect flash-hider assembly (355) consists of the assembly formed by
the long guided blast effect flash-hider body (B6), the securing ring (365) and the guided
blast effect flash-hider (B4) also provided with the securing lock (367).
The securing ring (365) is fitted onto the front threaded part of the long guided blast effect
flash-hider body (B6) before the guided blast effect flash-hider (B4) is screwed onto it.
The securing lock (367), which is used to avoid loosening of the corresponding flash-hider
due to vibrations, is secured by means of the 2 screws (368) which, on their turn, are secured
by means of a lockwire (257).
- The trunnion adapter (321) which is screwed, together with a shim (322/1-12), onto
the thread of the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver (211)
The correct vertical position of the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322/1-12) is ensured
by the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) : the front end of the pin fits into the small lower
holes of the shim and the trunnion adapter.
The trunnion adapter locking pin (331) itself fits, from the front side, into its hole in the
lower front side of the receiver (211), is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of
the trunnion adapter locking pin spring (332) and is secured by means of the split pin
(333).
For more information about the choice of the correct trunnion adapter shim (322), refer to
§ 9.2.14.
- The cover detent pawl (663) and its spring (664) fitted, from the rear side, into their
housing in the upper front side of the receiver (211)
The cover detent pawl (663), held in a spring-tensioned position by its spring (664), ensures
that the feed cover assembly (601) does not close inadvertently after it has been opened.
2005 08 EN - 37 - Catalog n° 3640084230

412 413
435
421
a 412 413
415
a
451
b
434 II
IV b
Ib c
Ic
h d
Ia 416
Id
VI
V
480
i
491 g g
j
i
c
486 411 211
483 432 (Fig. 2.c.1)
482
e
C1
487 481
d 431
485
j e
433
III
460
439
f 448
449
440 447
410
430
f h
445
Fig. 2.d - Bolt group [ 3 ]
2005 08 EN - 38 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.3. Bolt group [ 3 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.d)
410 Bolt assembly 1

411 > Bolt spare subassembly 1
412 > Switch, bolt, alternate feed 2
415 > Sear 1
416 > Spring, sear 1
421 > Lever, cocking 1
430 > Extension and firing, pin assembly 1
439 > > Pin, firing 1
440 > > Firing pin, extension assembly 1
447 > > > Extension, firing pin 1
448 > > > Spring, pin firing 1
449 > > > Pin, retaining firing pin 1
445 > > Pin, retaining firing pin 1
431 > Slide, sear 1
432 > Stop pin, sear slide 1
433 > Axis, cocking lever 1
435 > Stop, firing pin extension spring assembly 1
451 Stud, bolt 1
460 Rod, driving spring and spring assembly 1
480 Extractor, assembly 1
481 > Extractor subassembly 1
482 > > Pivot, extractor body 1
483 > > Retaining spring, extractor 1
485 > Ejector 1
486 > Axis, ejector 1
487 > Spring, ejector 1
C1 Extractor 1
2005 08 EN - 39 - Catalog n° 3640084230

412 413
435
421
a 412 413
415
a
451
b
434 II
IV b
Ib c
Ic
h d
Ia 416
Id
VI
V
480
i
491 g g
j
i
c
486 411 211
483 432 (Fig. 2.c.1)
482
e
C1
487 481
d 431
485
j e
433
III
460
439
f 448
449
440 447
410
430
f h
445
2005 08 EN - 40 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.3. Bolt group [ 3 ] (continued)
(b) Description
The bolt group [ 3 ] controls the cartridge feeding, extraction and ejection operations as
well as the operation of the firing pin (439) and consists of the bolt assembly (410), the
bolt stud (451), the return spring assembly (460) and the extractor/ejector assembly (480).
For more information about the operation of the bolt group [ 3 ] and its different components,
refer to chapter 3.
The bolt assembly (410) consists of the bolt (411) onto or into which the following
assemblies and components have been installed :
- The bolt switches (412) which fit, from above, into the corresponding holes provided in
the upper grooves in the bolt (411) and which are held in place by the engagement of
the spring pins (413) into their recesses.
The bolt switches (412) are used to form the appropriate continuous groove for the rear end
of the belt feed lever (641) (also refer to § 2.2.5) on top of the bolt (411).
In the standard case of a left-hand fed M3P machine gun, the bolt switches (412) should
be inserted into the holes (Ia) and (Ic) in order to obtain a continuous groove facing the
inscription ‘L’ on the upper side of the bolt (411).
In case of a right-hand fed M3P machine gun (also refer to § 12.1), the bolt switches
(412) should be inserted into the holes (Ib) and (Id) in order to obtain a continuous groove
facing the inscription ‘R’ on the upper side of the bolt (411).
- The cocking lever (421) and its axis (433)
The cocking lever (421) fits into position in its housing provided in the upper rear part of the
bolt (411) and is secured by and can pivot around its axis (433).
The cocking lever axis (433) is inserted, from the left side, into its hole in the bolt (411)
and through the hole in the cocking lever (421).
After the cocking lever axis (433) has been completely inserted into the bolt (411), it is
held into position by means of the spring pin (434) which is installed vertically, flush with
the left side of the head of the axis.
The position of the cocking lever (421), which is used to push the firing pin assembly (430)
into its cocked condition, is determined by the engagement of its tip into the recess provided
in the inner upper rear part of the receiver (211).
- The firing pin assembly (430) which fits, from the rear side, into its housing in the bolt
(411) and which is held back by the sear (415)
The firing pin assembly (430) consists of the firing pin (439) inserted into the front end of the
firing pin extension assembly (440) and fixed by means of the pin (445).
The firing pin extension assembly (440) consists of the firing pin extension (447) into which
the firing pin spring (448) has been fitted and secured by means of the pin (449).
- The firing pin spring stop (435) which fits, from above, into the bolt (411)
The firing pin spring stop (435) is used to hold back the rear end of the firing pin spring
(448) when the firing pin assembly (430) is cocked.
2005 08 EN - 41 - Catalog n° 3640084230

412 413
435
421
a 412 413
415
a
451
b
434 II
IV b
Ib c
Ic
h d
Ia 416
Id
VI
V
480
i
491 g g
j
i
c
486 411 211
483 432 (Fig. 2.c.1)
482
e
C1
487 481
d 431
485
j e
433
III
460
439
f 448
449
440 447
410
430
f h
445
2005 08 EN - 42 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.3. Bolt group [ 3 ] (continued)
- The sear (415) which fits, together with its spring (416) and from above, into its
housing in the rear part of the bolt (411) and which is used in combination with the
sear slide (431)
The sear (415) is held in its raised position by means of its spring (416) and is held back by
the contact of its lug (II) with the inclined face (III) of the right part of the sear slide (431).
The sear (415), which is pushed down by a rightward movement of the sear slide (431) when
(at the end of the forward movement of the moving parts) the latter comes into contact with
the plunger of the energized solenoid (G1) (also refer to § 2.2.7), is used to hold the firing
pin assembly (430) back at its cocked position and to release it for the firing operation.
The sear slide (431) is held back in a position allowing a restricted lateral movement by
means of its stop pin (432).
Besides the housings, grooves and holes described above, the bolt (411) has also been
provided with the following ones :
- The T-slot (IV) on its front face for holding the cartridge and extracting the cartridge
case
- The firing pin hole (not visible on Fig. 2.d) in its front face which allows the firing pin
(439) to reach the primer of the cartridge
- The housing (V) for the return spring assembly (460) in its rear upper right part
- The hole (VI) for the extractor/ejector assembly (480) (see further) in its left side
- The hole (not visible on Fig. 2.d) for the bolt stud (451) (see further) in its lower rear
part
The bolt stud (451) fits, from the right side and through the slot in the right side plate of
the receiver (211), into its hole (not visible on Fig. 2.d) of the bolt (411) (see above) and is
used to cock the machine gun by a rearward movement imposed by the cocking device of
the recocking system of the corresponding weapon system.
The extractor/ejector assembly (480) consists of the extractor subassembly (481) provided
with the ejector (485).
The extractor subassembly (481) consists of the extractor (C1) provided with the extractor pivot
(482) and its retaining spring (483).
The extractor pivot (482), fitted into its hole in the rear end of the extractor (C1) and used in
combination with its retaining spring (483), allows the extractor/ejector assembly (480) to
pivot in the hole (VI) of the bolt (411) (see above).
The ejector (485), held in a spring-tensioned position by means of its spring (487), is secured to
the front end of the extractor (C1) by means of the ejector axis (486) which, on its turn, is
secured by means of the spring pin (491).
The orientation of the ejector (485) is different for a left-hand or a right-hand fed machine
gun (also refer to § 12.1).
The front end of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) is guided by the extractor switch (231)
(provided on the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver (211), by the special cam riveted
to the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver and by the extractor plate spring (646) and
the extractor guide cam in the feed cover (610) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1 and § 2.2.5).
2005 08 EN - 43 - Catalog n° 3640084230

154
(Fig. 2.b)
501
537
535
D1
536
538
530
522
521
523
510
520
Fig. 2.e - Barrel buffer group [ 4 ]
2005 08 EN - 44 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.4. Barrel buffer group [ 4 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.e)
501 Barrel buffer assembly 1

510 > Buffer block assembly 1
520 > > Buffer block subassembly 1
521 > > Spring, guide, buffer 1
522 > > Guide, buffer spring assembly 1
523 > > Spring, internal, buffer block 1
530 > Body, barrel buffer assembly 1
535 > > Accelerator, buffer 1
536 > > Pin, accelerator 1
538 > > Body frame assembly 1
537 > > > Lock, buffer body 1
D1 Barrel buffer body 1
(b) Description
The barrel buffer group [ 4 ] (catalog number (501)) is located behind the barrel extension
assembly (150) and absorbs the recoil energy of the barrel group [ 1 ].
The accelerator (535) and the buffer block subassembly (520) ensure the correct locking with
the barrel extension assembly (150) (also refer to § 2.2.1).
The front nose of the buffer block subassembly (520) engages the rear nose of the rear
shank of the barrel extension body (A1).
At the end of the rearward movement, the 2 claws of the accelerator (535) engage the
narrower part of the rear shank of the barrel extension body (A1).
2005 08 EN - 45 - Catalog n° 3640084230

154
(Fig. 2.b)
501
537
535
D1
536
538
530
522
521
523
510
520
Fig. 2.e - Barrel buffer group [ 4 ]
2005 08 EN - 46 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.4. Barrel buffer group [ 4 ] (continued)
The barrel buffer assembly (501) consists of the barrel buffer body assembly (530) and the
buffer block assembly (510).
The barrel buffer body assembly (530) consists of the body frame assembly (538) provided with
the accelerator (535) which fits between the front lugs of the frame assembly and which is
secured by and can pivot around its pin (536).
On its turn, the body frame assembly (538) consists of the barrel buffer body (D1) provided
with the buffer body lock (537) which is fitted, from the rear side, into its housing in the right
side of the body and which is held into position by staking.
The rear end of the buffer body lock (537) protrudes towards the right side and is used to
hold back the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] once it has been inserted into the receiver (211).
The buffer block assembly (510), which has been inserted (from the rear side) into the hollow
rear part of the barrel buffer body assembly (530), consists of the buffer block subassembly
(520) provided with the buffer guide spring (521), the buffer guide (522) and the internal buffer
block spring (523).
The internal buffer block spring (523) is first inserted into the buffer guide spring (521) and
this spring assembly is then fitted onto the rod of the buffer block subassembly (520) where it
is held in place by means of the buffer guide (522) which is held back by the protruding pins
at the front end of the rod of the buffer block subassembly.
As the buffer block assembly (510) has been adjusted at the factory, it should not be
disassembled.
2005 08 EN - 47 - Catalog n° 3640084230

f
616 610 652

c
g VI
b
654
e XI
III
II
b
615 V
a
IV a
646 651
645
643 I
635 c
VII
641
XIII 653
d
IX 642
631
636 XII
632 601
X VIII
620
629
d
621 f h
661
662
g
h
211
(Fig. 2.c.1)
Fig. 2.f - Feed cover group [ 5 ]
2005 08 EN - 48 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.5. Feed cover group [ 5 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.f)
601 Feed cover assembly 1

610 > Cover, feed, belt assembly 1
615 > Retainer, belt feed slide 1
616 > Pin, belt feed slide retainer 1
620 > Feed slide and pawl assembly 1
621 > > Pawl assembly, belt feed 1
629 > > Arm, belt feed pawl 1
631 > > Spring, belt feed pawl, inner 1
632 > > Spring, belt feed pawl, outer 1
635 > > Slide, feed, belt 1
636 > > Pin, belt feed pawl 1
641 > Lever, feed, belt 1
642 > Spring, belt feed lever plunger 1
643 > Pin, feed lever 1
645 > Spring, cover latch 1
646 > Spring, cover extractor 1
651 > Latch, cover 1
652 > Washer, shaft, cover latch 1
653 > Shaft assembly, cover catch 1
654 > Split pin 1
661 Pin, cover axis 1
662 Split pin 1
(b) Description
The feed cover group [ 5 ] is used, in combination with the belt holding pawls assembly
(B1), to feed the ammunition belt, from the left side, into the receiver (211).
Please note that the links are ejected out of the right side of the receiver (211) and that the
empty cases leave the gun through the ejection opening in the bottom of the receiver.
Also note that this corresponds to the standard case of a left-hand fed M3P machine gun : if the
gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer to § 12.1), the ammunition belt is fed from the
right side and the links are ejected out of the left side of the receiver (211).
2005 08 EN - 49 - Catalog n° 3640084230

f
616 610 652

c
g VI
b
654
e XI
III
II
b
615 V
a
IV a
646 651
645
643 I
635 c
VII
641
XIII 653
d
IX 642
631
636 XII
632 601
X VIII
620
629
d
621 f h
661
662
g
h
211
(Fig. 2.c.1)
2005 08 EN - 50 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.5. Feed cover group [ 5 ] (continued)
The feed cover group [ 5 ] consists of the feed cover assembly (601), secured to the
receiver (211) by means of the feed cover axis pin (661) which, on its turn, is secured by
means of the split pin (662).
The feed cover assembly (601) consists of the feed cover (610) into which the following
assemblies and components have been provided :
- The feed cover latch (651) which is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of its
plate spring (645) and which can be actuated by using the feed cover latch shaft (653)
The feed cover latch (651) ensures that the feed cover assembly (601) remains correctly
locked into position when it is closed. On the other hand, the latch releases the closed feed
cover assembly when the feed cover latch shaft (653) is turned.
The feed cover latch shaft (653) is fitted into the feed cover (610) from the left side and the
right end of the shaft is secured by means of the split pin (654) used in combination with the
washer (652).
The feed cover latch shaft (653) has been provided with a slightly protruding central lug (I)
which engages the notch (II) of the hole in the feed cover latch (651).
The feed cover latch plate spring (645) is fitted, with the wider end of its elongated hole, onto
the small rear mounting pin (III) of the feed cover (610) and then pushed as far as possible
rearwards.
The feed cover latch plate spring (645) is oriented so that its front claw (IV) faces the feed
cover (610).
The feed cover latch plate spring (645) is positioned correctly when its front claw (IV)
engages the corresponding groove in the feed cover (610) and when the pointed front
part (V) of the feed cover latch (651) fits between the rear end of the plate spring and the
feed cover.
- The extractor plate spring (646) used, in combination with the extractor switch (231)
provided on the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver (211), with the special
cam riveted to the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver and with the extractor
guide cam (part of the feed cover (610)), to guide the front end of the extractor/ejector
assembly (480) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1 and § 2.2.3)
The extractor plate spring (646) is fitted with its front end onto the small front mounting pin
(VI) of the feed cover (610) while the lug (VII) on the rear end of the plate spring fits into the
notch in the extractor guide cam.
2005 08 EN - 51 - Catalog n° 3640084230

f
616 610 652

c
g VI
b
654
e XI
III
II
b
615 V
a
IV a
646 651
645
643 I
635 c
VII
641
XIII 653
d
IX 642
631
636 XII
632 601
X VIII
620
629
d
621 f h
661
662
g
h
211
(Fig. 2.c.1)
2005 08 EN - 52 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.5. Feed cover group [ 5 ] (continued)
- The belt feed slide assembly (620) which is used, in combination with the left and right
belt holding pawls (216) and (217) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1), to push the ammunition
belt into the machine gun
The belt feed slide assembly (620) consists of the belt feed slide (635) provided with the belt
feed pawl (621) and the belt feed pawl arm (629).
The belt feed pawl (621) is secured to the left side of the belt feed slide (635) by means of
the pin (636) and is held in a spring-tensioned position by means of the inner and outer
belt feed pawl springs (631) and (632).
After having installed the belt feed pawl (621), the belt feed pawl arm (629) is fitted
between the rear side of the pawl and the inner side of the rear edge of the belt feed slide
(635).
The belt feed pawl arm (629), oriented so that its free extremity (VIII) is pointing towards
the right side, fits with its fork-shaped extremity into the groove (IX) of the pin (636) and
with its central hole onto the pin (X) at the rear side of the belt feed pawl (621).
The belt feed slide assembly (620), which is held in place by the belt feed slide retainer (615)
and which is engaged and actuated by the front end of the belt feed lever (641), carries out
a to-and-fro motion in its housing in the front part of the feed cover (610).
The belt feed slide retainer (615) is fixed to the front part of the feed cover (610) by
means of the pin (616).
machine gun : if the gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer to § 12.1), the belt
feed slide assembly (620) is assembled and oriented differently.
For more information about the operation of the belt feed slide assembly (620), refer to
§ 3.3.2.
- The belt feed lever (641) which converts the back and forth movement of the moving
parts into a to-and-fro motion of the belt feed slide assembly (620)
The belt feed lever (641) can pivot on the (larger) right mounting pin (XI) of the feed cover
(610).
The rear end (XII) of the belt feed lever (641) engages the appropriate groove on top of the
bolt (411) (also refer to § 2.2.3) while the front end of the lever fits into the notch (XIII) at the
rear side of the belt feed slide assembly (620).
The belt feed lever (641) is secured and held in a spring-tensioned position by means of its
plunger (643) and the corresponding spring (642) which fit into the rear housing in the lever,
just behind its pivoting point.
Please note that this configuration corresponds to the standard case of a left-hand fed
M3P machine gun : if the gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer to § 12.1), the
belt feed lever plunger (643) and its spring (642) will be fitted into the front housing in the
belt feed lever (641), just in front of its pivoting point.
2005 08 EN - 53 - Catalog n° 3640084230

710
701 II
731
F1
211
(Fig. 2.c.1)
b a
716
721
717 723 722
b a
715
752
753
771
754
772
I 751
755 IV
756
757
758
754
763
764
III
750
761
Fig. 2.g - Back plate group [ 6 ]
2005 08 EN - 54 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.6. Back plate group [ 6 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.g)
701 Back plate assembly 1

710 > Assembled back plate 1
715 > > Latch, back plate 1
716 > > Pin, trigger axis 1
717 > > Spring, back plate latch 1
721 > > Spring, back plate latch lock 1
722 > > Lock, back plate latch 1
723 > > Stop, back plate latch lock spring 1
731 > Plate, buffer 1
750 > Regulator, back plate assembly 1
751 > > Tube, regulator 1
752 > > Plug, regulator 1
753 > > Set of setting washers 1
754 > > Washer, spring, regulator 24
755 > > Spring regulator 1
756 > > Cone, thrust, regulator 1
757 > > Brake regulator 1
758 > > Washer set, brake, regulator 1
761 > > Plug, adjusting, firing rate 1
763 > > Trunnion, indexing, plug adjusting 1
764 > > Spring, trunnion indexing 1
771 > Trunnion, indexing, plug adjusting 1
772 > Spring, trunnion indexing 1
F1 Back plate 1
(b) Description
The back plate group [ 6 ] (catalog number (701)), mounted onto the rear part of the
receiver (211), is used to stop the bolt assembly (410) at the end of its rearward
movement and to absorb its remaining recoil energy.
2005 08 EN - 55 - Catalog n° 3640084230

710
701 II
731
F1
211
(Fig. 2.c.1)
b a
716
721
717 723 722
b a
715
752
753
771
754
772
I 751
755 IV
756
757
758
754
763
764
III
750
761
Fig. 2.g - Back plate group [ 6 ]
2005 08 EN - 56 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.6. Back plate group [ 6 ] (continued)
The back plate group [ 6 ] is composed of the assembled back plate (710), the buffer
plate (731) and the back plate regulator assembly (750).
After having inserted the buffer plate (731), from the rear side, into the buffer tube of the back
plate (F1), the back plate regulator assembly (750) is screwed into the buffer tube.
The back plate regulator assembly (750) is held in place inside the buffer tube of the back plate
(F1) by means of the indexing trunnion (771) used in combination with its spring (772).
The indexing trunnion (771) fits, together with its spring (772), into their housing (I) in the
regulator tube (751). The outer extremity of the indexing trunnion engages one of the
4 holes (II) in the buffer tube of the back plate (F1) in order to avoid that the regulator tube is
loosened due to vibrations.
The assembled back plate (710) is composed of the back plate (F1) onto which the
following components have been installed :
- The back plate latch (715) which is secured by and can pivot around the pin (716)
The back plate latch (715), which is used to lock the back plate group [ 6 ] into position on
the rear side of the receiver (211), is held in a spring-tensioned position by its spring (717).
- The back plate latch lock (722) which is secured in a position allowing a restricted
lateral movement by means of the stop (723)
The back plate latch lock (722), held in a spring-tensioned position by means of its spring
(721), is used to lock the back plate latch (715) so that it becomes impossible to accidentally
release the back plate group [ 6 ] by inadvertently moving the back plate latch.
The back plate regulator assembly (750) is composed of the regulator tube (751) into
which the following components have been inserted :
- The assembly formed by the regulator plug (752), one or more setting washers (753)
and 15 regulator spring washers (754)
This assembly is fitted, from the front side, into the regulator tube (751) and is released,
together with the buffer plate (731), when the regulator tube is screwed out of the buffer tube
of the back plate (F1).
For more information about the choice of the correct setting washer(s) (753), refer to § 9.6.3.
- The regulator spring (755) and the assembly formed by the regulator cone (756), the
regulator brake (757), one or more regulator brake washers (758) and 9 regulator
spring washers (754)
These components are fitted, from the rear side, into the regulator tube (751) and are held in
place by the firing rate adjusting plug (761) used in combination with the indexing trunnion
(763).
The indexing trunnion (763) fits, together with its spring (764), into their housing (III) in the
firing rate adjusting plug (761). The outer extremity of the indexing trunnion engages one
of the 4 holes (IV) in the regulator tube (751) in order to avoid that the firing rate adjusting
plug is loosened due to vibrations.
For more information about the choice of the correct regulator brake washer(s) (758), refer to
§ 9.6.3.
2005 08 EN - 57 - Catalog n° 3640084230

G1 c
280 286
Ia
287
Id II
Ib 211
288 9998 (Fig. 2.c.1)

c
Ic a
289
A681
A674
A675 A684 A612 2x

A653
A684
G2
A653 A611
A671 A628
A681
3x
A626 a
A610
2x A693
A697 2x A697
A653 2x
A620 b A613 A653 4x A653

2x
A614
A693 G2
A652
A691
G2 4x
A627 A631 A651

A633
A601
III A632
A696
A110
A696 (Fig. 2.c.1)
A693
A696 A693
A695 A694
A696
A693
Fig. 2.h - Adaptation [ 7 ]
2005 08 EN - 58 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.7. Adaptation [ 7 ]
(a) List of parts (Fig. 2.h)
280 Solenoid assembly 1

286 > Screw, securing 1
287 > Nut, slotted, hexagonal-shear 1
288 > Pin, cotter 1
289 Lockwire 1 (*)
9998 Adjustment assembly (sliding block - sensor) 1
A110 > Sliding block, rear bracket assembly
(refer to § 2.2.2.1) -
A601 > Sensor assembly 1
A610 > > Plate, support, sensor, assembled 1
A611 > > > Resistor RER60F4R99R 1
A612 > > > Slotted cheese head screw 2
A613 > > > Plain washer 2
A614 > > > Hexagonal nut, style 1 2
A620 > > > Sensor 1
A626 > > > Sole, plate 1
A627 > > > Support, sensor 1
A628 > > > Countersunk head rivet 3
A631 > > > Pin, locking, sensor 1
A632 > > > Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut 1
A633 > > > Plain washer 1
A651 > > > Connector 1
A653 > > > Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut, PA insert 9
A671 > > > Connector 1
A674 > > > Prevailing torque-type hexagonal nut, PA insert 1
A675 > > > Serrated lock washer 1
A681 > > > Slotted countersunk flat head screw 3
A691 > > Cover, protective SSA 1
A693 > > Screw, retracting slide bracket (short) 7
A694 > > Pin, cover, locking (long) 1
A695 > > Pin, safety 1
A696 > > Spring washer 8
A697 > > Lockwire 1 (-)
(*) The lockwire (289) should be cut into 5 pieces of the appropriate length which should then
be used to secure each of the 4 screws of the solenoid body as well as the connector
(A671)
(-) The lockwire (A697) should be cut into 3 pieces of the appropriate length which should
then be used to secure each of the 3 screws (A693) securing the sole plate (A626)
2005 08 EN - 59 - Catalog n° 3640084230

G1 c
280 286
Ia
287
Id II
Ib 211
288 9998 (Fig. 2.c.1)

c
Ic a
289
A681
A674
A675 A684 A612 2x

A653
A684
G2
A653 A611
A671 A628
A681
3x
A626 a
A610
2x A693
A697 2x A697
A653 2x
A620 b A613 A653 4x A653

2x
A614
A693 G2
A652
A691
G2 4x
A627 A631 A651

A633
A601
III A632
A696
A110
A696 (Fig. 2.c.1)
A693
A696 A693
A695 A694
A696
A693
2005 08 EN - 60 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.7. Adaptation [ 7 ] (continued)
G1 Solenoid 1
G2 Harness 1
(b) Description
The adaptation [ 7 ] comprises the solenoid assembly (280) and the sensor assembly
(A601).
Besides the solenoid assembly (280) and the sensor assembly (A601), the adaptation [ 7 ] also
comprises 5 pieces of lockwire (289).
One of these lockwires (289) is used to secure the connector (A671) (see further) to the
solenoid (G1) (see further).
The 4 other lockwires (289) are used to secure the 4 screws (Ia, Ib, Ic and Id) on the left side
of the body of the solenoid (G1) : the 2 lockwires securing the screws (Ia) and (Ic) are
removed/reinstalled when carrying out the timing adjustment (also refer to § 10.5) while the
lockwires securing the screws (Ib) and (Id) should never be touched.
Please note that the sensor assembly (A601) is also part of the adjustment assembly (9998)
which also comprises the sliding blocks assembly (A110) (also refer to § 2.2.2.1).
The solenoid assembly (280) consists of the solenoid (G1) which has been fixed to the left
side of the receiver (211) by means of the screw (286) and the nut (287).
The screw (286) is fitted, from the outside, into the hole (II) of the receiver (211) while the nut
(287) is secured to the outer extremity of the screw by means of the cotter pin (288).
When the solenoid (G1) is energized, its plunger is blocked (inside the receiver (211)) in its
outward position.
For more information about the operation of the solenoid (G1), refer to § 3.3.3 (b).
The timing of the machine gun can be adjusted by modifying the protrusion of the (blocked)
plunger of the energized solenoid (G1) (also refer to § 10.5).
2005 08 EN - 61 - Catalog n° 3640084230

G1 c
280 286
Ia
287
Id II
Ib 211
288 9998 (Fig. 2.c.1)

c
Ic a
289
A681
A674
A675 A684 A612 2x

A653
A684
G2
A653 A611
A671 A628
A681
3x
A626 a
A610
2x A693
A697 2x A697
A653 2x
A620 b A613 A653 4x A653

2x
A614
A693 G2
A652
A691
G2 4x
A627 A631 A651

A633
A601
III A632
A696
A110
A696 (Fig. 2.c.1)
A693
A696 A693
A695 A694
A696
A693
2005 08 EN - 62 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2.2.7. Adaptation [ 7 ] (continued)
The sensor assembly (A601) consists of the sensor support plate assembly (A610) which
has been fixed to the left side of the receiver (211) by means of 3 screws (A693) and
which has been protected by means of the protective cover (A691).
On their turn, the 3 screws (A693) securing the sensor support plate assembly (A610) to the
receiver (211) are secured to the sole plate (A626) (see further) by means of 3 pieces of
lockwire (A697).
The protective cover (A691) has been fixed to the sole plate (A626) by means of 2 x 2 screws
(A693) used in combination with 4 x 2 spring washers (A696).
The heads of the 2 lower front screws (A693) fixing the protective cover (A691) are secured
by means of the (short) locking pin (A695) which has been inserted from the rear side.
The heads of the 2 upper rear screws (A693) fixing the protective cover (A691) are secured
by means of the (long) locking pin (A694) which has been inserted from the front side.
Please note that the protective cover (A691) also protects the solenoid assembly (280).
The sensor support plate assembly (A610) is composed of the sole plate (A626) onto
which the following components have been installed :
- The resistor (A611) which has been secured to the sole plate (A626) by means of the 2
screws (A612) and the 2 nuts (A614) used in combination with the 2 washers (A613)
The harness (G2) (see further) has been connected to the resistor (A611).
- The sensor support (A627) which has been riveted to the sole plate (A626) by means of
the 3 rivets (A628)
- The harness (G2) consisting of cabling provided with the sensor (A620), the connectors
(A651) and (A671), a diode (not represented on Fig. 2.h) as well as the connectors for
the resistor (A611) (see above)
The sensor (A620), which is used to detect the passage of the moving parts of the M3P
machine gun, has been inserted, from the left side, into the corresponding hole in its support
(A627) where it is held in place by means of the locking pin (A631) and the nut (A632) used
in combination with the washer (A633).
In order to allow the passage for the sensor (A620), the locking pin (A631) is oriented so
that its notch (III) is facing downwards.
For the correct positioning of the sensor (A620), refer to § 10.6.2.

The connector (A651), allowing to connect the M3P machine gun to its weapon system, has
been fixed to the sole plate (A626) by means of the 4 screws (A652) and 4 nuts (A653).
The connector (A671) is connected to the connector of the solenoid (G1) where it is secured
by one of the lockwires (289) (see above).
The diode is secured to the sole plate (A626) by means of the nut (A674) and the lock
washer (A675).
The harness is finally also secured to the sole plate (A626) by means of the 3 screws (A681)
and the 2 screws (A684), each of them used in combination with a nut (A653).
2005 08 EN - 63 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 64 - Catalog n° 3640084230

CHAPTER 3 : OPERATING PRINCIPLES
3.1. EMPTY MACHINE GUN IN THE INITIAL CONDITION

The initial condition of the machine gun is obtained after having carried out the unloading
procedure (refer to the corresponding documentation of the weapon system) and/or after
having carried out the safety checks (refer to § 4.2).
The functional parts of the machine gun are in the neutral position.
3.2. LOADING AND COCKING THE MACHINE GUN

Proceed as described in the corresponding documentation of the weapon system.
When the machine gun is cocked, the bolt (411) is at its most forward position and the sear
(415) holds back the firing pin assembly (430) at its cocked position.
3.3. FIRING THE MACHINE GUN

When firing the machine gun, the recoil force of the cartridge case causes the moving parts to
be moved rearwards, compressing the return spring assembly (460).
In order to simplify the description of the several operations which take place simultaneously
when firing the machine gun, the following operations will be described separately :
• The operation of the moving parts (refer to § 3.3.1) :

- Unlocking the bolt (411) at the beginning of the rearward movement of the moving
parts
- The operation of the accelerator (535) during the rearward movement of the moving
parts
- Buffering the rearward movement of the moving parts
- The forward movement of the moving parts
- Locking the bolt (411) at the end of the forward movement of the moving parts
• The feeding operation (refer to § 3.3.2) :
- Feeding the ammunition belt into the machine gun
- Extraction of a cartridge from the ammunition belt and feeding the cartridge into the
chamber
- Extraction from the chamber and ejection of the cartridge case
• The firing operation (refer to § 3.3.3) :
- The cocking operation
- Firing
2005 08 EN - 65 - Catalog n° 3640084230

1 411 155
150
271
[1]
a
156
3 411
Fig. 3.a - Unlocking the bolt (411) at the beginning of the rearward movement of the moving parts
2005 08 EN - 66 - Catalog n° 3640084230

3.3. FIRING THE MACHINE GUN (continued)
3.3.1. The operation of the moving parts
The moving parts of the M3P machine gun are the barrel group [ 1 ], the bolt group [ 3 ] and the
barrel buffer group [ 4 ].
(a) Unlocking the bolt (411) at the beginning of the rearward movement of
the moving parts (Fig. 3.a)
Just before the firing operation, the bolt (411) is locked to the barrel extension assembly
(150) by means of the breech lock (155) (part ‘1’ of Fig. 3.a).
The breech lock (155) is held upwards by means of the breech lock cam (271) provided on the
bottom of the receiver (211).
At the instant of firing, the recoil force of the cartridge case causes the moving parts to be
moved rearwards (part ‘1’ of Fig. 3.a).
After the moving parts have moved approx. 20 mm rearwards, the breech lock pin (156),
which holds the breech lock (155) in position in the barrel extension body (A1), comes into
contact with the inclined face of the front extremities of the breech lock depressors (a)
(fixed to the inner side of the side plates of the receiver (211)) (part ‘2’ of Fig. 3.a).
As a result, the breech lock pin (156), and therefore also the breech lock (155), will be
pushed downwards resulting in the unlocking of the bolt (411).
When the bolt (411) is unlocked, the barrel group [ 1 ] is no longer linked to the bolt.
This causes the bolt (411) to continue its rearward movement while the movement of the
barrel group [ 1 ] is absorbed and halted by the buffer block subassembly (520) used in
combination with the buffer guide spring (521) and the internal buffer block spring (523)
(parts of the barrel buffer assembly (501)) (part ‘3’ of Fig. 3.a as well as Fig. 3.c).
2005 08 EN - 67 - Catalog n° 3640084230

411
b 535
536
[1] 150
A
A' > A
B B' >> B
Fig. 3.b - The operation of the accelerator (535) during the rearward movement of the moving parts
411 535 731
A1 520
521 523
Fig. 3.c - Buffering the rearward movement of the moving parts
2005 08 EN - 68 - Catalog n° 3640084230

3.3.1. The operation of the moving parts (continued)
(b) The operation of the accelerator (535) during the rearward movement of
the moving parts (Fig. 3.b)
During its rearward movement, the rear side of the barrel extension assembly (150) comes
into contact with the front side of the accelerator (535) which is secured by and pivots on
its pin (536).
The contact with the rear side of the barrel extension assembly (150) causes the
accelerator (535) to start rotating towards the rear side.
During a part of the rearward movement of the moving parts, the nose of the accelerator (535)
fits into the housing (b) in the bottom of the bolt (411) : the energy of the rotating accelerator
will therefore be transferred to the bolt.
As long as the barrel extension assembly (150) continues moving rearwards, the contact
point (c) between the rear side of the barrel extension assembly and the front side of the
accelerator (535) moves downwards resulting in a faster and faster rearward movement of
the nose of the accelerator.
This causes the rearward movement of the bolt (411) to be accelerated until the
accelerator (535) is turned so far that its nose is released from the housing (b) in the
bottom of the bolt : the latter will then continue its faster rearward movement until the
movement is absorbed and halted by the buffer plate (731) of the back plate group [ 6 ].
After its nose has been released from the housing (b) in the bottom of the bolt (411), the
accelerator (535) continues rotating until its claws lock the rear nose of the rear shank of the
barrel extension body (A1) to the front nose of the buffer block subassembly (520) causing the
barrel extension assembly (150) to be locked to the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] (also refer to
Fig. 3.c).
(c) Buffering the rearward movement of the moving parts (Fig. 3.c)
The rearward movement of the barrel group [ 1 ] is absorbed and halted by the buffer
block subassembly (520) used in combination with the buffer guide spring (521) and the
internal buffer block spring (523).
The rearward movement of the bolt (411) is absorbed and halted by the buffer plate (731)
used in combination with the inner absorbing components of the back plate regulator
assembly (750).
The firing rate adjusting plug (761) (part of the back plate regulator assembly (750) and not
represented on Fig. 3.c) allows the adjustment of the firing rate of the machine gun (also refer to
§ 10.3).
2005 08 EN - 69 - Catalog n° 3640084230

411
460
150
731
523
535
521
Fig. 3.d - The forward movement of the moving parts
411
155
271 a
150
156
Fig. 3.e - Locking the bolt (411) at the end of the forward movement of the moving parts
2005 08 EN - 70 - Catalog n° 3640084230

3.3.1. The operation of the moving parts (continued)
(d) The forward movement of the moving parts (Fig. 3.d)
The impact of the bolt (411) on the buffer plate (731) is partly buffered by the inner
absorbing components of the back plate regulator assembly (750) while the remaining
energy produced by the shock is returned to the bolt, forcing it to return forwards.
This energy, combined with the energy of the compressed return spring assembly (460),
forces the bolt (411) to return forwards.
During the forward movement of the bolt (411), the rear edge of the housing (b) in its
bottom comes into contact with the nose of the accelerator (535) so that the latter is
pushed back forwards and therefore unlocks the rear nose of the rear shank of the barrel
extension body (A1) from the front nose of the buffer block subassembly (520).
Once the rear nose of the rear shank of the barrel extension body (A1) is unlocked from
the front nose of the buffer block subassembly (520), the barrel group [ 1 ] is forced to
return forwards by the compressed buffer guide spring (521) and internal buffer block
spring (523).
(e) Locking the bolt (411) at the end of the forward movement of the moving
parts (Fig. 3.e)
During the forward movement of the moving parts, the front bottom part of the breech
lock (155) comes into contact with the inclined rear face of the protruding part (a) on top
of the breech lock cam (271).
As a result, the breech lock (155) will be forced to engage the recess provided in the
bottom of the bolt (411).
When, approx. 15 mm before the end of the forward movement of the moving parts, the
breech lock (155) is fully engaged in the recess in the bottom of the bolt (411), the latter is
said to be ‘locked’ to the barrel extension assembly (150).
When the moving parts reach their most forward position, the next cartridge will be fired if
the solenoid (G1) is energized.
2005 08 EN - 71 - Catalog n° 3640084230

641 a 411
620
b
632
621
c
B1
During the rearward movement of the moving parts
620
641
629
621
251/1
During the forward movement of the moving parts
Fig. 3.f - Feeding the ammunition belt into a left-hand fed machine gun
2005 08 EN - 72 - Catalog n° 3640084230

3.3.2. The feeding operation
(a) Feeding the ammunition belt into the machine gun (Fig. 3.f)
During the rearward movement of the moving parts and in case a cartridge is present at the
‘ammunition extraction’ position on the feed table of the receiver (211), this cartridge will be
extracted from the ammunition belt as described in § 3.3.2 (b).
During the rearward movement of the moving parts, the rear end of the belt feed lever
(641) moves in the groove (a) on top of the bolt (411) : this causes the belt feed lever to
pivot on its mounting pin (b) so that its front end moves towards the left side.
As a result, the belt feed slide assembly (620), which is actuated by the front end of the
belt feed lever (641), is moved towards the left side so that the belt feed pawl (621) is
forced to engage the next cartridge (c).
The belt feed pawl (621) is first compressed, forced to pass over the next cartridge (c) and then
engaged, by the force of its inner and outer springs (631) and (632), against the left side of the
cartridge.
During this operation, the ammunition belt is held back by the belt holding pawls assembly (B1).
Please note that this operation corresponds to the standard case of a left-hand fed M3P
machine gun : if the gun is converted to right-hand feeding (also refer to § 12.1), the ‘rear
right --> front left’ groove on top of the bolt (411) will be used while, during the rearward
movement of the moving parts, the front end of the belt feed lever (641) forces the belt feed
slide assembly (620) to move towards the right side.
During the forward movement of the moving parts, the front end of the belt feed lever
(641) forces the belt feed slide assembly (620) to move back towards the right (left-hand
feed) / left (right-hand feed) side.
As a result, the belt feed pawl (621) pushes the next cartridge (c), and therefore also the
whole ammunition belt, laterally until the cartridge is correctly positioned at the
‘ammunition extraction’ position on the feed table of the receiver (211).
This ‘ammunition extraction’ position is obtained by full contact between the cartridge and the
notch in the cartridge stop of the adapter (251/1).
The belt feed pawl arm (629) prevents double ammunition feeding.
2005 08 EN - 73 - Catalog n° 3640084230

610
480
411
610 a
b 411
231 c
d 485
e c
480
110
110/1
Fig. 3.g - Extraction of a cartridge from the ammunition belt and feeding the cartridge into the chamber
2005 08 EN - 74 - Catalog n° 3640084230

3.3.2. The feeding operation (continued)
(b) Extraction of a cartridge from the ammunition belt and feeding the
cartridge into the chamber (Fig. 3.g)
When the bolt (411) is at its most forward position, the extractor plate spring (646) forces
the front end of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) to engage the rim of the cartridge
presently positioned at the ‘ammunition extraction’ position on the feed table of the
receiver (211) (part ‘1’ of Fig. 3.g).
The extractor plate spring (646) is mounted inside the feed cover (610) while the extractor/
ejector assembly (480) has been provided on the left side of the bolt (411).
For more information about the ‘ammunition extraction’ position on the feed table of the receiver
(211), refer to § 3.3.2 (a).
At the beginning of the rearward movement of the moving parts, the extractor/ejector
assembly (480) extracts the cartridge from the link (part ‘2’ of Fig. 3.g).
During the rearward movement of the moving parts, the front end of the extractor/ejector
assembly (480) is progressively forced down by the extractor guide cam (a) (part of the
feed cover (610)) so that the rim of the extracted cartridge is fitted into the T-slot (b) for the
cartridges on the front face of the bolt (411) (part ‘3’ of Fig. 3.g).
When the moving parts start their forward movement, the guide lug (c) on the left side of
the front end of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) is in contact with the lower rear
inclined face of the extractor switch (231) : the front end of the extractor/ejector assembly
is pushed fully downwards so that the cartridge is aligned with the axis of the barrel (110)/
(110/1) and the cartridge case (d) of the previously fired cartridge is ejected (part ‘4’ of
Fig. 3.g).
During the forward movement of the moving parts, the cartridge is progressively inserted
into the chamber (part ‘5’ of Fig. 3.g).
When, during this forward movement of the moving parts, the guide lug (c) on the front
end of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) comes into contact with the inclined face of
the front extractor cam (e) provided inside the receiver (211), the front end of the
extractor/ejector assembly is forced to move back upwards (part ‘5’ of Fig. 3.g).
(c) Extraction from the chamber and ejection of the cartridge case
As it is fitted with its rim into the T-slot for the cartridges on the front face of the bolt (411),
the cartridge case of the fired cartridge is extracted from the chamber during the rearward
movement of the moving parts.
During the forward movement of the moving parts, the cartridge case will then be pushed
downwards along the T-slot and ejected when the next cartridge is aligned with the axis of
the barrel (110)/(110/1) (also refer to part ‘4’ of Fig. 3.g).
The last cartridge case (when there is no next cartridge in the T-slot) will be ejected by the
ejector (485) of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) when the latter is pushed fully
downwards by its contact with the lower rear inclined face of the extractor switch (231).
2005 08 EN - 75 - Catalog n° 3640084230

a
421
415
430
Fig. 3.h - The cocking operation
430 431
b
G1
415
Fig. 3.i - Firing
2005 08 EN - 76 - Catalog n° 3640084230

3.3.3. The firing operation
(a) The cocking operation (Fig. 3.h)
During the rearward movement of the moving parts, the firing pin assembly (430) is
pushed, against the force of the firing pin spring (448), rearwards by the lower end of the
cocking lever (421) until it is engaged by the sear (415).
The position of the cocking lever (421) is determined by the engagement of its tip into the recess
(a) provided in the mounting bracket which has been fixed to the top plate of the receiver (211).
(b) Firing (Fig. 3.i)
With the moving parts at their most forward position, the bolt (411) correctly ‘locked’ (also
refer to § 3.3.1 (e)), a cartridge correctly fed into the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1)
and the firing pin assembly (430) cocked, the M3P machine gun fires the first cartridge
when its solenoid (G1) is energized.
When the solenoid (G1) is energized, its plunger (b) moves towards its outward (right) position
where it is blocked.
During its outward movement, the plunger (b) of the solenoid (G1) pushes the sear slide (431)
rightwards, resulting in a downward movement of the sear (415), against the force of its spring
(416). As a result, the firing pin assembly (430) is released and propelled forwards by the force
of the firing pin spring (448) : percussion takes place and the cartridge is fired.
As long as the solenoid (G1) is energized and ammunition is available (also refer to
§ 3.3.2), the machine gun will continue firing a burst : a cartridge will be fired each time
the moving parts reach their most forward position (also refer to § 3.3.1).
As long as the solenoid (G1) is energized, its plunger (b) is blocked at its outward (right)
position.
When, at the end of the forward movement of the moving parts, the sear slide (431) comes into
contact with the blocked plunger, the slide will be forced to move rightwards so that the sear
(415) is pushed downwards and the firing pin assembly (430) is released.
When the solenoid (G1) is de-energized, its plunger (b) is no longer blocked at its outward
position : the sear slide (431) will no longer be pushed rightwards at the end of the
forward movement of the moving parts so that the firing cycle will be interrupted.
2005 08 EN - 77 - Catalog n° 3640084230

601 601
411 a
411
a
Fig. 4.a - Checking if the machine gun is empty
2005 08 EN - 78 - Catalog n° 3640084230

4.1. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The following instructions should be read before loading and firing the weapon and before any
intervention (disassembly, maintenance, ...) on it :
x The M3P machine gun can cause injury or death up to 6500 metres.
x Always handle the M3P machine gun, like any other weapon, with extreme care and
with the respect due to a loaded gun, even though you are certain the gun is unloaded.
x Never modify parts of the gun. Repairs and disassembly exceeding the basic field
stripping may only be carried out by qualified armourers or by FN HERSTAL.
x If the weapon has been heavily oiled or greased for shipment or storage, clean it
thoroughly and lightly lubricate the metal parts before firing.
x The barrel (110)/(110/1) should be perfectly dry before firing.
x Never try to clear a barrel obstruction by firing.
x Before manipulating the machine gun, always ensure that it is empty.
4.2. SAFETY CHECKS
As the M3P machine gun is imperatively empty when it is removed from the weapon system (refer
to the appropriate documentation), the following checking procedure should be carried out in
order to ensure that (for testing, by inadvertence or for any other reason ...) no ammunition has
been loaded and left in the machine gun since its removal from the weapon system.
Carry out the following procedure in order to ensure that the M3P machine gun can be
manipulated, stored and/or transported without any risk :
• Open the feed cover assembly (601) by turning the feed cover latch shaft (653) and then
ensure that the bolt (411) is at its most forward position and that the feed table (a) of the
receiver (211) is free from any piece of ammunition belt (Fig. 4.a).
Take into account that, if the machine gun has fired recently , the barrel (110)/(110/1) can be very
hot.
In case of the presence of a piece of ammunition belt on the feed table (a), simply remove it.
If the bolt (411) is not at its most forward position and/or in case of a piece of ammunition belt
which cannot easily be removed, refer to the troubleshooting procedures given in chapter 11.
• Looking through the opening (b), ensure that the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1) and
the front face of the bolt (411) are free from ammunition (Fig. 4.a).
If not, refer to the troubleshooting procedures given in chapter 11.
• Close the feed cover assembly (601) and ensure that it locks correctly into position.
2005 08 EN - 79 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 80 - Catalog n° 3640084230

CHAPTER 5 : RECEPTION OF THE GUN
Before any intervention on the M3P machine gun, ensure to be familiar with the safety
information given in chapter 4 of this Maintenance Manual.
• Take the packing case and inspect it for damage.
If the packing case shows traces of deterioration, take note of them (detailed description or photo)
and report it to FN Herstal.
• Open the packing case and check its contents according to the packing list.
If there is a problem, report it to FN Herstal.
• Carry out the field stripping procedure (refer to chapter 7).
If something seems abnormal, report it to FN Herstal.
• Clean the bore of the barrel (110)/(110/1) to remove the existing preservation lubricant.
Remove the preservation lubricant from the bolt group [ 3 ].
For more detailed cleaning instructions, refer to chapter 8.
• Lubricate the M3P machine gun according to chapter 8.
• Check and, if necessary, adjust the headspace and the timing according to § 10.4 and
§ 10.5.
• Reassemble the machine gun.
• If necessary, mount the machine gun onto or into its weapon system as described in the
corresponding documentation.
2005 08 EN - 81 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 82 - Catalog n° 3640084230

CHAPTER 6 : USING THE MACHINE GUN
safety information given in chapter 4 of this Maintenance Manual.
For loading, cocking, firing and unloading the machine gun, proceed as described in the
corresponding documentation of the weapon system.
2005 08 EN - 83 - Catalog n° 3640084230

.
211
722 b
.
.
a
[6]
460
.
715
Fig. 7.a - Releasing and removing the back plate Fig. 7.b - Unhooking and removing the return
group [ 6 ] spring assembly (460)
211
c .
.
451
Fig. 7.c - Removal of the bolt stud (451)
211 480 .
.
411
421
.
415
410
Fig. 7.d - Removal of the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector
assembly (480)
2005 08 EN - 84 - Catalog n° 3640084230

CHAPTER 7 : FIELD STRIPPING

machine gun, NEVER use a hammer, unless explicitly mentioned in the procedure.
The texts and illustrations of this chapter apply to the (standard) left-hand fed M3P
machine gun. In case of a right-hand fed machine gun, the procedure is completely
similar.
7.1. DISASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN

It is assumed that the machine gun is empty.
It is very important to become familiar with the field stripping procedure of the M3P machine gun
as field stripping is required during the cleaning procedure which ensures reliable operation of the
machine gun (also refer to chapter 8).
• If not already done, carry out the safety checks (refer to § 4.2).
Please note that, after having carried out the safety checks for a M3P machine gun which has
been removed from the weapon system, the moving parts are always at their most forward
position. As a result, the return spring assembly (460) is not subjected to pressure so that it can be
removed (see further) without any risk.
• While pushing the back plate latch lock (722) inwards and holding it in that position, raise
the back plate latch (715) in order to unlock the back plate group [ 6 ] and then lift the
group up and off the receiver (211) (Fig. 7.a).
• Release the lug (a) of the return spring assembly (460) from its housing (b) in the inner side
of the right side plate of the receiver (211) and then take the return spring assembly out of
the rear side of the bolt (411) and the receiver (Fig. 7.b).
• At the right side of the machine gun and using the bolt stud (451), move the moving parts
rearwards until the bolt stud is aligned with the dismounting hole (c) in the slot in the right
side plate of the receiver (211) (Fig. 7.c).
• Through the dismounting hole (c), pull the bolt stud (451) out of the right side of the bolt
(411) (Fig. 7.c).
• Pull the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector assembly
(480) out of the rear part of the receiver (211) (left part of Fig. 7.d).
• Move the upper end of the cocking lever (421) towards its rear position (refer to the arrows
on the right parts of Fig. 7.d).
If the upper end of the cocking lever (421) is not moved towards its rear position, there is a risk of
trapping the fingers by its rearward movement when carrying out the next step.
• Using the tip of a screwdriver or a similar tool, push down on the sear (415) in order to
release the firing pin (439) (so that it protrudes from its hole (d) in the front face of the bolt
(411)) (Fig. 7.d).
2005 08 EN - 85 - Catalog n° 3640084230

211
535
537
e
.
[1]
110
110/1
[4]
[4]
f
530 A1
[1]
g
510
535
.
520
Fig. 7.e - Removing and separating the assembly formed by the barrel group [ 1 ] and the barrel buffer
group [ 4 ]
2005 08 EN - 86 - Catalog n° 3640084230

7.1. DISASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN (continued)
• If necessary, disassemble the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/
ejector assembly (480) as described in § 9.3.
If it is not necessary to intervene on the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the
extractor/ejector assembly (480), place it on its right side in order to avoid that the extractor/
ejector assembly falls out.
NOTE : When carrying out the following procedure, be extremely careful not to burn the
hands if the machine gun has fired recently : if necessary, use anti-heat gloves !
• Using a pointed tool such as a drift punch through the hole (e) in the right rear side of the
receiver (211), push the buffer body lock (537) inwards so that it no longer holds back the
assembly formed by the barrel group [ 1 ] and the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] and then
simultaneously pull the assembly out of the receiver (upper left part of Fig. 7.e).
• While turning the accelerator (535) completely forwards and slightly lowering the barrel
buffer group [ 4 ], release the latter from the barrel group [ 1 ] (Fig. 7.e).
When turning the accelerator (535) completely forwards, its claws will release the rear shank (f) of
the barrel extension body (A1).
When, at the same time, the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] is slightly lowered, the front nose (g) of the
buffer block subassembly (520) is released from the rear nose of the rear shank (f) of the barrel
extension body (A1).
During this step, hold the barrel buffer body assembly (530) slightly inclined (front side
downwards) so that the buffer block assembly (510) does not fall out of it.
• If not already done, slide the buffer block assembly (510) rearwards out of the barrel buffer
body assembly (530) (Fig. 7.e).
• If necessary, separate the barrel group [ 1 ] into the barrel (110)/(110/1) and the barrel
extension assembly (150) as described in § 9.1.1.
If the barrel (110)/(110/1) has been turned, even slightly, the headspace should be
checked and, if necessary, gauged as described in § 10.4.
This level of disassembly is sufficient to perform thorough cleaning and lubrication :

further disassembly should only be carried out by an authorized armourer or by
FN HERSTAL.
2005 08 EN - 87 - Catalog n° 3640084230

c A1
530 110
110/1
150
b D1
510
535
520 a
.
537
535
.
211
[1]
[4] [4]
Fig. 7.f - Reassembling and reinserting the assembly formed by the barrel group [ 1 ] and the barrel
buffer group [ 4 ]
211
421
.
410
Fig. 7.g - Pushing the cocking lever (421) Fig. 7.h - Reinserting the assembly formed by the
completely forwards bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector
assembly (480) into the receiver (211)
2005 08 EN - 88 - Catalog n° 3640084230

7.2. REASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN
• Ensure that all the components of the machine gun are perfectly clean.
• If it has been separated, reassemble the barrel group [ 1 ] (also refer to § 9.1.1).
• From the rear side, insert the buffer block assembly (510) into the barrel buffer body
assembly (530) (upper part of Fig. 7.f).
The guide lug (a) of the buffer guide (522) should be positioned at the right side so that it
correctly engages the inside groove of the barrel buffer body (D1).
On the other hand, the front nose (b) of the buffer block subassembly (520) should be facing
upwards : if necessary, correctly orient the buffer block rod by turning it manually .
Ensure that the holes (not visible on Fig. 7.f) of the buffer block subassembly (520) are facing
downwards.
• While holding the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] inclined downwards at an angle of approx. 30°
and while moving the accelerator (535) towards its horizontal position, reassemble the
barrel buffer group and the barrel group [ 1 ] (upper part of Fig. 7.f).
Ensure that the narrower end of the rear shank (c) of the barrel extension body (A1) fits correctly
between the 2 claws of the accelerator (535).
Ensure that the front nose (b) of the buffer block subassembly (520) engages correctly the rear
nose of the rear shank (c) of the barrel extension body (A1).
• Push the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] firmly onto the barrel extension assembly (150) until the
accelerator (535) is rotated so that its 2 claws have locked themselves onto the rear shank
(c) of the barrel extension body (A1) (lower left part of Fig. 7.f).
This causes the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] to be locked to the barrel extension assembly (150).
• Reinsert the assembly formed by the barrel group [ 1 ] and the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] into
the rear side of the receiver (211) (lower right part of Fig. 7.f).
During this operation, the buffer body lock (537) will lock itself behind the rear end of the receiver
(211), holding back the assembly formed by the barrel group [ 1 ] and the barrel buffer group
[ 4 ] inside the receiver.
• If it has been disassembled, reassemble the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410)
and the extractor/ejector assembly (480) as described in § 9.3.
• Push the cocking lever (421) completely forwards (Fig. 7.g).
NOTE : When reinstalling the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/
ejector assembly (480) into the receiver (211), it is absolutely necessary that the
cocking lever (421) is at its front position.
If, inadvertently, the weapon is reassembled with the cocking lever (421) at its rear
position, the bolt assembly (410) will jam inside the receiver (211).
In such a case, and using a tool such as a screwdriver inserted from the rear side of the
receiver (211), first push down on the sear (415) in order to release the cocking lever
(421) and therefore also the bolt assembly (410). After that, take the bolt assembly out
of the receiver and then reinsert it into position with the cocking lever correctly at its
front position.
• While holding the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector
assembly (480) slightly inclined (front side upwards), reinsert the assembly into the rear side
of the receiver (211) (Fig. 7.h).
Ensure that the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector assembly
(480) fits correctly into the guides of the barrel extension body (A1) and push the assembly at
least so far forwards that its rear end has completely entered the receiver (211).
2005 08 EN - 89 - Catalog n° 3640084230

d
d
411
. 451
451
Fig. 7.i - Reinstallation of the bolt stud (451)
.
f 722
.
.
e [6]
460
.
715
Fig. 7.j - Reinstallation of the return spring Fig. 7.k - Reinstallation of the back plate group
assembly (460) [6]
2005 08 EN - 90 - Catalog n° 3640084230

7.2. REASSEMBLING THE MACHINE GUN (continued)
• Fit the bolt stud (451), from the right side, into its hole in the bolt (411) (left part of Fig. 7.i).
• Using the bolt stud (451), move the moving parts until the wider ring of the stud is aligned
with the dismounting hole (d) in the slot in the right side plate of the receiver (211) (right
part of Fig. 7.i).
• Push the bolt stud (451) through the dismounting hole (d) as far as possible into its hole in
the bolt (411) (right part of Fig. 7.i).
• From the rear side of the receiver (211), and with its rear lug (e) pointing towards the right
side, reinsert the return spring assembly (460) into its housing in the right side of the bolt
(411) (Fig. 7.j).
Please note that the bolt (411) (and therefore also its housing for the return spring assembly
(460)) are located inside the receiver (211) so that they are not visible on Fig. 7.j.
In order to facilitate this operation, which may require some force, turn the return spring assembly
(460) while reinserting it into position.
• While compressing the return spring assembly (460), secure it into position by engaging its
lug (e) into its housing (f) in the inner side of the right side plate of the receiver (211)
(Fig. 7.j).
• Reinstall the back plate group [ 6 ] by fitting it, from above, into its grooves at the rear side
of the receiver (211) (Fig. 7.k).
Just before the back plate group [ 6 ] reaches its final lowered position, push the back plate latch
lock (722) inwards and hold it in that position until the back plate group has correctly been locked
into position by the back plate latch (715).
2005 08 EN - 91 - Catalog n° 3640084230

In order to ensure that the M3P machine gun is always in good condition, the
maintenance and replacement periodicities given in the logbook should be followed
strictly.
When replacing components of a PRP (or RRP) kit, the corresponding disassembled
(sub)group should be cleaned and lubricated as explained further in this chapter.
Before cleaning the M3P machine gun, ALWAYS ensure that it is unloaded.
The frequency at which the M3P machine gun should be cleaned and lubricated depends on
the ammunition used, the weather and shooting conditions and other external factors.
When using normal ammunition under normal conditions, it is a good rule to clean and
lubricate the machine gun after every use or, in case of intensive shooting, after each
1250 rounds : correct maintenance will enhance the longevity of the gun.
Under normal conditions, it is recommended to lubricate all the friction surfaces.
It is especially recommended to ensure that the mechanism inside of the feed cover (610), the
bolt assembly (410), the extractor/ejector assembly (480), the barrel extension assembly (150),
the barrel buffer group [ 4 ], the return spring assembly (460), the plunger of the solenoid (G1),
the extractor switch (231), the breech lock cam (271), the inner guides of the receiver (211) and
the back plate group [ 6 ] are correctly lubricated.
NEVER use grease or oil on any part in contact with ammunition !
Under extreme climatic and combat conditions, it may be necessary to clean and lubricate more
frequently.
Please note that, as long as it is applied to the correct surfaces or parts (not to the bore and the
chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1)), too much lubrication is never detrimental to the good
operation of the machine gun.
When it is not used, the machine gun should be stored in a clean and dry location.
In such a case, and in order to ensure that the gun is always ready-to-use, it should be inspected,
cleaned and lubricated regularly (interval depending on the storage conditions).
2005 08 EN - 92 - Catalog n° 3640084230

8.1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
For intervening on the M3P machine gun, it is recommended to use the following
products :
• Cleaning :
R-TROOP (or another equivalent solvent)
MIL-PRF-680, Type I (dry cleaning solvent)
• Lubrication :
For temperatures ≥ -17°C :
MIL-L-46000 (NATO O-158) (or another equivalent lubricant)
For temperatures < -17°C :
MIL-PRF-14107 (NATO O-157) (or another equivalent lubricant)
• Preservation :
MIL-PRF-63460 (NATO S-758) (or another equivalent lubricant)
• Locking :
Loctite 243 (or another equivalent locking compound)
Never use hydrocarbons, trichlorethylene, ammonia nor teflon-based lubricants :

they could cause damage to the gun !
2005 08 EN - 93 - Catalog n° 3640084230

110 NO
641 110/1 LUBRICATION
a 155
b b b k k
635 m
a
c b 150
b l l
615 n
a 643 m
a 156 n
b
e
610 NO LUBRICATION 411
480 421
d d
e f
d
g
485 d j
i j
535 o h 415
538
o 431
p i
o 430
536
NO LUBRICATION s 510
q
s NO LUBRICATION
u q
u 231 460
q
211
v
v
NO LUBRICATION
[6]
r
t
t
t v
716
G1 271
Fig. 8.a - Points to be lubricated before firing (if parts have been represented disassembled exceeding
normal field stripping, this is only for reasons of clarity)
2005 08 EN - 94 - Catalog n° 3640084230

8.2. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION BEFORE FIRING
The following procedure assumes that the M3P machine gun has correctly been cleaned and
lubricated the last time it has been used (also refer to § 8.3).
If the M3P machine gun is used for the first time upon purchase, it is asssumed that the procedure
described in chapter 5 has been carried out.
• Carry out the field stripping procedure as described in § 7.1.

• Using the cleaning tools 1010 and clean rags (pieces of flannel), remove the maintenance
lubricant from the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1) until the last rag is
clean (also refer to § 8.3 (a)).
• Dry the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1).
• Remove the maintenance lubricant from the mechanism inside of the feed cover (610), the
bolt assembly (410), the extractor/ejector assembly (480), the barrel extension assembly
(150), the barrel buffer group [ 4 ], the return spring assembly (460), the plunger of the
solenoid (G1), the extractor switch (231), the breech lock cam (271), the inner guides of
the receiver (211) and the back plate group [ 6 ].
NOTE : When lubricating as explained below, NEVER apply lubricant to the front face of the
bolt (411), to the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1), to the lower rear end of the
buffer block assembly (510) and to the ammunition feeding and ejection section
(‘NO LUBRICATION’ on Fig. 8.a).
• Slightly lubricate by applying 1 or 2 drops of functional lubricant to (Fig. 8.a) :
- the mechanism inside of the feed cover (610) and especially the belt feed slide (635) and
its housing (arrows ‘a’), the belt feed lever (641) (front and rear extremities and pivoting
hole) and its plunger (643) (arrows ‘b’) as well as the extractor guide cam (arrow ‘c’).
- the pivoting point and the ejector (485) of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) (arrows
‘d’), the presently used groove on top of the bolt (411) (arrows ‘e’), the cocking lever
(421) (arrow ‘f’), the sear (415) (arrow ‘g’), the sear slide (431) (arrow ‘h’) and the firing
pin assembly (430) (reachable from underneath the bolt (arrows ‘i’)).
- the sliding bottom surface of the bolt (411) (arrows ‘j’) and the corresponding sliding
guides of the barrel extension assembly (150) (arrows ‘k’).
- the sliding bottom surface of the barrel extension assembly (150) (arrows ‘l’).
- the breech lock (155) and its pin (156) (located in the barrel extension assembly (150))
(arrows ‘m’) and the corresponding guides for the breech lock cam (271) (arrows ‘n’).
- the accelerator (535) and its pin (536) (arrows ‘o’) as well as the buffer guide spring
(521) (arrow ‘p’).
- the return spring assembly (460) (arrows ‘q’).
- the plunger of the solenoid (G1) (located inside the receiver (211) at the left side and
reachable through the feed cover opening) (arrow ‘r’).
- the extractor switch (231) (arrows ‘s’), the breech lock cam (271) (arrows ‘t’) as well as
all the inner guides of the receiver (211) (arrows ‘u’).
- the sliding grooves and the pin (716) of the back plate group [ 6 ] (arrows ‘v’).
• Reassemble the machine gun as described in § 7.2.
Before each shooting sequence, ALWAYS check the barrel (110)/(110/1) for
obstructions and ensure that it is dry and clean.
2005 08 EN - 95 - Catalog n° 3640084230

1020
1050
1031
1040
1050 1040
110
110 110/1
110/1
Cleaning the bore of the Cleaning the chamber of the

barrel (110)/(110/1) barrel (110)/(110/1)
Fig. 8.b - Using the cleaning tools 1020, 1031, 1040 and 1050 for a first cleaning of the
barrel (110)/(110/1)
1020
1031
1010
1032
Fig. 8.c - The cleaning tools 1010 for the final cleaning of the
barrel (110)/(110/1)
2005 08 EN - 96 - Catalog n° 3640084230

8.3. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION AFTER FIRING
(a) Barrel group [ 1 ]
When handling the barrel group [ 1 ], never turn the barrel (110)/(110/1) !
If the barrel (110)/(110/1) has been turned, even slightly, the headspace should be
checked and, if necessary, adjusted as described in § 10.4.
• Using the cleaning tools 1020, 1031, 1040 and 1050 (and a spray), apply solvent
inside the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1) and let the product work a
few minutes (Fig. 8.b).
• Using the cleaning tools 1020, 1031, 1040 and 1050, remove as much as possible the
solvent and the residues from the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110)/
(110/1) (Fig. 8.b).
• Using the cleaning tools 1010 and clean rags (pieces of flannel), clean the bore and the
chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1) until the last rag is clean (Fig. 8.c).
• When the barrel (110)/(110/1) is clean, again use a piece of flannel, this time
moistened with maintenance lubricant, to protect the bore and the chamber of the barrel
until the next use.
Please note that the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1) should be wiped dry
before shooting (also refer to § 8.2).
• Clean the remaining part of the barrel group [ 1 ] with a soft, dry cloth.
Pay special attention to the breech lock (155) and its pin (156) (arrows ‘m’ on Fig. 8.a), the
corresponding guides for the breech lock cam (271) (arrows ‘n’), the sliding bottom surface of
the barrel extension assembly (150) (arrows ‘l’) and the sliding guides for the bolt (411) on the
barrel extension assembly (arrows ‘k’).
If necessary, use a soft solvent. In this case, ensure that the cleaned parts are perfectly dry
before reassembling the machine gun.
• In case of important soiling of the barrel extension assembly (150), proceed as

follows :
- Remove the breech lock (155) as described in § 9.1.3.
- Clean the barrel extension body (A1) as well as the disassembled components with a
brush and/or a soft cloth.
If necessary, use a soft solvent. In this case, ensure that the components are perfectly dry
before reassembling them.
- Reinstall the breech lock (155) as described in § 9.1.3.
• Protect the outside of the barrel group [ 1 ] by using a rag lightly moistened with
maintenance lubricant.
NOTE : When lubricating as explained below, NEVER apply lubricant to the chamber of the
barrel (110)/(110/1) (‘NO LUBRICATION’ on Fig. 8.a).
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the breech lock (155) and its pin (156)
(arrows ‘m’ on Fig. 8.a), the corresponding guides for the breech lock cam (271)
(arrows ‘n’), the sliding bottom surface of the barrel extension assembly (150) (arrows ‘l’)
and the sliding guides for the bolt (411) on the barrel extension assembly (arrows ‘k’).
2005 08 EN - 97 - Catalog n° 3640084230

411 a
1060
1071
1072
Fig. 8.d - Using the cleaning tools 1060 and 1071 to clean the hole (a) for the firing pin (439) in the bolt
(411)
2005 08 EN - 98 - Catalog n° 3640084230

8.3. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION AFTER FIRING (continued)
(b) Receiver group [ 2 ]
• Clean with a soft, dry cloth.
Pay special attention to the plunger of the solenoid (G1) (arrow ‘r’ on Fig. 8.a), the extractor
switch (231) (arrows ‘s’), the breech lock cam (271) (arrows ‘t’) as well as all the inner
guides of the receiver (211) (arrows ‘u’).
If necessary, use a soft solvent. In this case, ensure that the cleaned parts are perfectly dry
before reassembling the machine gun.
NOTE : When lubricating as explained below, NEVER apply lubricant to the ammunition
feeding and ejection section (‘NO LUBRICATION’ on Fig. 8.a).
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the plunger of the solenoid (G1) (arrow
‘r’ on Fig. 8.a), the extractor switch (231) (arrows ‘s’), the breech lock cam (271)
(arrows ‘t’) as well as all the inner guides of the receiver (211) (arrows ‘u’).
(c) Bolt group [ 3 ]

Pay special attention to the pivoting point and the ejector (485) of the extractor/ejector
assembly (480) (arrows ‘d’ on Fig. 8.a), the presently used groove on top of the bolt (411)
(arrows ‘e’), the cocking lever (421) (arrow ‘f’), the sear (415) (arrow ‘g’), the sear slide
(431) (arrow ‘h’), the firing pin assembly (430) (reachable from underneath the bolt (arrows
‘i’)), the sliding bottom surface of the bolt (arrows ‘j’) and the whole return spring assembly
(460) (arrows ‘q’).
• If necessary, use a screwdriver to remove any carbon and other residues from the
assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector assembly (480).
• In case of important soiling of the bolt assembly (410), proceed as follows :
- Completely disassemble the bolt assembly (410) by carrying out the corresponding
removal and disassembly procedures given in § 9.3.
- Using the cleaning tools 1060 and 1071 from the rear side, clean the hole (a) for
the firing pin (439) in the bolt (411) (Fig. 8.d).
- Clean the bolt (411) as well as the disassembled components with a brush and/or a
soft cloth.
- Reassemble the bolt assembly (410) by carrying out the corresponding reinstallation
and reassembly procedures given in § 9.3.
NOTE : When lubricating as explained below, NEVER apply lubricant to the front face of the
bolt (411) (‘NO LUBRICATION’ on Fig. 8.a).
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the pivoting point and the ejector (485)
of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) (arrows ‘d’ on Fig. 8.a), the presently used
groove on top of the bolt (411) (arrows ‘e’), the cocking lever (421) (arrow ‘f’), the
sear (415) (arrow ‘g’), the sear slide (431) (arrow ‘h’), the firing pin assembly (430)
(reachable from underneath the bolt (arrows ‘i’)) and the sliding bottom surface of the
bolt (arrows ‘j’).
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the return spring assembly (460)
(arrows ‘q’ on Fig. 8.a).
2005 08 EN - 99 - Catalog n° 3640084230

(d) Barrel buffer group [ 4 ]
Except the first step, the following procedure should only be carried out in the very rare case of
important soiling of the barrel buffer group [ 4 ]. Normally, a simple cleaning operation will be
sufficient.

Pay special attention to the accelerator (535) and its pin (536) (arrows ‘o’ on Fig. 8.a) as well
as the buffer guide spring (521) (arrow ‘p’).
• In case of exceptional soiling of the barrel buffer group [ 4 ], proceed as follows :

- Disassemble the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] by carrying out the different removal and
disassembly procedures given in § 9.4.
Unless it is absolutely necessary, it is not recommended to remove the buffer body lock
(537).
- Clean the disassembled components with a brush and/or a soft cloth.
- Reassemble the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] by carrying out the different reinstallation
and reassembly procedures given in § 9.4.
NOTE : When lubricating as explained below, NEVER apply lubricant to the lower rear end of
the buffer block assembly (510) (‘NO LUBRICATION’ on Fig. 8.a).
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the accelerator (535) and its pin (536)
(arrows ‘o’ on Fig. 8.a) as well as the buffer guide spring (521) (arrow ‘p’).
(e) Feed cover group [ 5 ]

Pay special attention to the mechanism inside of the feed cover (610) and especially the belt
feed slide (635) and its housing (arrows ‘a’ on Fig. 8.a), the belt feed lever (641) (front and
rear extremities and pivoting hole) and its plunger (643) (arrows ‘b’) as well as the extractor
guide cam (arrow ‘c’).
• In case of important soiling of the feed cover group [ 5 ], proceed as follows :

- Disassemble the feed cover group [ 5 ] by carrying out the different removal and
Unless it is absolutely necessary, it is not recommended to remove the feed cover latch
(651), its shaft (653) and their fixing components.
- Clean the feed cover (610) as well as the disassembled components with a brush
and/or a soft cloth.
- Reassemble the feed cover group [ 5 ] by carrying out the different reinstallation and
reassembly procedures given in § 9.5.
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the belt feed slide (635) and its housing
(arrows ‘a’ on Fig. 8.a), the belt feed lever (641) (front and rear extremities and
pivoting hole) and its plunger (643) (arrows ‘b’) as well as the extractor guide cam
(arrow ‘c’).
2005 08 EN - 100 - Catalog n° 3640084230

(f) Back plate group [ 6 ]
Except the first step, the following procedure should only be carried out in the very rare case of
important soiling of the back plate group [ 6 ]. Normally, a simple cleaning operation will be
sufficient.
Please note that, as long as the inside parts of the back plate group [ 6 ] are not too soiled,
outside soiling will not hinder its correct operation.

Pay special attention to the sliding grooves and the pin (716) of the back plate group [ 6 ]
(arrows ‘v’ on Fig. 6.a).
• In case of exceptional soiling of the back plate group [ 6 ], proceed as follows :

- Disassemble the back plate group [ 6 ] by carrying out the different removal and
Unless it is absolutely necessary, it is not recommended to remove the back plate latch
(715) and its lock (722).
- Clean the assembled back plate (710) as well as the disassembled components with
a brush and/or a soft cloth.
If necessary, use a soft solvent (except for the inner absorbing components of the back
plate regulator assembly (750)). In this case, ensure that the components are perfectly dry
- Reassemble the back plate group [ 6 ] by carrying out the different reinstallation and
reassembly procedures given in § 9.6.
• Apply 1 or 2 drops of maintenance lubricant to the sliding grooves and the pin (716) of
the back plate group [ 6 ] (arrows ‘v’ on Fig. 6.a).
(g) Adaptation [ 7 ]
The following procedure should only be carried out in the very rare case of important soiling of
the adaptation [ 7 ].
• Remove the protective cover (A691) as described in § 9.7.1.

• Remove the solenoid (G1) and the sensor support plate assembly (A610) as described
in § 9.7.2.
• In case of important soiling at the sensor (A620), remove the latter as described in
§ 9.7.3.
• Clean the disassembled components with a brush and/or a soft cloth.
If necessary, use a soft solvent for cleaning the protective cover (A691) but never use solvent
on the electrical parts.
• If the sensor has been removed, reinstall it as described in § 9.7.3 and then check and
adjust its position as described in § 10.6.2.
• Reinstall the solenoid (G1) and the sensor support plate assembly (A610) as described
in § 9.7.2.
• Reinstall the protective cover (A691) as described in § 9.7.1.
• Reassemble the machine gun as described in § 7.2.
2005 08 EN - 101 - Catalog n° 3640084230

110/1
M3P with GFH
110
M3P with standard
flash-hider
161
155
A1
150
154
a
156
Fig. 9.1.a - Barrel group [ 1 ]
If the barrel (110)/(110/1) has been screwed, even slightly, the headspace should be
Before any intervention on the barrel group [ 1 ], the bolt group [ 3 ], the breech lock cam (271) or
the solenoid (G1), be aware that the timing will have to be checked (§ 10.5), requiring electrical
power supplied by the ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) of the corresponding weapon system.
Also be aware that the ABA can only supply power if the weapon system is connected to its power
supply source (carrier, ...) or to the TBU (Test Box Unit).
2005 08 EN - 102 - Catalog n° 3640084230

machine gun, NEVER use a hammer, unless explicitly mentioned in the procedure.
9.1. BARREL GROUP [ 1 ] (Fig. 9.1.a)
9.1.1. Separating the barrel group [ 1 ] into the barrel (110)/(110/1) and the
barrel extension assembly (150) (and reassembly)
Requirements : • Requirements of § 10.4
• Remove the barrel group [ 1 ] as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• While firmly holding the barrel extension assembly (150), screw the barrel (110)/(110/1)
completely out of the barrel extension assembly (Fig. 9.1.b).
During this operation, be extremely careful not to deform the barrel locking spring blade (161) !
points :
- After having screwed the barrel (110)/(110/1) completely into the barrel extension
assembly (150), first loosen it by 13 clicks and then check the headspace as described in
§ 10.4.
- The lug on the front extremity of the barrel locking spring blade (161) should correctly
engage one of the locking grooves provided in the rear end of the barrel (110)/(110/1).
150 161 110/1

161 110
150
110
150
110/1
Fig. 9.1.b - Separating the barrel group [ 1 ] into the barrel (110)/(110/1) and the barrel extension
assembly (150)
2005 08 EN - 103 - Catalog n° 3640084230

161
.
A1
Fig. 9.1.c - Removal of the barrel locking spring blade (161)
b
A1
161
A1
.
b
a 161
Fig. 9.1.d - Reinstallation of the barrel locking spring blade (161)
156
156 A1
A1
.
155
UT 2014
Fig. 9.1.e - Removal of the breech lock (155)
2005 08 EN - 104 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.1. BARREL GROUP [ 1 ] (continued)
9.1.2. Removal and reinstallation of the barrel locking spring blade (161)
As the barrel locking spring blade (161) is held into position by staking, only remove it when it is
absolutely necessary !
Requirements : • Screwdriver or similar tool

• Drift punch
• Hammer
• Centre punch
• Separate the barrel group [ 1 ] into the barrel (110)/(110/1) and the barrel extension
assembly (150) as described in § 9.1.1.
NOTE : In order to facilitate the following disassembling (and reassembling) procedure, the
barrel extension assembly (150) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the barrel extension assembly (150) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag
to avoid scratches.
• Using a tool such as a screwdriver at the right side of the barrel extension assembly (150),
unbend the staking which holds the barrel locking spring blade (161) into position.
• Using a drift punch and a hammer, drive the barrel locking spring blade (161) forwards out
of its housing in the right side of the barrel extension body (A1) (Fig. 9.1.c).
points (Fig. 9.1.d) :
- The barrel locking spring blade (161) should be oriented so that its lug is facing inwards.
- After having inserted the barrel locking spring blade (161) completely into its housing (a)
in the right side of the barrel extension body (A1), secure it into position by staking.
Using a centre punch and a hammer, stake material from the edge of the housing (a) into the
not yet used notch (b) of the barrel locking spring blade (161).
The same notch (b) should never be used twice.
9.1.3. Removal and reinstallation of the breech lock (155)
Requirements : • UT 2014 (Drift dia 4 lg 150)
• Using the drift punch UT 2014, push the breech lock pin (156) out of the barrel extension
body (A1) (left part of Fig. 9.1.e).
• After having withdrawn the drift punch UT 2014, the breech lock (155) can be taken out of
its housing in the barrel extension body (A1) (right part of Fig. 9.1.e).
points :
- Reinstall the breech lock (155) with its upper inclined locking face at the front side.
- The breech lock pin (156) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
2005 08 EN - 105 - Catalog n° 3640084230

222
d
211
b a
B1
217
218
216
c
b
219
d 221
212
211 221
212
.
222
UT 1803
221
.
B1
217 218
219 216
219
221
212
Fig. 9.2.a - Removal of the left and right belt holding pawls (216) and (217) as well as the feed tray
(212)
2005 08 EN - 106 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2. RECEIVER GROUP [ 2 ]
9.2.1. Removal and reinstallation of the left and right belt holding pawls (216)
and (217) as well as the feed tray (212)
This procedure applies to the (standard) left-hand fed M3P machine gun. In case of a right-hand
fed machine gun, refer to § 12.1.
• Open the feed cover assembly (601) by turning the feed cover latch shaft (653).
• At the left side of the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the receiver (211) and
using the pliers UT 1803, pull the locking pin (222) out of the front end of the axis (221)
(left middle part of Fig. 9.2.a).
• While holding the belt holding pawls assembly (B1) as well as the feed tray (212) in position
with the fingers, withdraw the axis (221) by pulling it rearwards (right middle part of
Fig. 9.2.a).
Take into account that the belt holding pawls assembly (B1) is subjected to the force of the pawl
springs (219).
• Remove the belt holding pawls assembly (B1) (together with the 2 pawl springs (219)) as
well as the feed tray (212).
• Separate the belt holding pawls assembly (B1) into the left belt holding pawl (216), the right
belt holding pawl (217) and the belt holding pawls sleeve (218) (Fig. 9.2.a).
points :
- Slightly lubricate the 2 pawl springs (219) before reinstalling them into their holes.
- Ensure that the feed tray (212) is oriented correctly and that it is installed into the correct
mounting slots.
- Ensure that the locking pin (222) fits correctly into position.
9.2.2. Removal and reinstallation of the cover detent pawl (663) and its spring
(664)
The cover detent pawl (663) and its spring (664) can be removed after having removed the
feed cover assembly (601) (also refer to § 9.5.1 and Fig. 9.5.b).
If they have been removed, the cover detent pawl (663) and its spring (664) should be
reinstalled into their housing in the upper front part of the receiver (211) before reinstalling the
feed cover assembly (601).
When reinstalling the cover detent pawl (663), its notch should be facing outwards (also refer to
Fig. 9.5.b).
2005 08 EN - 107 - Catalog n° 3640084230

257
e
256
257
UT 1803
250
255 d
251/1 255
.
c
222 e 221
b
252
c
d
b
a
211
211
221
250 222
.
221
250
221
Fig. 9.2.b - Removal of the links chute assembly (250)
257
251/1
257
256
252
250
251/1
256 255
256
252 255
UT 1605
256
Fig. 9.2.c - Disassembling the links chute assembly (250)
2005 08 EN - 108 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2. RECEIVER GROUP [ 2 ] (continued)
9.2.3. Removal and reinstallation of the links chute assembly (250)
• At the right side of the ammunition feeding and ejection section of the receiver (211) and
using the pliers UT 1803, pull the locking pin (222) out of the front end of the axis (221)
(upper right part of Fig. 9.2.b).
• While holding the links chute assembly (250) in position with the fingers, withdraw the axis
(221) by pulling it rearwards (lower left part of Fig. 9.2.b).
• Remove the links chute assembly (250).
points :
- Ensure that the links chute assembly (250) is oriented correctly and that it is installed into
the correct mounting slots.
- Ensure that the locking pin (222) fits correctly into position.
9.2.4. Disassembling and reassembling the links chute assembly (250)
Requirements : • UT 1605 (Hexagonal bent spanner, 4 mm)

• UT 1814 (Cutting pliers 192-14 CPY)
• Remove the links chute assembly (250) as described in § 9.2.3.
• Take the links chute assembly (250) and, using the cutting pliers UT 1814, remove the 2
lockwires (257) which secure the 2 screws (256) (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.c).
• Using the hexagonal key UT 1605 and taking care not to lose the 2 washers (255), take
out the 2 screws (256) and then release and remove the links guide (252) from the adapter
(251/1) (Fig. 9.2.c).
points :
- Ensure that the adapter (251/1) and the links guide (252) are oriented as shown in
Fig. 9.2.c before fitting them back into each other.
- After having screwed the screws (256) firmly into position, secure them by using new
lockwire (257) and the joint-twist pliers UT 1816.
2 pieces of lockwire (257) should be installed as shown in the upper left part of Fig. 9.2.c and
so that tension is applied to them when the corresponding screw (256) tends to unscrew.
2005 08 EN - 109 - Catalog n° 3640084230

.
UT 1803
273
211 272
271
273 274
271
272
Fig. 9.2.d - Removal of the breech lock cam (271)
272
a
b
211
271
271
273 274
UT 2203
272
211
Fig. 9.2.e - Reinstallation of the breech lock cam (271)
2005 08 EN - 110 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.5. Removal of the breech lock cam (271)

• Remove the bolt group [ 3 ] and the assembly formed by the barrel group [ 1 ] and the
barrel buffer group [ 4 ] as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Underneath the receiver (211) and using the pliers UT 1803 and UT 1817, unbend the
cotter pin (274) and then pull the pin out of the nut (273) and the lower end of the screw
(272) (left part of Fig. 9.2.d).
• Manually unscrew the nut (273) from the screw (272) (Fig. 9.2.d).
• Take the screw (272) and the breech lock cam (271) out of the inside of the receiver (211)
(Fig. 9.2.d).
9.2.6. Reinstallation of the breech lock cam (271)

• UT 2203 (Feeler gauge)
• Fit the protruding bottom part (a) of the breech lock cam (271) into the elongated
transversal hole in the bottom plate of the receiver (211) and then, from the inside, insert
the screw (272) into the hole (b) of the breech lock cam (upper parts of Fig. 9.2.e).
• From underneath, screw and tighten the nut (273), with its grooves facing inwards, onto the
screw (272) (Fig. 9.2.e).
Ensure that, at the end of this operation, one of the grooves of the nut (273) is perfectly aligned
with the hole in the screw (272).
• Using the feeler gauge UT 2203 as shown in the lower left part of Fig. 9.2.e, check if the
clearance between the breech lock cam (271) and the bottom plate of the receiver (211)
lays between 0.10 and 0.30 mm.
If the 0.10 mm thickness does not pass, unscrew the nut (273) by 1/6 of a turn and then check
again.
If the 0.30 mm thickness passes, tighten the nut (273) by 1/6 of a turn and then check again.
If it is impossible to obtain a correct clearance, replace the nut (273).
• Using the pliers UT 1803 and UT 1817, insert the cotter pin (274) into the aligned groove
of the nut (273) and hole of the screw (272) and then lock it by bending its 2 extremities
(lower right part of Fig. 9.2.e).
• Reassemble the machine gun as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.2.
2005 08 EN - 111 - Catalog n° 3640084230

UT 1803 211
231
236
235
b
a 232
UT 1032 231
235
Fig. 9.2.f - Removal of the extractor switch (231) and its spring (232)
c 231 e
231
211
d
f
232
UT 1803
UT 1032
236
e
235
235
Fig. 9.2.g - Reinstallation of the extractor switch (231) and its spring (232)
2005 08 EN - 112 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.7. Removal of the extractor switch (231) and its spring (232)
Requirements : • UT 1032 (Combination wrench 13)

• UT 1803 (Half-round nose pliers)
• At the left side of the receiver (211) and using the pliers UT 1803, remove the safety spring
(236) from the nut (235) (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.f).
• Using the combination wrench UT 1032, unscrew the nut (235) from the extractor switch
(231) (lower left part of Fig. 9.2.f).
• Through the feed cover opening, take the extractor switch (231) and its spring (232) out of
the inner left side of the receiver (211) (right part of Fig. 9.2.f).
9.2.8. Reinstallation of the extractor switch (231) and its spring (232)

• Screwdriver or similar tool
• Fit the extractor switch spring (232) into position in the groove in the inner side of the left
side plate of the receiver (211) (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.g).
Ensure that the little curved extremity (a) of the extractor switch spring (232) fits correctly into its
hole (b) provided in the groove (also refer to the right part of Fig. 9.2.f).
• From the inside of the receiver (211), fit the extractor switch (231) back into position (upper
parts of Fig. 9.2.g).
While pushing down the free extremity (d) of the extractor switch spring (232) by using a tool such
as a screwdriver, locate the shoulder (c) of the extractor switch (231) onto the extremity (d) and
then fit the pin (e) of the extractor switch into its hole (f) in the receiver (211).
At the same time, fit the shoulder (c) of the extractor switch (231) into position in the groove.
• At the left outer side of the receiver (211), screw the nut (235), with its grooves facing
outwards, onto the pin (e) of the extractor switch (231) (lower left part of Fig. 9.2.g).
• Using the combination wrench UT 1032, fully tighten without effort the nut (235) onto the
pin (e) of the extractor switch (231) and then loosen it just as necessary to have one of its
grooves perfectly aligned with the hole in the pin of the extractor switch (lower left part of
Fig. 9.2.g).
Do not tighten too much : ensure that the extractor switch (231) can operate freely.
• Using the pliers UT 1803, fit the safety spring (236) into the aligned groove of the nut (235)
and hole in the pin (e) of the extractor switch (231) and then install the safety spring
correctly onto the nut (lower right part of Fig. 9.2.g).
• Reassemble the machine gun as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.2.
2005 08 EN - 113 - Catalog n° 3640084230

A113
UT 2015 A114
A113
A110
A111
A112
211 A111
Fig. 9.2.h - Removal and disassembly of the sliding blocks assembly (A110)
2005 08 EN - 114 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.9. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the sliding blocks

assembly (A110)
Requirements : • UT 2015 (Drift-pin, pin dia 2.9 mm)

• UT 2112 (Riveting hammer 300 g)
• Turn the machine gun upside down.
machine gun can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the machine gun into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2015 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out the roll pin (A113) at
the side opposite to the side of the spring pin (A114) (left part of Fig. 9.2.h).
• Withdraw the drift punch UT 2015 and then pull the corresponding sliding block (A111) off
the sliding blocks axis (A112) (Fig. 9.2.h).
• Take the assembly formed by the sliding blocks axis (A112), the spring pin (A114) and the
remaining sliding block (A111) out of the lower rear mounting lugs of the receiver (211).
• If necessary, and using the drift punch UT 2015 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out the
spring pin (A114) and then withdraw the drift punch (Fig. 9.2.h).
• If necessary, and using the drift punch UT 2015 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out the
other roll pin (A113), withdraw the drift punch and then separate the remaining sliding
block (A111) from the sliding blocks axis (A112) (Fig. 9.2.h).
points :
- The roll pins (A113) should not protrude after they have been reinstalled.
- The spring pin (A114) should protrude from one side after it has been reinstalled.
- When reinstalling the assembly formed by the sliding blocks axis (A112), the spring pin
(A114) and the first sliding block (A111) into the lower rear mounting lugs of the receiver
(211), the spring pin should fit into the outer notch of the hole of the corresponding lug.
2005 08 EN - 115 - Catalog n° 3640084230

257
257
B5
B2 368
368
367
367
Short standard flash-hider assembly Long standard flash-hider assembly
Fig. 9.2.i - Removal and disassembly of a standard flash-hider assembly (355)
2005 08 EN - 116 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.10. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of a standard

flash-hider assembly (355) (Fig. 9.2.i)
Requirements : • OREA 867 (Torque wrench for flash-hider M3P)

• UT 1908 (Screwdriver 8 x 150)
• Using the cutting pliers UT 1814, remove the lockwire (257) from the 2 screws (368) which
secure the securing lock (367) to the short/long standard flash-hider (B2)/(B5).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1908, take out the 2 screws (368) and then release and remove
the securing lock (367) from the short/long standard flash-hider (B2)/(B5).
If it is only necessary to remove the standard flash-hider assembly (355) without disassembling it,
the screws (368) should just be loosened.
• Using the torque wrench OREA 867, screw the short/long standard flash-hider (B2)/(B5)
out of the flash-hider sleeve (361).
points :
- Manually screw the short/long standard flash-hider (B2)/(B5) into the flash-hider sleeve
(361) and then, using the torque wrench OREA 867, tighten with a torque of 100 Nm.
- If it has been removed, ensure that the securing lock (367) is oriented as shown in
Fig. 9.2.i.
- After having screwed them into position with a torque of 11 Nm, secure the screws (368)
by using new lockwire (257) and the joint-twist pliers UT 1816.
The lockwire (257) should be installed as shown in the upper left part of Fig. 9.2.i and so that
tension is applied to it when the screws (368) tend to unscrew.
2005 08 EN - 117 - Catalog n° 3640084230

B4
365
257
B6
B4 368
365 257
B3 367
368
367
Short GFH assembly Long GFH assembly
Fig. 9.2.j - Removal and disassembly of a GFH assembly (355)
2005 08 EN - 118 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.11. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of a GFH (Guided
blast effect Flash-Hider) assembly (355) (Fig. 9.2.j)
Requirements : • OREA 867 (Torque wrench for flash-hider M3P)
• If necessary, UT 1703 (“C” spanner 50/80)
• If necessary, centre punch
• Using the cutting pliers UT 1814, remove the lockwire (257) from the 2 screws (368) which
secure the securing lock (367) to the short/long guided blast effect flash-hider body (B3)/
(B6).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1908, take out the 2 screws (368) and then release and remove
the securing lock (367) from the short/long guided blast effect flash-hider body (B3)/(B6).
If it is only necessary to remove the GFH assembly (355) without disassembling it, the screws
(368) should just be loosened.
• Using the torque wrench OREA 867, screw the short/long guided blast effect flash-hider
body (B3)/(B6) out of the flash-hider sleeve (361).
• If necessary, the remaining part of the GFH assembly (355) can be disassembled by
proceeding as follows :
- Using special clamps or a rag to avoid scratches, secure the remaining part of the GFH
assembly (355), by the flash-hider end, into a vice.
- Using the wrench UT 1703, unscrew the short/long guided blast effect flash-hider body
(B3)/(B6) from the flash-hider (B4) and then separate the securing ring (365) from the
front end of the flash-hider body.
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the securing ring (365) must always be replaced by a
new one !
points :
- If it has been disassembled and after having screwed the short/long guided blast effect
flash-hider body (B3)/(B6) firmly onto the flash-hider (B4), secure this assembly by staking
the (new) securing ring (365) with a centre punch.
Stake first into one of the notches provided in the flash-hider (B4) and then into one of the
notches provided in its body (B3)/(B6), taking care to use notches which are as far as possible
from each other.
- Manually screw the short/long guided blast effect flash-hider body (B3)/(B6) into the
flash-hider sleeve (361) and then, using the torque wrench OREA 867, tighten in order to
orient the grooves top and down without exceeding a torque of 100 Nm. If necessary,
rotate the flash-hider sleeve (also refer to § 9.2.12).
- If it has been removed, ensure that the securing lock (367) is oriented as shown in
Fig. 9.2.j.
- After having screwed them into position with a torque of 11 Nm, secure the screws (368)
by using new lockwire (257) and the joint-twist pliers UT 1816.
The lockwire (257) should be installed as shown in the upper left part of Fig. 9.2.j and so that
tension is applied to it when the screws (368) tend to unscrew.
2005 08 EN - 119 - Catalog n° 3640084230

362
362
UT 1908
362
361
363
UT 1803
361
313
362
362
363
UT 1908
Fig. 9.2.k - Removal of the flash-hider sleeve (361)
2005 08 EN - 120 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.12. Removal and reinstallation of the flash-hider sleeve (361)

• Requirements of § 9.2.10 / § 9.2.11
• Remove the flash-hider assembly (355) as described in § 9.2.10 or § 9.2.11.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1908 and the pliers UT 1803, disengage the securing ring (363)
from the heads of the 3 screws (362) and from the groove in the flash-hider sleeve (361)
(upper left part of Fig. 9.2.k).
• Using the screwdriver UT 1908, unscrew and remove the 3 screws (362) (Fig. 9.2.k).
• Slide the flash-hider sleeve (361) forwards off the front end of the barrel jacket assembly
(305) (Fig. 9.2.k).
points :
- Ensure that the 3 screws (362) engage correctly the front holes of the barrel jacket (313).
- Ensure that the 3 screws (362) are oriented so that the grooves in their heads are
correctly aligned with the groove in the flash-hider sleeve (361).
- Ensure that the securing ring (363) engages correctly the heads of the 3 screws (362) as
well as the groove in the flash-hider sleeve (361).
2005 08 EN - 121 - Catalog n° 3640084230

321
322/1 322/5 322/9
a 322/2 322/6 322/10 334
314
a 322/3 322/7 322/11 b
322/4 322/8 322/12
d
d
312 c
331
314
211
332
305
c
b
313
333
Fig. 9.2.l - The trunnion adapter (321) and the barrel jacket assembly (305)
331
331
321
UT 1803
333
333
211
Fig. 9.2.m - Unlocking the trunnion adapter (321) by disengaging its locking pin (331)
305
211
321
b OREAA 59
.
c OREAA 56
Fig. 9.2.n - Loosening the trunnion adapter (321) and removing it together with its shim (322)
2005 08 EN - 122 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.13. Removal of the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322)
Requirements : • OREAA 56 (Wrench for clamp, barrel broaching)
• OREAA 59 (Pliers for fixing on bed M3 and M2)
• Remove the flash-hider sleeve (361) as described in § 9.2.12.
• Underneath the machine gun, and in order to unlock the trunnion adapter (321),
disengage its locking pin (331) by proceeding as follows (Fig. 9.2.m) :
- Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the extremities of the split pin (333) and straighten
them.
- Pull the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) rearwards and then turn it so that it is held
back at its rear position by the contact between the straightened extremities of the split
pin (333) and the receiver (211) (right part of Fig. 9.2.m).
If the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) is blocked and cannot be pulled rearwards, push it
rearwards by using a drift pin through the lower hole in the trunnion adapter (321).
• Turn the machine gun back rightside up.
machine gun can be fixed into a vice (or onto the OREAA 59).
When fixing the machine gun into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid scratches.
• Loosen the trunnion adapter (321) by proceeding as follows (Fig. 9.2.n) :

- Take the tool OREAA 56 and, if not already done, pull its axis (a) out of its head (b).
- From underneath, fit the head (b) of the tool OREAA 56 between the 2 lower lugs of the
trunnion adapter (321), align the hole in the head of the tool with the holes in the lower
lugs and then fit the axis (a) of the tool into the aligned holes.
- Using the rod (c) of the tool OREAA 56, loosen the trunnion adapter (321) until it can be
unscrewed manually from the threaded cylindrical mounting support at the front side of
the receiver (211).
In order to loosen the trunnion adapter (321), turn it in the counterclockwise direction when
viewed from the front side.
- Separate the tool OREAA 56 from the trunnion adapter (321).

• Manually unscrew the trunnion adapter (321) completely from the threaded cylindrical
mounting support at the front side of the receiver (211).
• Carefully slide the trunnion adapter (321) off the barrel jacket assembly (305).
• If a trunnion adapter shim (322) has been provided, release and then remove it by also
sliding it off the barrel jacket assembly (305).
2005 08 EN - 123 - Catalog n° 3640084230

211
321
305
322
.
OREAA 56
OREAA 59
Fig. 9.2.o - Reinstallation of the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322)
2005 08 EN - 124 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.14. Reinstallation of the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322)
Before reinstalling the trunnion adapter (321), ensure that it is perfectly clean : pay special
attention to its inner thread as well as to its contact surface with the trunnion adapter shim (322).
Also ensure that the outer thread of the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver
(211) is perfectly clean.
• If a trunnion adapter shim (322) has been provided, fit it onto the barrel jacket assembly
(305) and then onto the threaded cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the
receiver (211) (upper left part of Fig. 9.2.o).
Ensure that the trunnion adapter shim (322) is oriented correctly : the chamfered side of its large
hole should be facing towards the receiver (211) while its small hole should correctly be aligned
with the hole with the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) in the front side of the receiver.
• Lightly lubricate the outer thread of the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the
receiver (211).
• Fit the trunnion adapter (321) onto the barrel jacket assembly (305) and then screw it onto
the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver (211) (upper left part of
Fig. 9.2.o).
• Using the tool OREAA 56 as described in § 9.2.13, tighten the trunnion adapter (321) firmly
against its shim (322) or the receiver (211) (middle part of Fig. 9.2.o).
Do not remove the tool OREAA 56 from the trunnion adapter (321) yet.
• Looking from the front side and taking into account that its small hole for its locking pin
(331) should be at the lower side, check if the trunnion adapter (321) is perfectly vertical or
not inclined by more than 15° in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side.
If so, directly proceed to the following step.
If not, a trunnion adapter shim (322) must be provided or the presently installed shim must
be replaced by another one by proceeding as follows :
- Completely unscrew and remove the trunnion adapter (321).
- Install an appropriate trunnion adapter shim (322).
Twelve different trunnion adapter shims (322/1 to 322/12 (recognizable by an engraved
number)) are available and, in increasing numerical order, the thickness of each shim increases
by 0.06 - 0.07 mm. This corresponds to a modification of the angular position of the tightened
trunnion adapter (321) by 15° - 17°.
- Screw the trunnion adapter (321) firmly back into position and check its orientation as
described above.
• Underneath the machine gun, release the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) by turning it.
As a result, the straightened extremities of the split pin (333) will lose contact with the receiver
(211) so that they no longer hold back the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) at its rear position :
the pin will therefore be pushed forwards by the force of its spring (332).
• If, with the trunnion adapter (321) already perfectly vertical (Fig. 9.2.o), its locking pin (331)
has correctly engaged the small lower hole in the adapter, remove the tool OREAA 56.
If not, use the tool OREAA 56 to slightly loosen (not more than 15°) the trunnion adapter
(321) towards its vertical position until the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) correctly
engages the small hole in the adapter and then remove the tool.
2005 08 EN - 125 - Catalog n° 3640084230

211
334
OREAA 57
313
305
211
305
Fig. 9.2.p - Removal of the barrel jacket assembly (305)
2005 08 EN - 126 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.15. Removal and reinstallation of the barrel jacket assembly (305)
Requirements : • OREAA 57 (Wrench for barrel tube M3P)

• Screwdriver
• If necessary, drill for drilling a hole for the screw (334)
• Centre punch
• Remove the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322) as described in § 9.2.13.
• Using a screwdriver, take out the barrel jacket locking screw (334) (upper left part of
Fig. 9.2.p).
Take into account that the head of the barrel jacket locking screw (334) has been staked : if
necessary, use a tool such as a screwdriver to unbend the staking.
• Using the tool OREAA 57, loosen the barrel jacket assembly (305) until it can be
unscrewed manually (upper right part of Fig. 9.2.p).
• Manually screw the barrel jacket assembly (305) out of the threaded cylindrical mounting
support at the front side of the receiver (211) (Fig. 9.2.p).
points :
- When reinstalling the barrel jacket assembly (305), first screw it fully and firmly home and
then, if necessary, unscrew it slightly (not more than one turn) in order to correctly align
the hole in the rear thread of the barrel jacket (313) with the hole for the barrel jacket
locking screw (334) in the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver
(211).
If a new barrel jacket (313) is mounted and after it has been firmly tightened, it will be
necessary to drill a hole in its rear thread using a drill through the hole for the barrel jacket
locking screw (334) in the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver (211).
- The barrel jacket locking screw (334) should be screwed completely home so that it will
not hinder the screwing back of the trunnion adapter (321) onto the cylindrical mounting
support at the front side of the receiver (211).
- After its reinstallation, secure the barrel jacket locking screw (334) by staking its head by
using a centre punch.
After this staking operation, ensure that neither the head of the barrel jacket locking screw
(334) nor the staking protrude in order to allow the trunnion adapter (321) to be screwed back
onto the cylindrical mounting support at the front side of the receiver (211).
9.2.16. Removal and reinstallation of the barrel jacket (313)

• Remove the recoil booster (312) as described in § 9.2.18.
• Remove the barrel jacket assembly (305) in § 9.2.15.
2005 08 EN - 127 - Catalog n° 3640084230

333
UT 1803
331
211
332
Fig. 9.2.q - Removal of the trunnion adapter locking pin (331)
2005 08 EN - 128 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.17. Removal and reinstallation of the trunnion adapter locking pin (331)

• Remove the trunnion adapter (321) and its shim (322) as described in § 9.2.13.
Please note that, in order to unlock the trunnion adapter (321), its locking pin (331) has been
pulled back at its rear position and held there by means of the split pin (333) (also refer to
§ 9.2.13).
• Release the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) by turning it.
The straightened extremities of the split pin (333) will lose contact with the receiver (211) so that
the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) will be pushed forwards by the force of its spring (332).
• Push the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) rearwards so that its spring (332) is
compressed and, as a result, the pressure on the split pin (333) is released.
• Using the pliers UT 1803, pull the split pin (333) out of the rear end of the trunnion
adapter locking pin (331) (Fig. 9.2.q).
• Gently release the pressure on the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) and then take it,
together with its spring (332) out of the front side of the receiver (211) (Fig. 9.2.q).
points :
- Lightly lubricate the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) and its spring (332) before
reinstalling them.
- After its reinstallation, and in order to allow the reinstallation of the trunnion adapter
(321), the trunnion adapter locking pin (331) should be pushed and held back at its rear
position. Therefore, do not bend the extremities of the split pin (333) yet : the split pin
with straight extremities will be used to hold back the trunnion adapter locking pin (also
refer to § 9.2.13 and § 9.2.14).
2005 08 EN - 129 - Catalog n° 3640084230

313 314
312 313
OREAA 55
UT 1908
Fig. 9.2.r - Removal of the recoil booster (312)
2005 08 EN - 130 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.2.18. Removal and reinstallation of the recoil booster (312)
Requirements : • OREAA 55 (Wrench for recoil booster)

• If necessary, drill for drilling holes for the screws (314)
• Remove the flash-hider sleeve (361) as described in § 9.2.12.
• Using the screwdriver UT 1908, take out the 2 screws (314) which secure the recoil booster
(312) to the front end of the barrel jacket (313) (left part of Fig. 9.2.r).
Take into account that the heads of the screws (314) have been staked : if necessary, use a tool
such as a screwdriver to unbend the staking.
• Using the tool OREAA 55, screw the recoil booster (312) completely out of the front end of
the barrel jacket (313) (right part of Fig. 9.2.r).
points :
- When reinstalling the recoil booster (312), first screw it fully and firmly home and then, if
necessary, unscrew it (not more than 180°) in order to correctly align the holes in the
front end of the barrel jacket (313) with the corresponding screw holes in the recoil
booster (312).
If a new recoil booster (312) is mounted and after it has been firmly tightened, it will be
necessary to drill holes in its rear thread using a drill through the holes for the screws (314) in
the front end of the barrel jacket (313).
- After their reinstallation, secure the screws (314) by staking their heads by using a centre
punch.
2005 08 EN - 131 - Catalog n° 3640084230

412 413
435
421
a 412 413
415
a
b
434
b
c
h d
416
480 451
i
491 g
j
i
g
c
486 411
483 432
482
e
C1
487 481
d 431
485
j e
433
460
439
f 448
449
440 447
410
430
f h
445
Fig. 9.3.a - Bolt group [ 3 ]
For the removal and the reinstallation of the bolt stud (451) and the return spring assembly
(460), proceed as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1 and § 7.2.
2005 08 EN - 132 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.3. BOLT GROUP [ 3 ] (Fig. 9.3.a)
9.3.1. Removal and reinstallation of the extractor/ejector assembly (480)
• Remove the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector assembly
(480) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Taking into account that the extractor pivot retaining spring (483) could be released,
remove the extractor/ejector assembly (480) by first raising it to the vertical position and
then taking it out of its housing in the left side of the bolt (411) (Fig. 9.3.b for a left-hand
fed machine gun).
Take into account that it is possible that the extractor pivot (482) is also released.
points :
- If desired, the extractor/ejector assembly (480) can be disassembled and reassembled as

described in § 9.3.8.
- If the extractor pivot (482) has been released, fit it, from the right side and by its narrower
part, into the hole at the rear end of the extractor (C1).
- If the extractor pivot retaining spring (483) has been released, fit it, from the right side,
into the extractor pivot (482) before reinserting the extractor/ejector assembly (480) into
its housing in the left side of the bolt (411).
- Ensure that the extractor/ejector assembly (480) is oriented as shown in Fig. 9.3.b.
- After its reinstallation, check if the extractor/ejector assembly (480) can move freely to the
horizontal position.
480
411
411
482
.
483
482
C1 480
Fig. 9.3.b - Removal of the extractor/ejector assembly (480) (left-hand fed machine gun)
2005 08 EN - 133 - Catalog n° 3640084230

412
UT 2014
.
413
411
411
413
Fig. 9.3.c - Removal of the bolt switches (412)
2005 08 EN - 134 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.3. BOLT GROUP [ 3 ] (continued)
9.3.2. Removal and reinstallation of the bolt switches (412)

• Remove the extractor/ejector assembly (480) as described in § 9.3.1.
• Using the drift punch UT 2014 from any side, drive the 2 spring pins (413) out of their
housings in the bolt (411) (left part of Fig. 9.3.c for the front spring pin (413) driven out
from the left side).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, a spring pin (413) must always be replaced by a new
one !
• After the last withdrawal of the drift punch UT 2014, the 2 bolt switches (412) can simply be
lifted up and out of the bolt (411) (Fig. 9.3.c).
If it is difficult to remove the bolt switches (412) manually, use a screwdriver.
points :
- The orientation of the bolt switches (412) is different for a left-hand or a right-hand fed
machine gun (also refer to § 2.2.3 and/or to § 12.1).
- The (new) spring pins (413) should not protrude after they have been reinstalled.
2005 08 EN - 135 - Catalog n° 3640084230

421
433
434
.
411
433
.
UT 2015
.
421
.
433
Fig. 9.3.d - Removal of the cocking lever (421) and its axis (433)
2005 08 EN - 136 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.3.3. Removal and reinstallation of the cocking lever (421) and its axis (433)

• If not already done, pull the cocking lever (421) completely rearwards and then, with the tip
of a screwdriver or a similar tool, push down on the sear (415) in order to release the firing
pin (439) (also refer to § 7.1).
• At the left side of the bolt (411), and using the drift punch UT 2015 and the hammer
UT 2112 from underneath, drive out the spring pin (434) which holds back the head of the
cocking lever axis (433) (upper left part of Fig. 9.3.d).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the spring pin (434) must always be replaced by a new
one !
• Using the drift punch UT 2015 from the right side, push on the cocking lever axis (433) and
then manually take the axis out of the left side of the bolt (411) (upper right and lower left
parts of Fig. 9.3.d).
• Lift the cocking lever (421) up and out of its housing in the bolt (411) (Fig. 9.3.d).
points :
- Ensure that the cocking lever (421) is oriented as shown in Fig. 9.3.d.
- After having reinstalled the cocking lever axis (433), ensure that its head correctly holds
back the sear slide stop pin (432).
- The (new) spring pin (434) should be inserted from above and must pass by the left side
of the head of the cocking lever axis (433) so that it secures the latter in position.
- The upper end of the spring pin (434) should be flush with the bottom of the
corresponding groove on top of the bolt (411).
- After having reinstalled the cocking lever (421), check if the bolt assembly (410) operates
correctly : first cock the firing pin (439) by pushing the cocking lever forwards, move the
upper end of the cocking lever back rearwards and then check if the firing pin is correctly
released when pushing down on the sear (415).
2005 08 EN - 137 - Catalog n° 3640084230

.
411
435
411 .
435
.
Fig. 9.3.e - Removal of the firing pin spring stop (435)
2005 08 EN - 138 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.3.4. Removal and reinstallation of the firing pin spring stop (435)

• Remove the cocking lever (421) as described in § 9.3.3.
• Using a tool such as a screwdriver from above, align the upper pivoting part of the firing
pin spring stop (435) with the longitudinal groove in the upper rear part of the bolt (411)
(left part of Fig. 9.3.e).
• Using the drift punch UT 2015 from underneath, push the firing pin spring stop (435) out of
the upper side of the bolt (411) (Fig. 9.3.e).
points :
- Ensure that the firing pin (439) is released (at its most forward position).
If not, release the firing pin (439) by pushing down on the sear (415).
- Ensure that the firing pin spring stop (435) is oriented as shown in Fig. 9.3.e.
- The firing pin spring stop (435) must be reinserted so that it passes through the groove in
the firing pin extension (447) and behind the rear coil of the firing pin spring (448) (also
refer to the arrows ‘h’ on Fig. 9.3.a).
correctly as described in § 9.3.3.
2005 08 EN - 139 - Catalog n° 3640084230

411
.
. a 415
432 416
431
432
411
. 415
431
Fig. 9.3.f - Removal of the sear slide (431), the sear (415) and its spring (416)
2005 08 EN - 140 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.3.5. Removal and reinstallation of the sear slide (431), the sear (415) and its
spring (416)
• Remove the cocking lever (421) as described in § 9.3.3.
• Remove the firing pin spring stop (435) as described in § 9.3.4.
• While pushing down on the sear (415) with a thumb, pull the sear slide stop pin (432) out
of the elongated hole in the sear slide (431) and its hole in the bolt (411) (upper left part of
Fig. 9.3.f).
As it is subjected to the force of its spring (416), do not release the sear (415) yet.
• From the left side, pull the sear slide (431) out of its housing in the rear side of the bolt
(411) (lower left part of Fig. 9.3.f).
• Release the sear (415).
• Lift the sear (415) and its spring (416) up and out of their housing at the rear side of the
bolt (411) (Fig. 9.3.f).
points :
- The sear (415) should be reinstalled with its lug (a) facing rearwards.
- In order to facilitate the reinstallation of the sear spring (416), it is recommended to hold
it by fitting the tip of a screwdriver (or the tip of the cocking lever (421)) between its coils.
- Ensure that the sear slide stop pin (432) correctly holds back the sear slide (431).
2005 08 EN - 141 - Catalog n° 3640084230

. 411
430
Fig. 9.3.g - Removal of the firing pin assembly (430)
OREA 269
445 449
440 440
UT 2019
439
.
UT 2019
. 448
447
Fig. 9.3.h - Disassembling the firing pin assembly (430)
2005 08 EN - 142 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.3.6. Removal and reinstallation of the firing pin assembly (430)
• Remove the cocking lever (421), the firing pin spring stop (435) and the sear (415) as
described in § 9.3.3 to § 9.3.5.
• The firing pin assembly (430) can now simply be pulled out of its housing at the rear side of
the bolt (411) (Fig. 9.3.g).
points :
- If desired, the firing pin assembly (430) can be disassembled and reassembled as
- The firing pin assembly (430) should be reinstalled so that the flat part of its rear end is
facing downwards.
When reinstalling the firing pin assembly (430) in the bolt (411), take care not to lose the pin
(445). This could lead to unlocked firing and destruction of the machine gun.
9.3.7. Disassembling and reassembling the firing pin assembly (430)
Requirements : • OREA 269 (Rod, firing pin spring)

• UT 2019 (Drift extended punch)
• Remove the firing pin assembly (430) as described in § 9.3.6.
firing pin assembly (430) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the firing pin assembly (430) into a vice, fix it by the firing pin extension (447)
and use special clamps or a rag to avoid scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2019, drive out the pin (445) (upper left part of Fig. 9.3.h).
• Withdraw the drift punch UT 2019 and then take the firing pin (439) out of the front end of
the firing pin extension assembly (440).
• Fit the OREA 269 onto the front end of the firing pin extension assembly (440) in order to
compress the firing pin spring (448) and to release the pressure on the pin (449) (upper
right part of Fig. 9.3.h).
• Using the drift punch UT 2019, drive out the pin (449) (upper right part of Fig. 9.3.h).
• Withdraw the drift punch UT 2019, remove the OREA 269 and then take the firing pin
spring (448) out of the firing pin extension (447) (lower part of Fig. 9.3.h).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the pins (445)
and (449) should not protrude after they have been reinstalled.
2005 08 EN - 143 - Catalog n° 3640084230

C1
UT 2019
485
.
491
485
486
487
.
487 C1
485
491
486
Fig. 9.3.i - Disassembling the extractor/ejector assembly (480)
2005 08 EN - 144 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.3.8. Disassembling and reassembling the extractor/ejector assembly (480)

Requirements : • UT 2019 (Drift extended punch)

If the extractor pivot retaining spring (483) has not been released yet, simply pull it out of the
extractor pivot (482).
If the extractor pivot (482) has not been released yet, simply pull it out of its hole in the rear end
of the extractor (C1).
• Using the drift punch UT 2019 from the left side, push the spring pin (491) out of the
extractor (C1) (upper left part of Fig. 9.3.i).
NOTE : Once it has been removed, the spring pin (491) must always be replaced by a new
one !
• Using the drift punch UT 2019 from the front side, carefully push the ejector axis (486)
rearwards, just far enough to release the ejector (485) (upper right part of Fig. 9.3.i).
Please note that, unless it is absolutely necessary, it is not recommended to push the ejector axis
(486) completely out of the extractor (C1) (situation illustrated on Fig. 9.3.i).
If the ejector axis (486) is not removed, be also careful not to turn it (see further at the
reassembly).
• While holding the ejector (485) in position with a finger, withdraw the drift punch UT 2019.
Please note that the ejector (485) is subjected to the force of its spring (487).
• Gently release and then remove the ejector (485) together with its spring (487) out of their
housing in the extractor (C1) (Fig. 9.3.i).
points :
- For a left-hand fed machine gun, the ejector spring (487) must be fitted into the right
inner spring housing of the extractor (C1) (also refer to the lower left part of Fig. 9.3.i).
Please note that, as the extractor (C1) is held upside down, the ejector spring (487) must be
inserted into the housing which is presently at the left side.
- The orientation of the ejector (485) is different for a left-hand or a right-hand fed
machine gun (also refer to § 12.1).
- If it is difficult to fit the ejector axis (486) into the corresponding hole in the ejector (485),
use the drift punch UT 2019 to assist to align this hole with the corresponding holes in
the extractor (C1).
If the ejector axis (486) has been turned and/or removed, first turn and/or reinstall it and
ensure that its notch allows a correct passage for the spring pin (491) (if necessary, use a tool
such as a drift punch to correctly align the notch).
- The (new) spring pin (491) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
2005 08 EN - 145 - Catalog n° 3640084230

501
537
535
D1
536
538
530
522
521
523
510
520
Fig. 9.4.a - Barrel buffer group [ 4 ]
537 D1
530
a .
537
Fig. 9.4.b - Removal of the buffer body lock (537)
2005 08 EN - 146 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.4. BARREL BUFFER GROUP [ 4 ] (Fig. 9.4.a)
9.4.1. Removal and reinstallation of the buffer body lock (537)

As the buffer body lock (537) is held into position by staking, only remove it when it is absolutely
necessary !
Requirements : • Screwdriver or similar tool

• Drift punch
• Hammer
• Centre punch
• Remove the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] and then separate it into the barrel buffer body
assembly (530) and the buffer block assembly (510) as described for ‘field stripping’ in
§ 7.1.
barrel buffer body assembly (530) can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the barrel buffer body assembly (530) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag
to avoid scratches.
• Using a tool such as a drift punch or a screwdriver at the right side of the barrel buffer body
assembly (530), unbend the staking (a) which holds the buffer body lock (537) into position
(left part of Fig. 9.4.b).
• Using a drift punch and a hammer, drive the buffer body lock (537) rearwards out of its
housing in the right side of the barrel buffer body (D1) (right part of Fig. 9.4.b).
points (Fig. 9.4.c) :
- The buffer body lock (537) should be oriented so that its rear end comes slightly out of its
housing (b) in the right side of the barrel buffer body (D1).
- After having inserted the buffer body lock (537) completely into its housing (b) in the right
side of the barrel buffer body (D1), secure it into position by staking.
Using a centre punch and a hammer, stake material from the edge of the housing (b) into the
not yet used notch (c) of the buffer body lock (537).
The same notch (c) should never be used twice.
D1 537
c
.
b
537 D1
Fig. 9.4.c - Reinstallation of the buffer body lock (537)
2005 08 EN - 147 - Catalog n° 3640084230

.
535
D1
D1
536 535
536
Fig. 9.4.d - Removal of the accelerator (535)
2005 08 EN - 148 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.4. BARREL BUFFER GROUP [ 4 ] (continued)
9.4.2. Removal and reinstallation of the accelerator (535)
Requirements : • Drift punch or similar tool
• Remove the barrel buffer group [ 4 ] and then separate it into the barrel buffer body
assembly (530) and the buffer block assembly (510) as described for ‘field stripping’ in
§ 7.1.
• Using a pointed tool such as a drift punch, push the accelerator pin (536) out of the barrel
buffer body (D1) and then release the accelerator (535) from the barrel buffer body
(Fig. 9.4.d).
points :
- The claws of the accelerator (535) should be at the front side and be pointing upwards.
- The accelerator pin (536) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
As the buffer block assembly (510) has been adjusted at the factory, it should not be
disassembled.
2005 08 EN - 149 - Catalog n° 3640084230

616
f
e
610 661 652
662
c
f
b
654
e
b
615 a
a
646 651
645
643
635 c
641
d
653
642
631
632 636
601
620
629
d
621
Fig. 9.5.a - Feed cover group [ 5 ]
662 . 601
UT 2014 664
.
661
UT 1803
661
.
a
663
Fig. 9.5.b - Removal of the feed cover assembly (601)
2005 08 EN - 150 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.5. FEED COVER GROUP [ 5 ] (Fig. 9.5.a)
9.5.1. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover assembly (601)
Please note that, during the following procedure, the cover detent pawl (663) and its spring (664)
(parts of the receiver group [ 2 ] (also refer to § 9.2.2)) will also be released.

• UT 2014 (Drift dia 4 lg 150)
• UT 2203 (Feeler gauge)
• Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the split pin (662) and then pull it out of the left end of
the feed cover axis pin (661) (left part of Fig. 9.5.b).
• Using the drift punch UT 2014 and the hammer UT 2112 from the left side, drive out the
feed cover axis pin (661) (middle part of Fig. 9.5.b) and then withdraw the drift punch.
• Taking into account that it is subjected to the force of the cover detent pawl (663) and its
spring (664), open the feed cover assembly (601) by turning the feed cover latch shaft
(653) and then lift it up and off the receiver (211) (middle part of Fig. 9.5.b).
• Take the cover detent pawl (663) and its spring (664) out of their housing in the receiver
(211) (right part of Fig. 9.5.b).
points :
- When reinstalling the cover detent pawl (663), its notch (a) should be facing outwards.
- When fitting the feed cover axis pin (661), from the right side, back into position, a light
pressure will be required on the feed cover assembly (601), against the force of the cover
detent pawl spring (664), in order to correctly align the pin holes.
Please note that this light pressure can also be obtained by closing the feed cover assembly
(601) before fitting the feed cover axis pin (661) back into position.
- After having reinstalled and closed the feed cover assembly (601), use the feeler gauge
UT 2203 in order to check if the clearance between the feed cover latch (651) and the
upper plate of the receiver (211) does not exceed 0.2 mm (Fig. 9.5.c).
If the clearance exceeds 0.2 mm, first check if the feed cover latch (651) is installed correctly. If
there is no apparent problem, the feed cover latch should be replaced by a new one.
UT 2203
211
601
651
Fig. 9.5.c - Checking the clearance between the feed cover

latch (651) and the upper plate of the receiver (211)
2005 08 EN - 151 - Catalog n° 3640084230

629
620 641 615
620
a
.
616 616
610
615
Fig. 9.5.d - Removal of the belt feed slide assembly (620)
2005 08 EN - 152 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.5. FEED COVER GROUP [ 5 ] (continued)
9.5.2. Removal and reinstallation of the belt feed slide assembly (620)
This procedure applies to the (standard) left-hand fed M3P machine gun. In case of a right-hand fed
machine gun, refer to § 12.1.
Requirements : • Drift punch or similar pointed tool
• Using a pointed tool such as a pin or a drift punch from the rear side, drive out the pin
(616) (left part of Fig. 9.5.d).
• Taking into account that the belt feed slide retainer (615), and therefore also the belt feed
slide assembly (620), will be released, withdraw the pointed tool.
• Take the belt feed slide retainer (615) and the belt feed slide assembly (620) out of the feed
cover (610) (Fig. 9.5.d).
points :
- The belt feed slide retainer (615) should be oriented so that its profiled edge is facing
forwards.
- The belt feed slide assembly (620) should be oriented so that the belt feed pawl arm
(629) is at the rear side.
- Ensure that the front end of the belt feed lever (641) correctly engages into the notch (a)
of the belt feed slide assembly (620) and check if both the belt feed lever and the belt
feed slide assembly can operate smoothly.
2005 08 EN - 153 - Catalog n° 3640084230

643
641 642
610 641
c
643
b
Fig. 9.5.e - Removal of the belt feed lever (641)
2005 08 EN - 154 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.5.3. Removal and reinstallation of the belt feed lever (641)

• Remove the belt feed slide assembly (620) as described in § 9.5.2.
• Align the front end of the belt feed lever (641) with the open central part of the T-notch (a)
in the feed cover (610) (left part of Fig. 9.5.e).
• Slowly slide the belt feed lever (641) off the mounting pin (b) until the belt feed lever
plunger (643) is just not released (left part of Fig. 9.5.e).
Please note that the belt feed lever plunger (643) is subjected to the pressure of its spring (642).
• While holding back the belt feed lever plunger (643) with a finger, continue sliding the belt
feed lever (641) off the mounting pin (b) until the plunger is released and then take the
plunger, together with its spring (642), out of their housing (c) in the belt feed lever
(Fig. 9.5.e).
• Slide the belt feed lever (641) completely off the mounting pin (b) (Fig. 9.5.e).
points :
- Ensure that the belt feed lever (641) is oriented correctly (refer to Fig. 9.5.e).
- Lightly lubricate the belt feed lever plunger (643) and its spring (642) before reinstalling
them.
- Fit the belt feed lever plunger (643) into its spring (642) and then insert this assembly,
with the spring first, into its housing (c) in the belt feed lever (641) just before this housing
is at the same height of the edge of the feed cover (610) when sliding the belt feed lever
back onto the mounting pin (b).
Ensure that the belt feed lever plunger (643) is correctly held back by the inner edge of
the feed cover (610).
2005 08 EN - 155 - Catalog n° 3640084230

629
629
b 621
621
a
.
635 621
.
c
636
UT 2015
621 636
635 631 & 632
Fig. 9.5.f - Disassembling the belt feed slide assembly (620)
645
.
a
645
.
610 610
b
c
b
Fig. 9.5.g - Removal of the feed cover latch plate spring (645)
2005 08 EN - 156 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.5.4. Disassembling and reassembling the belt feed slide assembly (620)

• Drift punch or similar pointed tool
• Using a pointed tool such as a drift punch, push the pin (a) of the belt feed pawl (621)
inwards and out of the central hole (b) of the belt feed pawl arm (629) and then release
and remove the latter from the belt feed slide assembly (620) (upper parts of Fig. 9.5.f).
• Using the drift punch UT 2015, push out the pin (636) (lower left part of Fig. 9.5.f).
• While firmly holding the belt feed pawl (621) in position with a finger, withdraw the drift
punch UT 2015.
• Gently release and then remove the belt feed pawl (621) together with the corresponding
inner and outer springs (631) and (632) from the belt feed slide (635) (Fig. 9.5.f).
points :
- After having inserted the inner and outer belt feed pawl springs (631) and (632) into
each other, one extremity of this spring assembly should correctly engage its housing in
the belt feed pawl (621) while the other extremity should correctly fit onto the pin
provided on the belt feed slide (635).
- The pin (636) must be installed with its groove (c) at the rear side and should not
protrude after it has been reinstalled.
- The fork-shaped extremity of the belt feed pawl arm (629) must correctly engage the
groove (c) of the pin (636) while the central hole (b) of the arm must correctly fit onto the
pin (a) of the belt feed pawl (621).
9.5.5. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover latch plate spring (645)

• Screwdriver
• Remove the belt feed lever (641) as described in § 9.5.3.
• Using a screwdriver, disengage the front claw (a) of the feed cover latch plate spring (645)
from the groove (b) in the feed cover (610) (left part of Fig. 9.5.g).
• Move the feed cover latch plate spring (645) forwards so that it can be released from the
mounting pin (c) of the feed cover (610) and then remove it (right part of Fig. 9.5.g).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the front claw
(a) of the feed cover latch plate spring (645) should correctly engage the groove (b) in the feed
cover (610).
2005 08 EN - 157 - Catalog n° 3640084230

646
c b 610
.
. a
a
.
646 d
b
610
Fig. 9.5.h - Removal of the extractor plate spring (646)
654 652
a 645
UT 1803
651
.
653
.
654
610
653
Fig. 9.5.i - Removal of the feed cover latch shaft (653) and the feed cover latch (651)
2005 08 EN - 158 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.5.6. Removal and reinstallation of the extractor plate spring (646)

• Screwdriver
• Remove the feed cover latch plate spring (645) as described in § 9.5.5.
• Using a screwdriver, disengage the rear lug (a) of the extractor plate spring (646) from the
notch (b) in the extractor guide cam (c) of the feed cover (610) (left part of Fig. 9.5.h).
• Disengage the front end of the extractor plate spring (646) from the mounting pin (d) of the
feed cover (610) and then remove the extractor plate spring (right part of Fig. 9.5.h).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account that the rear end of
the extractor plate spring (646) should be depressed in order to enable its rear lug (a) to
correctly engage the notch (b) in the extractor guide cam (c) of the feed cover (610).
9.5.7. Removal and reinstallation of the feed cover latch shaft (653) and the feed
cover latch (651)
• Using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the split pin (654) and then pull it out of the right end of
the feed cover latch shaft (653) (left part of Fig. 9.5.i).
• Taking care not to lose the washer (652) and taking into account that the feed cover latch
(651) will be released, pull the feed cover latch shaft (653) out of the left side of the feed
cover (610) (right part of Fig. 9.5.i).
points :
- Ensure that the feed cover latch shaft (653) and the feed cover latch (651) are oriented
correctly (refer to Fig. 9.5.i).
- Ensure that the pointed front part of the feed cover latch (651) fits correctly between the
rear end of its plate spring (645) and the feed cover (610).
- When fitting the feed cover latch shaft (653), from the left side, back into position, a light
pressure will be required on the feed cover latch (651), against the force of its plate
spring (645), in order to correctly align the pin holes.
- Before reinstalling the split pin (654), fit the washer (652), in the notch (a) of the feed
cover (610), onto the right end of the feed cover latch shaft (653).
2005 08 EN - 159 - Catalog n° 3640084230

710
701
731
F1
b a
716
721
717 723 722
b a
715
752
753
771
754
772
751
755
756
757
758
754
763
764
750
761
Fig. 9.6.a - Back plate group [ 6 ]
2005 08 EN - 160 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.6. BACK PLATE GROUP [ 6 ]
9.6.1. Removal and reinstallation of the back plate latch (715)

• Remove the back plate group [ 6 ] as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
back plate group [ 6 ] can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the back plate group [ 6 ] into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid
scratches.
• Using the drift punch UT 2014 and the hammer UT 2112, drive out the pin (716) (left part
of Fig. 9.6.b).
• While holding the back plate latch (715) in position with a finger, withdraw the drift punch
UT 2014.
Take into account that the back plate latch (715) is subjected to the force of its spring (717).
• Release the pressure and then remove the back plate latch (715) together with its spring
(717).
points :
- If it is difficult to insert the pin (716), use the drift punch UT 2014 to assist to align the
holes in the back plate latch (715) with the corresponding holes in the back plate (F1).
- After having reinstalled the back plate latch (715), check if it operates smoothly.
716
715 717
.
716
UT 2014 F1
715
Fig. 9.6.b - Removal of the back plate latch (715)
2005 08 EN - 161 - Catalog n° 3640084230

F1
F1
.
a 723 723
UT 1817
723
c F1
b
721
722
Fig. 9.6.c - Removal of the back plate latch lock (722)
2005 08 EN - 162 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.6. BACK PLATE GROUP [ 6 ] (continued)
9.6.2. Removal and reinstallation of the back plate latch lock (722)

• 1.4 mm drift punch
• Remove the back plate latch (715) as described in § 9.6.1.
• At the right side of the back plate (F1) and using the 1.4 mm drift punch through the hole
(a), push the back plate latch lock spring (721) inwards in order to release the pressure on
the stop (723) and hold the drift punch in that position (upper left part of Fig. 9.6.c).
• Using a tool such as a screwdriver in the grooves of the stop (723), move the stop outwards
until the coils of the back plate latch lock spring (721) no longer engage the grooves of the
stop when the spring is released (upper left part of Fig. 9.6.c).
• Using the pliers UT 1817, and taking into account that the back plate latch lock spring
(721) will be released, pull the stop (723) out of the back plate (F1) (upper right part of
Fig. 9.6.c).
• Remove the back plate latch lock (722) and its spring (721) out of their housing in the back
plate (F1) (Fig. 9.6.c).
points :
- The back plate latch lock (722) must be inserted into the back plate (F1) from the right
side, with the housing for its spring (721) facing outwards, with its hole (b) oriented
vertically and with its notch (c) facing downwards.
Take into account that, on the lower part of Fig. 9.6.c, the back plate (F1) is represented upside
down.
- When reinserting the stop (723), first compress the back plate latch lock spring (721) as
explained above, ensure that the stop fits correctly into the hole (b) of the back plate
latch lock (722) and release the spring when the grooves of the stop are at the same
height of the coils of the spring.
- After having reinstalled the back plate latch lock (722), check if it operates smoothly.
- The stop (723) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
2005 08 EN - 163 - Catalog n° 3640084230

F1
731 753 (°)
F1 a (Fig. 9.6.h)
751
750 752
754
UT 1703
Fig. 9.6.d - Removal of the buffer plate (731) and the back plate regulator assembly (750) and taking the
front absorbing components out of the regulator tube (751)
751 c
b
d
761
OREAA 6B 751
)
OREAA 6B
Fig. 9.6.e - Using the adjusting loop OREAA 6B in order to unscrew the firing rate adjusting plug (761)
2005 08 EN - 164 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.6.3. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the buffer plate

(731) and the back plate regulator assembly (750)
Requirements : • OREAA 6B (Loop, adjusting)

• UT 1703 (“C” spanner 50/80)
back plate group [ 6 ] can be fixed into a vice.
When fixing the back plate group [ 6 ] into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid
scratches.
• On the rear part of the back plate (F1), determine the hole with the indexing trunnion (771)
(hole (a) on the left part of Fig. 9.6.d).
• While using a tool such as a screwdriver to push the indexing trunnion (771) inwards so
that it is released from its hole (a), use the wrench UT 1703 to loosen the back plate
regulator assembly (750) by 90° (left part of Fig. 9.6.d).
Please note that, after the back plate regulator assembly (750) has been turned by 90°, the
indexing trunnion (771) engages the following hole in the back plate (F1) so that the assembly is
again held in place.
• Taking into account that the buffer plate (731) will also be released, repeat the above step
until the back plate regulator assembly (750) is released from the back plate (F1).
When, during this operation, the indexing trunnion (771) becomes visible, hold it back with a
finger and continue unscrewing until the indexing trunnion can, together with its spring (772), be
taken out of their housing in the regulator tube (751).
• Take the assembly formed by the regulator plug (752), the setting washer(s) (753) and the
15 regulator spring washers (754) out of the front part of the regulator tube (751).
• On the remaining part of the back plate regulator assembly (750), determine the hole in
the regulator tube (751) with the indexing trunnion (763) (hole (b) on the upper left part of
Fig. 9.6.e).
• Take the adjusting loop OREAA 6B and, while orienting it so that its knob (c) will be aligned
with the hole (b), fit the tool onto the rear part of the regulator tube (751) (upper right part
of Fig. 9.6.e).
Ensure that the inner pins (d) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B correctly engage the holes in the
firing rate adjusting plug (761).
Please note that the action of pressing the knob (c) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B on the upper
right part of Fig. 9.6.e is not necessary now, but just illustrates the functioning of the tool.
• While pressing the knob (c) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B in order to push the indexing
trunnion (763) inwards so that it is released from its hole (b), use the tool to loosen the
firing rate adjusting plug (761) by 90° (lower parts of Fig. 9.6.e).
Please note that, after the firing rate adjusting plug (761) has been turned by 90°, the indexing
trunnion (763) engages the following hole in the regulator tube (751) so that the plug is again
held in place.
2005 08 EN - 165 - Catalog n° 3640084230

756
758 (*)
(Fig. 9.6.g)
763
751
755 764
757
754 761
Fig. 9.6.f - Removal of the firing rate adjusting plug (761) and taking the rear absorbing
components out of the regulator tube (751)
756 752
33.3 ± 0.1 mm
754 (9x) 754 (15x)
758 (*)
753 (°)
757
1.4 ± 0.1 mm 751

Fig. 9.6.g - Correct reassembly of the rear
absorbing components
(*) The quantity of regulator brake washers
(758) is only for illustration purpose : the
correct quantity of washers will be 752
determined during the reassembly
Fig. 9.6.h - Correct reassembly and reinstallation

of the front absorbing components
(°) The quantity of setting washers (753) is only
for illustration purposes : the correct
quantity of washers will be determined
during the reassembly
2005 08 EN - 166 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.6.3. Removal/disassembly and reassembly/reinstallation of the buffer plate
(731) and the back plate regulator assembly (750) (continued)
• Repeat the previous step until the firing rate adjusting plug (761) is released (Fig. 9.6.f).
When, during this operation, the indexing trunnion (763) becomes visible, hold it back with a finger
and continue unscrewing until the indexing trunnion can, together with its spring (764), be taken
out of their housing in the firing rate adjusting plug (761).
• Take the regulator spring (755) and the assembly formed by the regulator cone (756), the
regulator brake (757), the regulator brake washer(s) (758) and the 9 regulator spring
washers (754) out of the rear part of the regulator tube (751) (Fig. 9.6.f).
points :
- Before reassembling, ensure that all the parts are clean and free from lubricant.
- Assemble the front absorbing components as shown in the upper part of Fig. 9.6.h.
The quantity of setting washers (753) shown in Fig. 9.6.d and Fig. 9.6.h is only for illustration
purpose. The quantity will be determined as described below.
Insert this assembly into the front part of the regulator tube (751) and then ensure that the
regulator plug (752) protrudes by 1.4 ± 0.1 mm from the front side of the regulator tube (lower
part of Fig. 9.6.h). If not, the correct protrusion can be obtained by changing, adding and/or
eliminating the setting washer(s) (753) which are available as a spare set. When the distance is
correct, lubricant should be applied to the front absorbing components.
- Reinstall the buffer plate (731) into the back plate (F1).
- Fit the front absorbing components into the front part of the regulator tube (751).
- When screwing the regulator tube (751) back into position, first screw it until the housing
for the indexing trunnion (771) and its spring (772) comes at level with the back plate
(F1). After that, fit the indexing trunnion and its spring into their housing and then, while
pushing on the indexing trunnion with a screwdriver, continue screwing the regulator tube
until the regulator plug (752) comes into contact with the buffer plate (731).
- Compress further by tightening the regulator tube (751) by 1/2 minimum to 3/4 turn
maximum by using the wrench UT 1703.
- Assemble the rear absorbing components (except the regulator spring (755)) as shown in
Fig. 9.6.g.
The quantity of regulator brake washers (758) shown in Fig. 9.6.f and Fig. 9.6.g is only for
illustration purpose. The quantity will be determined as described below.
Ensure that the distance between the front face of the (first) regulator brake washer (758) and
the convex rear face of the rear regulator spring washer (754) is 33.3 ± 0.1 mm. If not, the
correct distance can be obtained by changing, adding and/or eliminating the regulator brake
washer(s) (758) which are available as a spare set. When the distance is correct, lubricant
should be applied to the rear absorbing components.
- Fit the rear absorbing components and the regulator spring (755) back into the rear part
of the regulator tube (751).
- When screwing the firing rate adjusting plug (761) back into position, first screw it until
the housing for the indexing trunnion (763) and its spring (764) comes at level with the
regulator tube (751). After that, fit the indexing trunnion and its spring into their housing
and then, while pushing on the indexing trunnion with a screwdriver, continue screwing the
firing rate adjusting plug until it is flush with the rear end of the regulator tube (751).
- When reassembly is complete, check and adjust the firing rate as described in § 10.3.
2005 08 EN - 167 - Catalog n° 3640084230

G1 c
280 286
287
288
c
a
289
A681
A674
A675 A684 A612 2x

A653 211
A684
A653 A611
A671 A628
A681
3x
A626 a
A610
2x A693
A697 2x A697
A653 2x
b A613 A653 4x A653

2x
A614
A693
A652
A691
A620 4x
A627 A631 A651

A633
A601
A632
A696
A696
A693
A696 A693
A695 A694
A696
A693
Fig. 9.7.a - Adaptation [ 7 ]
After any intervention on the adaptation [ 7 ], the timing should be checked and, if
necessary, adjusted as described in § 10.5.
2005 08 EN - 168 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.7. ADAPTATION [ 7 ]
9.7.1. Removal and reinstallation of the protective cover (A691)
Requirements : • 6.5 mm screwdriver
• Pull the (short) locking pin (A695) and the (long) locking pin (A694) out of the heads of the
2 x 2 screws (A693) which secure the protective cover (A691) (upper left part of Fig. 9.7.b).
• Using the 6.5 mm screwdriver and taking care not to lose the 4 x 2 spring washers (A696),
take out the 4 screws (A693) and then release and remove the protective cover (A691) from
the left side of the machine gun (Fig. 9.7.b).
points :
- After having screwed a screw (A693) firmly into position, and if necessary, slightly loosen
it (by not more than 180°) until its head is oriented so that the hole for the corresponding
locking pin is perfectly horizontal.
- The (short) locking pin (A695) should be inserted, from the rear side, into the
corresponding holes in the heads of the 2 lower front screws (A693).
- The (long) locking pin (A694) should be inserted, from the front side, into the
corresponding holes in the heads of the 2 upper rear screws (A693).
A691
A693
A694
.
A693
A695
A693
A691
A696 A696
A693 A694
A695 A693
Fig. 9.7.b - Removal of the protective cover (A691)
2005 08 EN - 169 - Catalog n° 3640084230

289 B C
A671
G1
A .
B G1
C
A671
Fig. 9.7.c - Disconnecting the connector (A671) from the solenoid (G1)
UT 1803
287
288
.
G1 286
287
OREA 739
OREA 741
Fig. 9.7.d - Loosening the nut (287) (without removing it from the left end of the screw (286))
2005 08 EN - 170 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.7. ADAPTATION [ 7 ] (continued)
plate assembly (A610)
In this paragraph, the removal and reinstallation of the solenoid (G1) and the sensor support plate
assembly (A610) are described together because :
- The solenoid (G1) can only be removed after having removed the sensor support plate
assembly (A610).
- The sensor support plate assembly (A610) can only be removed after having loosened the nut
(287) which secures the solenoid (G1).
- Once the sensor support plate assembly (A610) has been removed, and due to the loosened
nut (287), the solenoid (G1) is no longer correctly and securely fixed to the left side of the
receiver (211) so that it is better to remove it.
Requirements : • OREA 739 (Slotted tubular wrench dia 19 lg 113)

• OREA 741 (Pin assembly)
• 6.5 mm screwdriver
• Using the cutting pliers UT 1814, remove the lockwire (289) which secures the connector
(A671) to the solenoid (G1) (lockwire ‘A’ on the left part of Fig. 9.7.c).
During this step and the following ones, do not touch the other 4 lockwires (289) on the solenoid
(G1) !
The upper front and lower rear lockwires ‘B’ are removed/reinstalled when carrying out the
timing adjustment (also refer to § 10.5) while the upper rear and lower front lockwires ‘C’
should never be touched.
• Disconnect the connector (A671) from the solenoid (G1) (right part of Fig. 9.7.c).
• At the rear side of the solenoid (G1) and using the pliers UT 1803, unbend the cotter pin
(288) and then pull the pin out of the left end of the screw (286) (left part of Fig. 9.7.d).
• Using the tubular wrench OREA 739 and the pin OREA 741, loosen the nut (287) by a few
turns (right part of Fig. 9.7.d).
Ensure that the nut (287) is not screwed off the left end of the screw (286).
2005 08 EN - 171 - Catalog n° 3640084230

211 A697 211
A610
A610
A693
A697 A693
A697
A693
O
G1
211
. 211
. G1
.
A610
.
287
286 286
287
G1
288
A693
A610 A693
Fig. 9.7.e - Removal of the solenoid (G1) and the sensor support plate assembly (A610)
2005 08 EN - 172 - Catalog n° 3640084230

plate assembly (A610) (continued)
• Using the cutting pliers UT 1814, remove the 3 lockwires (A697) from the 3 screws (A693)
which secure the sensor support plate assembly (A610) to the left side of the receiver (211)
(left and middle upper parts of Fig. 9.7.e).
The left upper part of Fig. 9.7.e shows the screw (A693) securing the front side of the sensor
support plate assembly (A610) while the middle upper part of Fig. 9.7.e shows the 2 screws
securing the rear side of the assembly.
• Using the 6.5 mm screwdriver and holding the sensor support plate assembly (A610) in
position with one hand, take out the 3 screws (A693) (right upper part of Fig. 9.7.e for the
upper rear screw).
• Holding the solenoid (G1) in position with one hand, release and remove the sensor
support plate assembly (A610) from the left side of the receiver (211) (left middle part of
Fig. 9.7.e).
• Release and remove the solenoid (G1), together with the screw (286) and the nut (287),
from the left side of the receiver (211) (right middle part of Fig. 9.7.e).
• Separate the screw (286) and the nut (287) from the solenoid (G1) (Fig. 9.7.e).
points :
- When screwing the nut (287) back onto the left end of the screw (286), ensure that the
grooves of the nut are facing outwards and first screw it until it is secured by only 1 or 2
turns to the screw.
- After having fitted the screw (286) and the solenoid (G1), from the left side, into the
corresponding rectangular holes in the receiver (211), push the solenoid slightly forwards
so that the screw and the solenoid fit correctly into position.
- When reinstalling the sensor support plate assembly (A610), its upper notch (‘O’ on the
left middle part of Fig. 9.7.e) should fit between the nut (287) and the rear part of the
body of the solenoid (G1).
- After having screwed a screw (A693) firmly into position, secure it by using a piece of
new lockwire (A697) and the joint-twist pliers UT 1816.
The pieces of lockwire (A697) should be installed as shown in the left and middle upper parts
of Fig. 9.7.e and so that tension is applied to them when the corresponding screw (A693) tends
to unscrew.
- When the nut (287) has been screwed completely home, one of its grooves should be
perfectly aligned with the hole in the left end of the screw (286) in order to enable the
installation of the cotter pin (288).
- After having reinstalled the cotter pin (288), lock it by bending its 2 extremities.
- After having screwed the connector (A671) firmly into position, secure it by using a piece
of new lockwire (289) and the joint-twist pliers UT 1816.
The piece of lockwire (289) should be installed as shown by ‘A’ in the left part of Fig. 9.7.c and
so that tension is applied to it when the connector (A671) tends to unscrew.
2005 08 EN - 173 - Catalog n° 3640084230

A674 A612
A675
A684
G1
A684
A611
G2 A613 &
A620 A614 A632
A626
G2 G2
A628
A681 A631
A681 A653 A633
A653
A681
A671 A652
A653
A653 A627
A653
A651
Fig. 9.7.f - Different views of the sensor support plate assembly (A610)
2005 08 EN - 174 - Catalog n° 3640084230

9.7.3. Disassembly and reassembly of the sensor support plate assembly (A610)
In order to be able to intervene on the sensor support plate assembly (A610), first remove the
protective cover (A691) as described in § 9.7.1.
Besides the sole plate (A626), the following components of the sensor support plate assembly
(A610) are available as spare parts (Fig. 9.7.f) :
- The resistor (A611) and its fasteners

• 4 mm combination wrench
• Soldering iron
The fasteners of the resistor (A611) are the 2 screws (A612), the 2 washers (A613) (used
underneath the sole plate (A626)) and the 2 nuts (A614).
In order to remove these components, proceed as follows :
- After having taken note of the corresponding cables, unsolder the 2 connecting lips of the
resistor (A611) from the harness (G2).
- Using a 3 mm screwdriver and a 4 mm combination wrench and taking care not to lose the 2
washers (A613), unscrew and remove the 2 screws (A612) and the 2 nuts (A614) and then
remove the resistor (A611).
- The sensor (A620) and its fasteners

• Special tools for separating the sensor (A620) from the harness
The fasteners of the sensor (A620) are the locking pin (A631), the washer (A633) and the nut
(A632).

- Using the combination wrench UT 1032, slightly unscrew the nut (A632) in order to release the
pressure of the locking pin (A631) onto the sensor (A620).
- Carefully pull the sensor (A620) leftwards out of its support (A627).
- Pull the assembly formed by the locking pin (A631), the washer (A633) and the nut (A632)
rearwards out of the sensor support (A627) and then separate the washer and the nut from the
locking pin.
- Taking into account that this operation may only be carried out by a qualified electrician,
separate the sensor (A620) from the harness (G2).
To reassemble, follow the above steps in reverse order, taking into account the following points :
- The locking pin (A631) must be oriented so that its notch for the sensor (A620) is facing
downwards and its threaded end is at the rear side.
- When tightening the nut (A632), be careful not to damage the sensor (A620).
- After any intervention on the sensor (A620), its position should be checked and, if necessary,
adjusted as described in § 10.6.2.
2005 08 EN - 175 - Catalog n° 3640084230

A674 A612
A675
A684
G1
A684
A611
G2 A613 &
A620 A614 A632
A626
G2 G2
A628
A681 A631
A681 A653 A633
A653
A681
A671 A652
A653
A653 A627
A653
A651
2005 08 EN - 176 - Catalog n° 3640084230

(continued)
- The connector (A671)

Requirements : • UT 1814 (Cutting pliers 192-14 CPY)
• Special tools for separating the connector (A671) from the harness
In order to remove the connector (A671), proceed as follows :
- Remove the corresponding lockwire (289) and then disconnect the connector (A671) from the
solenoid (G1) as described in the first part of § 9.7.2.
separate the connector (A671) from the harness (G2).
- The sensor support (A627) and its fasteners

• Special tools for removing and reinstalling rivets
The fasteners of the sensor support (A627) are the 3 rivets (A628).

- Remove the sensor support plate assembly (A610) from the left side of the machine gun as
- Remove the sensor (A620) and its fasteners as described before in this paragraph.
- Taking into account that this operation may only be carried out by a qualified technician,
remove the rivets (A628) in order to separate the sensor support (A627) from the sole plate
(A626).
- The connector (A651) and its fasteners

• 5.5 mm combination wrench
• Special tools for separating the connector (A651) from the harness
The fasteners of the connector (A651) are the 4 screws (A652) and 4 of the nuts (A653).

- Using a 3.5 mm screwdriver and a 5.5 mm combination wrench, unscrew and remove the 4
screws (A652) and the 4 nuts (A653).
release and separate the connector (A651) from the harness (G2) and the sole plate (A626).
2005 08 EN - 177 - Catalog n° 3640084230

A674 A612
A675
A684
G1
A684
A611
G2 A613 &
A620 A614 A632
A626
G2 G2
A628
A681 A631
A681 A653 A633
A653
A681
A671 A652
A653
A653 A627
A653
A651
2005 08 EN - 178 - Catalog n° 3640084230

(continued)
- The 3 screws (A681) and the 3 corresponding nuts (A653)

- Remove the sensor support plate assembly (A610) from the left side of the machine gun as
- Using a 3.5 mm screwdriver and a 5.5 mm combination wrench and taking into account that
they secure part of the harness (G2), unscrew and remove the 3 screws (A681) and the 3 nuts
(A653).
- The 2 screws (A684) and the 2 corresponding nuts (A653)

Taking into account that they secure part of the harness (G2), these components can simply be
removed by using a 3.5 mm screwdriver and a 5.5 mm combination wrench.
- The nut (A674) and the lock washer (A675)

Requirements : • 8 mm combination wrench
• 11 mm combination wrench
Taking into account that they secure the diode of the harness (G2), these components can simply
be removed by using a 11 mm combination wrench and a 8 mm combination wrench.
2005 08 EN - 179 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 180 - Catalog n° 3640084230

Before any inspection or adjustment, ensure that the machine gun is perfectly clean.
10.1. CHECKING THE FIRING PRECISION
The firing precision should periodically be checked by carrying out the appropriate procedures
(harmonization, ...) described in the corresponding documentation of the weapon system.
2005 08 EN - 181 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 182 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.2. CHECKING AND GAUGING THE BARREL (110)/(110/1)
Preparation
• Separate the barrel group [ 1 ] into the barrel (110)/(110/1) and the barrel extension
assembly (150) as described in § 9.1.1.
• Thoroughly clean and dry the barrel (110)/(110/1) (refer to chapter 8).
• Carry out a visual inspection of the outside of the barrel (110)/(110/1).
• Carry out a visual inspection of the bore and the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1).
If the barrel (110)/(110/1) has been screwed, even slightly, the headspace should be
Checking the barrel (110)/(110/1) for keyholing (resulting in elongated

impacts on a target)
This checking procedure should only be carried out after the barrel (110)/(110/1) has been used
intensively and/or in case of doubt about its condition.
• Correctly install the barrel group [ 1 ] onto the machine gun.
• Mount the machine gun into or onto its weapon system and then load the gun.
• Aim the machine gun at a safe target located at 25 m and fire approx. 10 shots.
• At the target, check if the impacts are not too elongated (‘keyholed’ of 15° or more).
An impact is keyholed of 15° when its length reaches 22 mm.
If 20% or more of the impacts are keyholed of 15° or more, the bore of the barrel (110)/
(110/1) shows serious signs of wear : the barrel should be rejected !
Otherwise, the barrel is OK.
• Repeat the ‘preparation’ procedure described above and then gauge the bore of the barrel
(110)/(110/1) as described in the following paragraph.
2005 08 EN - 183 - Catalog n° 3640084230

X
Fig. 10.2.a - Gap recalibration tool
2005 08 EN - 184 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.2. CHECKING AND GAUGING THE BARREL (110)/(110/1) (continued)
Checking the barrel (110)/(110/1) for coppering

This checking procedure should be carried out to check the bore of the barrel (110)/(110/1) for
excessive copper deposit.
• Insert the copper gauge G093 into the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1).
• If the copper gauge G093 enters the bore of the barrel by at least 650 mm, the bore is
not subjected to excessive coppering.
If the copper gauge G093 does not enter the bore of the barrel within the range 304 mm
to 310 mm, the excess of copper at the gap (dilatation joint) should be removed by
proceeding as follows :
- Insert the gap recalibration tool (Fig. 10.2.a) into the chamber of the barrel
(110)/(110/1) and, while turning it in the clockwise direction, slowly push it forwards until
there is contact between the large pin (X) of the tool and the rear end of the barrel.
- Remove the tool and then thoroughly clean the barrel (110)/(110/1) in order to remove
any copper residue (refer to chapter 8).
- Repeat the above checking procedure with the copper gauge G093.
If the copper gauge G093 enters the bore of the barrel by less than 650 mm, the
copper fouling inside the bore should be removed by carrying out the following chemical
procedure :
- Prepare the following solution : Distilled water H2O : 336 cm3
Ammonium persulphate : 84 g
Ammonium carbonate : 42 g
Ammonia : 528 cm3
- Ensure that the bore of the barrel (110)/(110/1) is perfectly clean and dry.
- At the side of the chamber, seal the barrel (110)/(110/1) by using a rubber plug.
- Fix the barrel (110)/(110/1) vertically into a vice, with its muzzle pointing upwards.
When fixing the barrel (110)/(110/1) into a vice, use special clamps or a rag to avoid
scratches.
- Completely fill the barrel (110)/(110/1) with the solution prepared above.
- Wait 20-30 minutes, remove the barrel (110)/(110/1) from the vice and then pour the
solution from the barrel into a flask or a clear glass : the solution will be tinted blue due
to the presence of copper salt.
- Repeat the 3 previous steps until the solution coming out of the barrel (110)/(110/1) is
no longer tinted blue but keeps its original colour.
When the solution keeps its original colour, the bore of the barrel (110)/(110/1) is considered
being free from copper deposits.
- Remove the sealing and then thoroughly clean and dry the barrel (110)/(110/1) in order
to remove any trace of the solution (refer to chapter 8).
NOTE : After having removed copper deposit, it is absolutely necessary to gauge the bore
of the barrel (110)/(110/1) as described in the following paragraph.
2005 08 EN - 185 - Catalog n° 3640084230

1670
1690
c b a
Fig. 10.2.b - Checking the barrel erosion gauge (1670)
110 110
110/1 110/1
b
b
d
a a d
Gauging the (rear) stellited portion of Gauging the (front) chrome-plated

the barrel (110)/(110/1) portion of the barrel (110)/(110/1)
Fig. 10.2.c - Gauging the bore of the stellited barrel (110)/(110/1)
2005 08 EN - 186 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.2. CHECKING AND GAUGING THE BARREL (110)/(110/1) (continued)
Gauging the bore of the (stellited) barrel (110)/(110/1)

The following procedure, which should be carried out periodically in order to check the condition
of the barrel (110)/(110/1), consists of checking separately the condition of both the stellited and
the chrome-plated portions of the barrel.
The gauging procedure requires the barrel erosion gauge (1670) and its reference gauge (1690).
The barrel erosion gauge (1670) consists of a gauge rod (a) fitted into a gauge tube (b).
(a) Checking the barrel erosion gauge (1670)

Before using the barrel erosion gauge (1670), check it by proceeding as follows :
- While holding the expanding part (c) of the barrel erosion gauge (1670) into the hole
of its reference gauge (1690), push the gauge rod (a) into the gauge tube (b) until the
expanding part is expanded so that it comes fully into contact with the inner side of the
hole of the reference gauge and that it exerts a light pressure on it (Fig. 10.2.b).
- Check if the ‘reject’-mark on the gauge rod (a) is at the rear end of the gauge tube (b).
If not, the barrel erosion gauge (1670) is not OK.
(b) Gauging (Fig. 10.2.c)

Never gauge a heated barrel (110)/(110/1) : it would result in incorrect gauging results and
it can cause damage to the barrel erosion gauge (1670).
Before any check, pull the gauge rod (a) as far as possible out of the gauge tube (b).
- Set the gauge tube (b) for checking the (rear) stellited portion of the barrel (110)/
(110/1) by positioning the stop (d) of the tube onto the front ‘AC’-mark (left part of
Fig. 10.2.c).
- From the side of the chamber, insert the gauge tube (b), with its expanding part (c) (also
refer to Fig. 10.2.b) first, into the bore of the barrel (110)/(110/1) until the stop (d)
touches the rear end of the barrel (left part of Fig. 10.2.c).
- Without applying excessive force, push the gauge rod (a) as far as possible into the
gauge tube (b).
- The condition of the stellited portion of the barrel (110)/(110/1) is now determined by
the visibility of the ‘reject’-mark and the mark just in front of it.
If both marks are visible, the condition of the stellited portion of the barrel (110)/(110/1) is
correct.
If only the ‘reject’-mark is visible, the stellited portion of the barrel (110)/(110/1) shows signs
of wear so that the barrel should be replaced as soon as possible.
If both marks have disappeared under the rear edge of the gauge tube (b), the stellited
portion of the barrel (110)/(110/1) is worn and the barrel should be rejected.
- Repeat the above procedure for the (front) chrome-plated portion of the barrel (110)/
(110/1) after having positioned the stop (d) of the gauge tube (b) onto the rear
‘AC’-mark (right part of Fig. 10.2.c).
After the checking and gauging procedure

• Carry out the safety checks as described in § 4.2.
2005 08 EN - 187 - Catalog n° 3640084230

a
[6]
751 761 b
a
c OREAA 6B
Fig. 10.3.a - Installing the adjusting loop OREAA 6B onto the rear part of the back plate group [ 6 ]
)
.
751
OREAA 6B
b
Fig. 10.3.b - Adjusting the firing rate of the machine gun by turning the firing rate adjusting plug (761) by
using the adjusting loop OREAA 6B
2005 08 EN - 188 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.3. CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE FIRING RATE
The following procedure should be carried out after each replacement of the PRP 10000 RDS
in order to check and, if necessary, adjust the firing rate of the machine gun.
Please note that the firing rate increases when the parts of the gun are running in and when the
weapon is hot and that, if necessary, the following procedure can be carried out more frequently.
Firing rate requirement

Between 950 and 1100 rpm but as close as possible to the recommended nominal firing
rate of 1025 rpm.
NOTES : - Before checking and adjusting the firing rate, ensure that the machine gun is
perfectly clean and correctly lubricated and that the headspace (§ 10.4) and the
timing (§ 10.5) are correct.
- As the M3P machine gun has been provided with the sensor (A620), the firing
rate can be determined by using the TBU (Test Box Unit) (min. 15 cartridges) but it
is also possible to use a normal firing rate recording device.
The TBU measures the firing rate taking into account the 12 last time intervals of a 15
round burst because the firing rate becomes steady after the third shot. For this reason,
the TBU measurement is 50 rpm above the measurement of any other rate recording
device based on all the shots. When the firing rate is measured with any other rate
recording device based on all the shots of a 15 round burst, the above recommended
values must be diminished by 50 rpm.
Adjustment of the firing rate

• On the rear part of the back plate group [ 6 ], determine the hole in the regulator tube
(751) with the indexing trunnion (763) (hole ‘a’ on the upper left part of Fig. 10.3.a).
The indexing trunnion (763) is used to hold the firing rate adjusting plug (761) in place so that the
latter is not loosened due to vibrations.
• Take the adjusting loop OREAA 6B and, while orienting it so that its knob (b) will be aligned
with the hole (a), fit the tool onto the rear part of the back plate group [ 6 ] (right part of
Fig. 10.3.a).
Ensure that the inner pins (c) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B correctly engage the holes in the
firing rate adjusting plug (761).
Please note that the action of pressing the knob (b) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B on the middle
part of Fig. 10.3.a is not necessary now, but just illustrates the functioning of the tool.
• While pressing the knob (b) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B in order to push the indexing
trunnion (763) inwards so that it is released from its hole (a), use the tool to turn the firing
rate adjusting plug (761) by 90° in order to correct the firing rate (Fig. 10.3.b).
In order to decrease / increase the firing rate, turn the firing rate adjusting plug (761) by 90° in
the clockwise / counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear side taking into account that
such a 90° turn of the plug corresponds to a change of the firing rate of approx. 20 rpm.
Please note that, after the firing rate adjusting plug (761) has been turned by 90° in any direction,
the indexing trunnion (763) engages the following hole in the regulator tube (751) so that the
plug is again held in place.
• If the firing rate should be corrected by more than 20 rpm, repeat the above step until the
firing rate has been corrected as necessary.
• Remove the adjusting loop OREAA 6B and check if the firing rate is correct.
If, after having turned the firing rate adjusting plug (761) by at least 270° in the same direction,
the firing rate has not changed, check if the back plate group [ 6 ] has been assembled correctly.
2005 08 EN - 189 - Catalog n° 3640084230

A
C
B
Fig. 10.4.a - Adjustment gauges set (911)
a 761
[6] OREAA 6B
OREAA 6B
d
OREAA 6A 451
c
Fig. 10.4.b - Installing the safety rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop OREAA 6B
2005 08 EN - 190 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.4. CHECKING AND GAUGING THE HEADSPACE
With a cartridge present in the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1), the headspace is the
distance between the bottom of the T-slot for the cartridges on the front face of the bolt (411)
and a particular point on the front part of the cartridge case.
This distance is very important as it determines if the weapon functions correctly and in all safety.
A too large headspace can result in :
- Insufficient support of the cartridge at the instant of firing
- Injury to the shooter
- Damage to the locking surfaces of the bolt (411) and the breech lock (155) as they are not
perfectly into contact with each other at the instant of firing
A too small headspace can cause :
- A failure to lock the moving parts
As the headspace cannot be checked directly, it will be checked indirectly by using the
headspace gauge (A) of the adjustment gauges set (911) (Fig. 10.4.a).
The adjustment gauges set (911) also comprises the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate (B) and the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge
plate (C) which are used when carrying out the timing adjustment (refer to § 10.5).
Besides the periodic inspections, the headspace should also be checked and, if necessary,
gauged after having (inadvertently) turned the barrel (110)/(110/1), even slightly, after the
machine gun has been subjected to a disassembly exceeding the field stripping or before
installing the gun into or onto the weapon system.
(a) Checking the headspace
• Ensure that § 4.2. “Safety checks” has been carried out.

• Ensure that the bolt (411) is at its most forward position.
• Ensure that the firing pin (439) is not protruding from its hole in the front face of the
bolt (411).
If, for any reason, the firing pin (439) is protruding from its hole in the front face of the bolt
(411), fit the auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43 onto the bolt stud (451). After that, use the
handle in order to move the moving parts completely rearwards and then to let them return
towards their most forward position resulting in the firing pin to be cocked. Finally, remove the
auxiliary bolt handle.
• Install the safety rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop OREAA 6B by proceeding as
follows (Fig. 10.4.b) :
- While orienting it so that its knob (a) is at the top, fit the adjusting loop OREAA 6B
onto the rear part of the back plate group [ 6 ].
Ensure that the inner pins (b) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B correctly engage the holes in
the firing rate adjusting plug (761).
- At the right side of the machine gun, hook the (front) end of the safety rod
OREAA 6A onto the bolt stud (451).
- Lower the rear end of the safety rod OREAA 6A and ensure that the hub of its
knurled wheel (c) fits into the right support (d) of the adjusting loop OREAA 6B.
If necessary, turn the knurled wheel (c) so that it fits correctly into the support.
2005 08 EN - 191 - Catalog n° 3640084230

c .
OREAA 6A
Fig. 10.4.c - Moving the moving parts rearwards by using the

knurled wheel (c) of the safety rod OREAA 6A
A 110
110/1
411
110
110/1
411
Fig. 10.4.d - Using the headspace gauge (A) of Fig. 10.4.e - Turning the barrel (110)/(110/1) in
the adjustment gauges set (911) order to correct the headspace
2005 08 EN - 192 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.4. CHECKING AND GAUGING THE HEADSPACE (continued)
(a) Checking the headspace (continued)
• Ensure that the machine gun has cooled down.

Never gauge a heated machine gun : it would result in incorrect gauging results.
• Carefully turn the knurled wheel (c) of the safety rod OREAA 6A in the clockwise
direction when viewed from the rear side in order to move the moving parts of the
machine gun rearwards (Fig. 10.4.c).
Turn the knurled wheel (c) until the rear longitudinal (locking) grooves of the barrel (110)/
(110/1) are visible for 2 or 3 mm (also refer to Fig. 10.4.d).
• Check if the GO and the NO GO ends of the headspace gauge (A) of the adjustment
gauges set (911) enter into the space at the front face of the bolt (411) (Fig. 10.4.d).
(b) After the checking procedure
The headspace is correct when the 2 following conditions are fulfilled :
- The GO end of the headspace gauge (A) of the adjustment gauges set (911) enters up
to the ring’s fixing hole into the space at the front face of the bolt (411).
If the GO end cannot enter, move the moving parts rearwards until the rear longitudinal
(locking) grooves of the barrel (110)/(110/1) are completely visible, loosen the barrel by
one click by using a screwdriver (Fig. 10.4.e), move the moving parts back forwards and then
repeat the above checking procedure.
Use the knurled wheel (c) of the safety rod OREAA 6A to move the moving parts.
In order to loosen the barrel (110)/(110/1), turn it in the counterclockwise direction when
viewed from the front side.
- The NO GO end of the headspace gauge (A) of the adjustment gauges set (911) does
not enter into the space at the front face of the bolt (411).
If the NO GO end can enter, move the moving parts rearwards until the rear longitudinal
(locking) grooves of the barrel (110)/(110/1) are completely visible, tighten the barrel by
one click by using a screwdriver (Fig. 10.4.e), move the moving parts back forwards and then
repeat the above checking procedure.
Use the knurled wheel (c) of the safety rod OREAA 6A to move the moving parts.
In order to tighten the barrel (110)/(110/1), turn it in the clockwise direction when viewed
from the front side.
When the headspace is correct, remove the safety rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop
OREAA 6B and then close the feed cover assembly (601).
After having gauged the headspace, it is absolutely necessary to check the timing as
described in § 10.5.
2005 08 EN - 193 - Catalog n° 3640084230

A
C
B
Fig. 10.5.a - Adjustment gauges set (911)
2005 08 EN - 194 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.5. TIMING ADJUSTMENT
A correct timing ensures that the cartridge is not fired too early or too late.
In case of too early firing, the machine gun would operate incorrectly (problems with the extraction of
the cartridges from the ammunition belt, short recoil of the moving parts, ...).
Too late firing could cause serious damage to the front part of the receiver (211), the barrel
extension assembly (150) and the front face of the bolt (411).
The timing will be checked by using the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate (B) and the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate
(C) of the adjustment gauges set (911) (Fig. 10.5.a).
The adjustment gauges set (911) also comprises the headspace gauge (A) which is used when
checking and gauging the headspace (refer to § 10.4).
Besides the periodic inspections, the timing should also be checked and, if necessary, adjusted
after having gauged the headspace, after the machine gun has been subjected to a
disassembly exceeding the field stripping (especially the barrel group [ 1 ], the bolt group [ 3 ]
or the breech lock cam (271)) or before installing the gun into or onto the weapon system.
As the timing of the machine gun is adjusted by modifying the protrusion of the (blocked)
plunger of the energized solenoid (G1), it is especially important to check the timing after any
intervention on the solenoid.
Be aware that the checking of the timing requires electrical power supplied by the
ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) of the corresponding weapon system.
Also be aware that the ABA can only supply power if the weapon system is connected
to its power supply source (carrier, ...) or to the TBU (Test Box Unit).
• Ensure that § 4.2. “Safety checks” has been carried out.
• Ensure that the bolt (411) is at its most forward position.
• Ensure that the firing pin (439) is not protruding from its hole in the front face of the bolt
(411).
If, for any reason, the firing pin (439) is protruding from its hole in the front face of the bolt (411),
fit the auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43 onto the bolt stud (451). After that, use the handle in order
to move the moving parts completely rearwards and then to let them return towards their most
forward position resulting in the firing pin to be cocked. Finally, remove the auxiliary bolt handle.
• Ensure that the weapon system with the ABA which will be used to supply power during the
following checking procedure is correctly connected to a power supply source.
Take into account that there are 2 possibilities : the weapon system can be connected to its power
2005 08 EN - 195 - Catalog n° 3640084230

.
OREAA 43 OREAA 8
Fig. 10.5.b - Moving the moving parts rearwards by using the

auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43
150
Fig. 10.5.c - Using the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate (C) of the adjustment gauges set (911)
289 B C
)
G1
A
D
)
C B
D
(
A671
Fig. 10.5.d - Decreasing the timing
2005 08 EN - 196 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.5. TIMING ADJUSTMENT (continued)
• Using the special cabling OREAA 8, make a connection between the machine gun
connector of the ABA of the weapon system and the connector (A651) at the rear side of
the gun (also refer to Fig. 10.5.b).
• Ensure that the machine gun has cooled down.
Never check the timing on a heated machine gun : it would result in incorrect results.
• Using the auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43, pull the moving parts rearwards by approx.
3 mm and hold them in that position (Fig. 10.5.b).
• Insert the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate (C) of the adjustment gauges set (911) between the
front face of the barrel extension assembly (150) and the inner part of the receiver (211)
(left part of Fig. 10.5.c).
• Let the moving parts return forwards so that the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate (C) is firmly caught
between the front face of the barrel extension assembly (150) and the inner part of the
receiver (211) (right part of Fig. 10.5.c).
• Activate the solenoid (G1) of the M3P machine gun : the firing pin (439) must not
operate (it must not protrude from its hole in the front face of the bolt (411)).
For activating the solenoid (G1), and depending on the power supply source (see above), there
are 2 possibilities :
1. The power for the weapon system is supplied by its power supply source (carrier, ...)
Proceed as described in the weapon system documentation for activating the solenoid (G1).
2. The power for the weapon system is supplied by the TBU
Proceed as described in the Operator’s Manual of the TBU for activating the solenoid (G1).
If the firing pin (439) does not operate in combination with the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate (C),
proceed to the following step.
Otherwise, proceed as follows :
- Remove the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate (C).
- Remove the protective cover (A691) as described in § 9.7.1.
- Using the cutting pliers UT 1814, remove the lockwires (289) which secure the upper
front and lower rear screws of the solenoid (G1) (lockwires ‘B’ on the left part of
Fig. 10.5.d).
Do not touch the lockwires ‘A’ and ‘C’ (also refer to § 2.2.7 and/or to § 9.7.2).
- Using a screwdriver, slightly loosen the upper front and lower rear screws of the
solenoid (G1), just enough to be able to release and disengage the locking plates ‘D’,
and then disengage the locking plates (right part of Fig. 10.5.d).
- Decrease the timing by turning the central part of the solenoid (G1) by one step in the
clockwise direction when viewed from the left side (right part of Fig. 10.5.d).
This causes (for an energized solenoid (G1)) the protrusion of its (blocked) plunger to be
moved slightly towards the left side.
- Re-engage the locking plates ‘D’ and then tighten their screws.
- Using the auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43, move the moving parts of the machine gun
completely rearwards and then let them return towards their most forward position in
order to recock the firing pin (439) (let it return into its hole in the bolt (411)).
- Repeat the above check until the firing pin (439) does not operate anymore in
combination with the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate (C).
It is important that, between 2 checks, a gauge plate is always removed and then reinstalled.
2005 08 EN - 197 - Catalog n° 3640084230

B
150
Fig. 10.5.e - Using the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate (B) of the adjustment gauges set (911)
289 B C
)
G1
(
A
D
C B
D
(
A671
Fig. 10.5.f - Increasing the timing
2005 08 EN - 198 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.5. TIMING ADJUSTMENT (continued)
• Using the auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43, pull the moving parts rearwards by approx.
3 mm and hold them in that position.
• Replace the ‘NO FIRE’ gauge plate (C) of the adjustment gauges set (911) by the ‘FIRE’
gauge plate (B) (left part of Fig. 10.5.e).
• Let the moving parts return forwards so that the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate (B) is firmly caught
between the front face of the barrel extension assembly (150) and the inner part of the
receiver (211) (right part of Fig. 10.5.e).
• Activate the solenoid (G1) of the M3P machine gun (see before) : the firing pin (439)
must operate (it must protrude from its hole in the front face of the bolt (411)).
If the firing pin (439) operates in combination with the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate (B), proceed to
the following step (the adjustment procedure is terminated).
Otherwise, proceed as follows :
- Remove the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate (B).
- If not already done, remove the protective cover (A691) as described in § 9.7.1.
- If not already done, and using the cutting pliers UT 1814, remove the lockwires (289)
which secure the upper front and lower rear screws of the solenoid (G1) (lockwires ‘B’
on the left part of Fig. 10.5.f).
Do not touch the lockwires ‘A’ and ‘C’ (also refer to § 2.2.7 and/or to § 9.7.2).
- Using a screwdriver, slightly loosen the upper front and lower rear screws of the
solenoid (G1), just enough to be able to release and disengage the locking plates ‘D’,
and then disengage the locking plates (right part of Fig. 10.5.f).
- Increase the timing by turning the central part of the solenoid (G1) by one step in the
counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side (right part of Fig. 10.5.f).
This causes (for an energized solenoid (G1)) the protrusion of its (blocked) plunger to be
moved slightly towards the right side.
- Re-engage the locking plates ‘D’ and then tighten their screws.
- Repeat the above check until the firing pin (439) operates in combination with the
‘FIRE’ gauge plate (B).
It is important that, between 2 checks, a gauge plate is always removed and then reinstalled.
• Remove the ‘FIRE’ gauge plate (B) of the adjustment gauges set (911).
• If they have been removed, reinstall (new) lockwires ‘B’ and the protective cover (A691).
The pieces of lockwire ‘B’ should be installed as shown in the left part of Fig. 10.5.f and so that
tension is applied to them when the corresponding screws tend to unscrew.
• Disconnect the M3P machine gun from the corresponding connector of the ABA.
• If necessary, disconnect the weapon system from its power supply source.
• After a successful checking of the timing, the firing pin (439) is protruding from its hole in
the front face of the bolt (411).
If, for any reason, it is necessary to recock the firing pin (439), use the auxiliary bolt handle
OREAA 43 to move the moving parts of the machine gun completely rearwards and then to
let them return towards their most forward position.
Please note that it is not absolutely necessary to carry out this step.
2005 08 EN - 199 - Catalog n° 3640084230

a
OREAA 27
Fig. 10.6.a - Checking the power inside the sensor tester OREAA 27
OREAA 27 b
411
A651 451
460
Fig. 10.6.b - Checking the operation of the sensor (A620)
2005 08 EN - 200 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.6. CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE SENSOR (A620)
The sensor (A620) has been provided to detect the passage of the moving parts of the machine
gun.
10.6.1. Electrical check of the sensor (A620)
The following (electrical) checking procedure should periodically be carried out in order to
check the output of the (inductive proximity) sensor (A620).
(a) Checking the power inside the sensor tester OREAA 27
Check if the red LED (a) of the sensor tester OREAA 27 lights up when the button of the
tester is pressed (Fig. 10.6.a).
If so, this means that the power inside the sensor tester OREAA 27 is OK.
If the red LED (a) does not light up or if its illumination is weak, this means that the battery of the
sensor tester OREAA 27 should be replaced.
(b) Checking the operation of the sensor (A620)
• Release and remove the back plate group [ 6 ] as described for ‘field stripping’ in
§ 7.1.
• Release the return spring assembly (460) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
Please note that, for the following checking procedure, it is only necessary to release the
return spring assembly (460) and not to remove it.
• Connect the connector of the sensor tester OREAA 27 to the connector (A651) at the
rear side of the machine gun.
• While moving the moving parts of the machine gun back and forth by using the bolt
stud (451) and while pressing the button of the sensor tester OREAA 27, check if the
green LED (b) of the tester lights up when the bolt (411) passes by the sensor (A620)
(Fig. 10.6.b).
If so, the sensor (A620) operates correctly.
If not, check if the problem is solved by checking and, if necessary, adjusting the position of
the sensor (A620) as described in the following § 10.6.2. If the problem persists, the sensor
should be replaced.
• Disconnect the sensor tester OREAA 27 from the machine gun.
2005 08 EN - 201 - Catalog n° 3640084230

997
997
211 211
Checking with the GO end of the gauge Checking with the NO GO end of the gauge
Fig. 10.6.c - Checking the position of the sensor (A620) by using the sensor locating gauge (997)
997
A620
A632
UT 1032
A620 .
Fig. 10.6.d - Adjusting the position of the sensor (A620)
2005 08 EN - 202 - Catalog n° 3640084230

10.6. CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE SENSOR (A620) (continued)
10.6.2. Checking and, if necessary, adjusting the position of the sensor (A620)
The following procedure should periodically be carried out in order to check and, if necessary,
adjust the position of the sensor (A620).
(a) Checking the position of the sensor (A620)
• Remove the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector
assembly (480) as described for ‘field stripping’ in § 7.1.
• Check if the GO end of the sensor locating gauge (997) passes over the sensor (A620)
when the gauge is fitted, from the rear side, into the corresponding groove at the inner
side of the left side plate of the receiver (211) (left part of Fig. 10.6.c).
Repeat this operation with the NO GO end of the sensor locating gauge (997) (right
part of Fig. 10.6.c).
If the GO end of the sensor locating gauge (997) passes over the sensor (A620)
and the NO GO end is blocked by it, the sensor is positioned correctly.
Terminate the adjustment procedure by reassembling the machine gun.
If the GO end of the sensor locating gauge (997) is blocked by the sensor (A620) or
the NO GO end passes over the sensor, the position of the sensor should be
adjusted as described in the following § 10.6.2 (b).
(b) Adjusting the position of the sensor (A620)
This adjusting procedure should only be carried out if required by the previous § 10.6.2 (a).
• Using the combination wrench UT 1032, slightly unscrew the nut (A632) in order to
release the pressure of the locking pin (A631) onto the sensor (A620) (upper left part of
Fig. 10.6.d).
Unscrew the nut (A632) until the sensor (A620) can freely move sidewards.
• Fit the sensor locating gauge (997), in the ‘SET’ condition and from the rear side, into
the corresponding groove at the inner side of the left side plate of the receiver (211),
align the mark on the gauge with the rear end of the receiver (211) and then hold the
gauge in that position (upper right part of Fig. 10.6.d).
• From the outside, carefully move the sensor (A620) inwards until its right end comes
into contact with the sensor locating gauge (997) (lower right part of Fig. 10.6.d).
• Tighten the nut (A632).
When tightening the nut (A632), be careful not to damage the sensor (A620).
• Terminate the adjusting procedure by checking the operation of the sensor (A620) as
described in § 10.6.1 (b).
2005 08 EN - 203 - Catalog n° 3640084230

Before any inspection or adjustment, ensure that the machine gun is perfectly clean.
11.1. RECEPTION OF AN INCORRECT FUNCTIONING MACHINE GUN

If the operator of the weapon system notices problems when firing or if the moving parts of the
machine gun do not correctly return towards their most rearward position, the machine gun
should be sent to the workshop for checking.
In such a case, proceed as follows :
• Carry out a visual inspection in order to ensure that all the basic safety precautions (security
pin assembly (260), safety rod OREAA 6A with adjusting loop OREAA 6B and/or clamping
screw OREA 869) have been taken.
• Inspect the machine gun (refer to the following § 11.2).
• Once the problem has been found and/or solved, remove the clamping screw OREA 869.
Using the clamping screw OREA 869 causes deformation of the firing pin (439) so that the latter
must be replaced by a new one (see further) !!
• Record the firing details as well as the relevant observations in the logbook.
• Ensure that the components of the machine gun are clean and that they function correctly.
• Replace the firing pin (439) (also refer to § 9.3.7).
• Check and, if necessary, adjust the headspace and the timing according to § 10.4 and
§ 10.5.
• Check and, if necessary, adjust the position of the sensor (A620) according to § 10.6.2.
• Carry out the ‘safety checks’ as described in § 4.2.
2005 08 EN - 204 - Catalog n° 3640084230

11.2. TYPICAL PROBLEMS
Failure to feed ---> • Incorrectly positioned ---> Correct the position of the
ammunition belt ammunition belt
• Incorrectly assembled ---> Use a correctly assembled

ammunition belt ammunition belt
• Damaged cartridge(s) and/ ---> Remove the corresponding

or links cartridge(s) and/or link(s) from
the ammunition belt
• Soiling, oxidation or ---> Clean the chamber. If

scratches in the chamber necessary, replace the barrel
(110)/(110/1)
Failure to feed ---> • Link jam ---> Check link chute adapter
(gun stops firing with recoiling assembly (250)
parts out of battery position)
• Headspace too tight ---> Check headspace. If
headspace is incorrect, check
the barrel locking spring (161)
for fracture, weakness or worn
projection. Adjust headspace
(§ 10.4)
• Breech block cam (271) too ---> Check the breech block cam
tight, causing binding of clearance
barrel extension in guides of
the cam
• Ruptured cartridge case ---> Remove the cartridge and

check the headspace
Failure to feed ---> • Belt feed lever (641) bent or ---> Replace the belt feed lever
(gun stops firing in battery broken due to broken belt (641) and the pawl arm (629)
position and empty chamber) feed pawl arm (629)
• Belt feed pawl springs (631) ---> Replace the belt feed pawl
and/or (632) weak or broken springs (631) and (632)
• Extractor (C1) may be worn ---> Replace the extractor (C1)

or broken
Failure to lock ---> Too small headspace ---> Check headspace (§ 10.4)
2005 08 EN - 205 - Catalog n° 3640084230

11.2. TYPICAL PROBLEMS (continued)
Failure to fire ---> • Obstruction by coppering of ---> Maintain moving parts

firing pin hole in bolt (411) backwards by cocking actuator
due to overheated at the end of a firing sequence
ammunition remaining in
chamber during a too long
time
• Dirt or excess oil in firing pin ---> Remove and lubricate the
extension assembly (440) corresponding spring
may congeal at low
temperatures causing light-
struck primer
• Firing pin spring (448) weak ---> Replace the firing pin spring
or broken causing light- (448)
struck primer
• Firing pin (439) fails to ---> Check timing (§ 10.5)

release
• Defective cartridge ---> Remove cartridge
• Broken sear (415) or sear ---> Replace the sear (415) or the
spring (416) sear spring (416)
• Broken, worn, defective firing ---> Replace the firing pin (439)
pin (439)
• Electrical problem ---> Check the solenoid (G1) and

the connector
• M3P security pin (260) still ---> Remove the security pin (260)
inserted
Failure to extract the cartridge ---> • Soiling, oxidation or ---> Clean the chamber. If
from the chamber scratches in the chamber necessary, replace the barrel
(110)/(110/1)
• Broken case in chamber ---> Remove the cartridge
• Too large headspace ---> Check headspace (§ 10.4)
Failure to eject cartridge ---> • Defective ejector (485) ---> Replace the ejector (485)
• Defective cartridge ---> Unload and reload the

machine gun
2005 08 EN - 206 - Catalog n° 3640084230

11.2. TYPICAL PROBLEMS (continued)
Broken barrel extension shank ---> Gun firing out of battery due to ---> Correct assembly of firing pin
firing pin retaining pin not and extension assembly.
being installed during assembly Replace the barrel extension
of firing pin and extension assembly
assembly
Battered accelerator (535) ---> Gun firing out of battery due to ---> Correct assembly of firing pin
being installed during assembly Replace the accelerator (535)
of firing pin and extension
assembly
Warped cover ---> Gun firing out of battery due to ---> Correct assembly of firing pin
being installed during assembly Replace the cover
assembly
Ruptured cartridge case ---> Gun firing out of battery due to ---> Correct assembly of firing pin
being installed during assembly Remove the cartridge
assembly
Wrong counting of fired ---> Sensor failure or wrong ---> Check and adjust the position
ammunitions position of sensor of the sensor or replace the
sensor if malfunction remains
Automatic recocking ---> Sensor failure or wrong ---> Check and adjust the position
position of sensor of the sensor or replace the
sensor if malfunction remains
Too high dispersion of firing ---> Worn barrel (110)/(110/1) ---> Replace the barrel
(110)/(110/1)
2005 08 EN - 207 - Catalog n° 3640084230

411
1073
Fig. 11.a - Fitting the ruptured case extractor (1073) into the T-
slot on the front face of the bolt (411)
1073
Fig. 11.b - Pushing the ruptured case extractor (1073) into the
chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1)
1073
Fig. 11.c - Extracting the ruptured cartridge case from the

chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1)
2005 08 EN - 208 - Catalog n° 3640084230

11.3. REMOVAL OF A RUPTURED CARTRIDGE CASE
Too large headspace, defective ammunition, excessive soiling or wear of the chamber of the barrel
(110)/(110/1), ... can cause the rupture of a cartridge case, often resulting in an explosion of the
cartridge at the instant of firing.
As a ruptured cartridge case is normally noticed as a problem by the operator of the weapon
system, it is assumed that the M3P machine gun has already been provided with the safety rod
OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop OREAA 6B and that it has been removed from the weapon
system.
Please note that, in the exceptional case that the safety rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop
OREAA 6B have not been provided, the moving parts of the M3P machine gun can also be moved by
means of the auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43.
Carrying out the following procedure with the auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43 instead of the safety
rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop OREAA 6B is much more dangerous so that it is recommended
that this way of working is only carried out by experienced armourers.
Use the ruptured case extractor (1073) by proceeding as follows :
• If not already done, open the feed cover assembly (601) by turning the feed cover latch
shaft (653).
• Ensure that the safety rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop OREAA 6B were able to move
the moving parts of the M3P machine gun at least so far rearwards that there is enough
space to fit the ruptured case extractor (1073) between the front face of the bolt (411) and
the rear end of the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1).
If not, inspect the machine gun (also refer to § 11.2).
• Fit the ruptured case extractor (1073) with its rear end into the T-slot for the cartridges on
the front face of the bolt (411) (Fig. 11.a).
• Using the knurled wheel of the safety rod OREAA 6A, let the moving parts return forwards
so that the bolt (411) pushes the ruptured case extractor (1073) into the chamber of the
barrel (110)/(110/1) (Fig. 11.b).
During this operation, ensure that the ruptured case extractor (1073) is and remains correctly
aligned with the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1).
• While moving the moving parts of the M3P machine gun again rearwards by using the
knurled wheel of the safety rod OREAA 6A, ensure that the remaining parts of the cartridge
case are extracted from the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1) (Fig. 11.c).
If it is impossible to extract the (ruptured) cartridge case by using the ruptured case extractor
(1073) in combination with the safety rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop OREAA 6B, taking
into account the remark given above and being aware that this procedure represents some
danger, remove the safety tools, the back plate group [ 6 ] as well as the return spring assembly
(460) and then try if it is possible to extract the case by using the ruptured case extractor in
combination with the auxiliary bolt handle OREAA 43.
If it is still impossible to remove the cartridge case from the chamber of the barrel (110)/(110/1),
replace the barrel.
• Remove the safety rod OREAA 6A and the adjusting loop OREAA 6B.
2005 08 EN - 209 - Catalog n° 3640084230

412
411
Fig. 12.1.a - Installing the bolt switches (412) for right-hand feeding
411 413
Fig. 12.1.b - Securing the bolt switches (412) by means of the

spring pins (413)
.
485
485 485
.
a 491
487
487
486
C1 486
486
Fig. 12.1.c - Reassembling the extractor/ejector assembly (480) for right-hand feeding
2005 08 EN - 210 - Catalog n° 3640084230

12.1. CHANGING THE MACHINE GUN FROM LEFT-HAND TO RIGHT-

HAND FEEDING
NOTE : Changing the machine gun from left-hand to right-hand feeding does not require
new components.
12.1.1. Interventions on the bolt group [ 3 ]

• Remove the bolt switches (412) as described in § 9.3.2.
• Insert the bolt switches (412) into the appropriate holes in order to obtain a continuous
groove facing the inscription ‘R’ on the upper side of the bolt (411) (Fig. 12.1.a).
• Secure the 2 bolt switches (412) by manually inserting, from any side, the 2 (new) spring
pins (413) as far as possible into their housings in the bolt (411).
The 2 spring pins (413) should not protrude after they have been reinstalled. If necessary, use a
sufficiently wide drift punch to push the spring pins completely home.
• Take the extractor/ejector assembly (480) and then remove the ejector (485) from the
extractor (C1) as described in § 9.3.8.
During this operation, it is recommended not to push the ejector axis (486) completely out of
the extractor (C1) (also refer to the explanations given in § 9.3.8).
• Reassemble the extractor/ejector assembly (480) for right-hand feeding by proceeding as

follows (Fig. 12.1.c) :
- With the ejector (485) oriented so that its claw (a) is at the left side, insert it, together with
its spring (487) into their housing in the bottom of the extractor (C1).
The ejector spring (487) must be fitted into the left inner spring housing of the extractor (C1).
Please note that, as the extractor (C1) is held upside down, the ejector spring (487) must be
inserted into the housing which is presently at the right side.
- Against the force of the ejector spring (487), align the hole in the ejector (485) with the
ejector axis (486) and then, from the rear side and, if necessary, using the drift punch
UT 2012, push the ejector axis (486) fully home.
It is assumed that the ejector axis (486) has not been removed nor turned. Otherwise, turn or
reinstall the axis and ensure that the notch allows a correct passage of the spring pin (491)
(refer to § 9.3.8).
- From the right side, insert the (new) spring pin (491) into its housing in the extractor (C1)
and then, using the drift punch UT 2012, push it fully home.
• Reinstall the extractor/ejector assembly (480) as described in § 9.3.1.
• Reinstall the assembly formed by the bolt assembly (410) and the extractor/ejector assembly
2005 08 EN - 211 - Catalog n° 3640084230

636
629
b d
621
631 635
c
632
Fig. 12.1.d - Reassembly of the belt feed slide assembly (620) for a right-hand fed machine gun
641
610
g
641
642
f e
643
Fig. 12.1.e - Installation of the belt feed lever (641) for a right-hand fed machine gun
2005 08 EN - 212 - Catalog n° 3640084230

HAND FEEDING (continued)
12.1.2. Interventions on the feed cover group [ 5 ]
• Disassemble the belt feed slide assembly (620) as described in § 9.5.4.
• Reassemble the inner and outer belt feed pawl springs (631) and (632).
• Fit the belt feed pawl (621), oriented as shown in the left part of Fig. 12.1.d and together
with the assembly formed by the inner and outer belt feed pawl springs (631) and (632),
into the belt feed slide (635).
One of the extremities of the spring assembly should correctly engage its housing in the belt feed
pawl (621) while the other extremity of the spring assembly should correctly fit onto the pin
provided on the belt feed slide (635).
• While pressing on the belt feed pawl (621), align the hole in the pawl with the holes of the
belt feed slide (635) and then, from any side, reinstall the pin (636) by inserting it through
the aligned holes (Fig. 12.1.d).
The pin (636) must be installed with its groove (b) at the rear side and should not protrude after it
has been reinstalled.
• Using a pointed tool such as a drift punch, push the pin (c) of the belt feed pawl (621)
inwards and then reinstall the belt feed pawl arm (629).
The fork-shaped extremity of the belt feed pawl arm (629) must correctly engage the groove (b) of
the pin (636) while the central hole (d) of the arm must correctly fit onto the pin (c) of the belt feed
pawl (621).
• Reinstall the belt feed lever (641) by proceeding as follows (Fig. 12.1.e) :
- Fit the correctly oriented belt feed lever (641) onto the mounting pin (e) of the feed cover
(610).
- Lightly lubricate the belt feed lever plunger (643) and its spring (642).
- Fit the belt feed lever plunger (643) into its spring (642) and then insert this assembly,
with the spring first, into the housing (f) in the belt feed lever (641) just before this
housing is at the same height of the edge of the feed cover (610) when sliding the belt
feed lever back onto the mounting pin (e).
Hold the belt feed lever plunger (643) in place with a screwdriver.
Please note that, for a right-hand fed machine gun, the housing (f) in the belt feed lever (641)
is used while the hole (g) was used for a left-hand fed machine gun.
- Push the belt feed lever (641) completely onto the mounting pin (e).
2005 08 EN - 213 - Catalog n° 3640084230

641 620
615
616
610
Fig. 12.1.f - Installation of the belt feed slide assembly (620) for a right-hand fed machine gun
B1 219
219
221 222
212
Fig. 12.1.g - Installation of the belt holding pawls assembly (B1) and the feed tray (212) for a right-hand
fed machine gun
222
250 221
Fig. 12.1.h - Installation of the links chute assembly (250) for a right-hand fed machine gun
2005 08 EN - 214 - Catalog n° 3640084230

HAND FEEDING (continued)
12.1.2. Interventions on the feed cover group [ 5 ] (continued)

• Reinstall the belt feed slide assembly (620) by proceeding as follows (Fig. 12.1.f) :
- Insert the belt feed slide assembly (620) into its housing in the feed cover (610).
The belt feed slide assembly (620) should be reinstalled so that the belt feed pawl arm (629) is
at the rear side when the feed cover assembly (601) is closed and that the front end of the belt
feed lever (641) correctly engages into the corresponding notch of the assembly.
- Secure the belt feed slide assembly (620) by reinstalling the belt feed slide retainer (615)
and fixing the latter by means of the pin (616).
The belt feed slide retainer (615) should be oriented so that its profiled edge is facing forwards
and the pin (616) should not protrude after it has been reinstalled.
12.1.3. Interventions on the ammunition feeding and ejection section

• If not already done, open the feed cover assembly (601) by turning the feed cover latch
shaft (653).
• At the left side of the machine gun, remove the belt holding pawls assembly (B1) as well as
the feed tray (212) as described in § 9.2.1.
• At the right side of the machine gun, remove and disassemble the links chute assembly
(250) as described in § 9.2.3 and § 9.2.4.
• At the right side of the machine gun, install the belt holding pawls assembly (B1), together
with the 2 pawl springs (219) and the feed tray (212), onto the mounting support of the
ammunition feeding and ejection section (left part of Fig. 12.1.g).
One of the extremities of each pawl spring (219) should correctly engage one of the holes of the
mounting support while the other extremity of the spring should correctly enter into the hole in the
bottom of the corresponding belt holding pawl.
Ensure that the feed tray (212) is oriented correctly and that it is installed into the correct mounting
slots.
• While pressing on the belt holding pawls assembly (B1), align its hole with the holes in the
mounting support and then, from the rear side, push one of the axes (221) into the aligned
holes and completely home (Fig. 12.1.g).
• Using pliers, secure the axis (221) by inserting one of the locking pins (222) into the hole at
its front end.
• Proceeding as described in § 9.2.4, reassemble the links chute assembly (250) for right-
hand feeding (opposite to left-hand feeding, also refer to the assembly represented in the
left part of Fig. 12.1.h).
• At the left side of the machine gun, install the links chute assembly (250) onto the mounting
support of the ammunition feeding and ejection section (Fig. 12.1.h).
• Align the holes in the links chute assembly (250) with the holes in the mounting support and
then, from the rear side, push the remaining axis (221) into the aligned holes and
completely home (Fig. 12.1.h).
• Using pliers, secure the axis (221) by inserting the remaining locking pin (222) into the hole
at its front end.
2005 08 EN - 215 - Catalog n° 3640084230

415
416
431
491
434
487
905/85
Fig. 13.1.a - “PRP 2500 RDS” (905/85) for the M3P machine gun
2005 08 EN - 216 - Catalog n° 3640084230

13.1. LISTS OF PERIODICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS (PRP)
13.1.1. “PRP 2500 RDS” (905/85) for the M3P machine gun (Fig. 13.1.a)
Qty Fig.
set lists
415 Sear 1 2.d

416 Spring, sear 1 2.d
431 Slide, sear 1 2.d
434 Spring-type straight pin, coiled, standard duty (*) 1 2.d
487 Spring, ejector 1 2.d
(*) The parts (434) and (491) are identical
2005 08 EN - 217 - Catalog n° 3640084230

412 413
415
2x
2x
431
416
905/80
421
433 434
439
432
435
447
445 448
449
485
483 487 491

486
Fig. 13.1.b - “PRP 5000 RDS” (905/80) for the M3P machine gun
2005 08 EN - 218 - Catalog n° 3640084230

13.1. LISTS OF PERIODICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS (PRP) (continued)
13.1.2. “PRP 5000 RDS” (905/80) for the M3P machine gun (Fig. 13.1.b)
Qty Fig.
set lists
412 Switch, bolt, alternate feed 2 2.d

413 Spring-type straight pin, coiled, standard duty 2 2.d
415 Sear 1 2.d
421 Lever, cocking 1 2.d
432 Stop pin, sear slide 1 2.d
433 Axis, cocking lever 1 2.d
435 Stop, firing pin extension spring assembly 1 2.d
439 Pin, firing 1 2.d
445 Pin, retaining firing pin 1 2.d
447 Extension, firing pin 1 2.d
448 Spring, pin firing 1 2.d
483 Retaining spring, extractor 1 2.d
485 Ejector 1 2.d
486 Axis, ejector 1 2.d
2005 08 EN - 219 - Catalog n° 3640084230

212
110 2x
219
250 232
236
2x
412
413
2x
416
415
431
434
411
421
433 435
432
439 447
445
448 905/81
460
481
491
449
487
451
485 753
752 754
757 758
486 24x 755
642 763 771 772

764
Fig. 13.1.c - “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/81) for the M3P machine gun with standard flash-hider
2005 08 EN - 220 - Catalog n° 3640084230

flash-hider (Fig. 13.1.c)
Qty Fig.
set lists
110 Barrel, stellite, proved, spare 1 2.b

212 Feed tray 1 2.c.1
219 Spring, pawl 2 2.c.1
232 Spring, extractor switch 1 2.c.1
236 Spring, safety, extractor cam nut 1 2.c.1
250 Adapter, links chute assembly 1 2.c.1
411 Bolt spare subassembly 1 2.d
415 Sear 1 2.d
451 Stud, bolt 1 2.d
460 Rod, driving spring and spring assembly 1 2.d
481 Extractor subassembly 1 2.d
485 Ejector 1 2.d
642 Spring, belt feed lever plunger 1 2.f
752 Plug, regulator 1 2.g
753 Set of setting washers 1 2.g
754 Washer, spring, regulator 24 2.g
755 Spring regulator 1 2.g
757 Brake regulator 1 2.g
2005 08 EN - 221 - Catalog n° 3640084230

212
110 2x
219
250 232
236
2x
412
413
2x
416
415
431
434
411
421
433 435
432
439 447
445
448 905/81
460
481
491
449
487
451
485 753
752 754
757 758
486 24x 755
642 763 771 772

764
Fig. 13.1.c - “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/81) for the M3P machine gun with standard flash-hider
2005 08 EN - 222 - Catalog n° 3640084230

flash-hider (Fig. 13.1.c) (continued)
Qty Fig.
set lists
758 Washer set, brake, regulator 1 2.g

763 Trunnion, indexing, plug adjusting (-) 1 2.g
764 Spring, trunnion indexing (/) 1 2.g
(-) The parts (763) and (771) are identical

(/) The parts (764) and (772) are identical
2005 08 EN - 223 - Catalog n° 3640084230

212
110/1 2x
219
250 232
236
2x
412
413
2x
416
415
431
434
411
421
433 435
432
439 447
445
448 905/83
460
481
491
449
487
451
485 753
752 754
757 758
486 24x 755
642 763 771 772

764
Fig. 13.1.d - “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/83) for the M3P machine gun with GFH
2005 08 EN - 224 - Catalog n° 3640084230

13.1.4. “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/83) for the M3P machine gun with GFH (Guided
blast effect Flash-Hider) (Fig. 13.1.d)
Qty Fig.
set lists
110/1 Barrel, stellite, proved, spare, heavy type 1 2.b

415 Sear 1 2.d
485 Ejector 1 2.d
2005 08 EN - 225 - Catalog n° 3640084230

212
110/1 2x
219
250 232
236
2x
412
413
2x
416
415
431
434
411
421
433 435
432
439 447
445
448 905/83
460
481
491
449
487
451
485 753
752 754
757 758
486 24x 755
642 763 771 772

764
Fig. 13.1.d - “PRP 10000 RDS” (905/83) for the M3P machine gun with GFH
2005 08 EN - 226 - Catalog n° 3640084230

blast effect Flash-Hider) (Fig. 13.1.d) (continued)
Qty Fig.
set lists


2005 08 EN - 227 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2x
212
110 219
232
236
250
413
2x
412
411
2x
416
415
421
434
431
433
435 432
447
460
439
448
445
449
481
487
451
486
491 641 905/82
642
485
752 753 754
757 758
24x 755
763 771 772

530 764
Fig. 13.1.e - “PRP 20000 RDS” (905/82) for the M3P machine gun with standard flash-hider
2005 08 EN - 228 - Catalog n° 3640084230

flash-hider (Fig. 13.1.e)
Qty Fig.
set lists
110 Barrel, stellite, proved, spare 1 2.b

415 Sear 1 2.d
485 Ejector 1 2.d
530 Body, barrel buffer assembly 1 2.e
641 Lever, feed, belt 1 2.f
2005 08 EN - 229 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2x
212
110 219
232
236
250
413
2x
412
411
2x
416
415
421
434
431
433
435 432
447
460
439
448
445
449
481
487
451
486
491 641 905/82
642
485
752 753 754
757 758
24x 755
763 771 772

530 764
Fig. 13.1.e - “PRP 20000 RDS” (905/82) for the M3P machine gun with standard flash-hider
2005 08 EN - 230 - Catalog n° 3640084230

flash-hider (Fig. 13.1.e) (continued)
Qty Fig.
set lists


2005 08 EN - 231 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2x
212
110/1 219
232
236
250
413
2x
412
411
2x
416
415
421
434
431
433
435 432
447
460
439
448
445
449
481
487
451
486
491 641 905/84
642
485
752 753 754
757 758
24x 755
763 771 772

530 764
Fig. 13.1.f - “PRP 20000 RDS” (905/84) for the M3P machine gun with GFH
2005 08 EN - 232 - Catalog n° 3640084230

blast effect Flash-Hider) (Fig. 13.1.f)
Qty Fig.
set lists
110/1 Barrel, stellite, proved, spare, heavy type 1 2.b

415 Sear 1 2.d
485 Ejector 1 2.d
530 Body, barrel buffer assembly 1 2.e
641 Lever, feed, belt 1 2.f
2005 08 EN - 233 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2x
212
110/1 219
232
236
250
413
2x
412
411
2x
416
415
421
434
431
433
435 432
447
460
439
448
445
449
481
487
451
486
491 641 905/84
642
485
752 753 754
757 758
24x 755
763 771 772

530 764
Fig. 13.1.f - “PRP 20000 RDS” (905/84) for the M3P machine gun with GFH
2005 08 EN - 234 - Catalog n° 3640084230

blast effect Flash-Hider) (Fig. 13.1.f) (continued)
Qty Fig.
set lists


2005 08 EN - 235 - Catalog n° 3640084230

216
2x 156 217
155 212
2x
218
4x
221 232
2x
219
4x
2x
257
4x 235
222
236 367
4x
280 2x
368
413 4x
411 416
4x 4x
431 4x 415
4x 4x
433
421
432 10x
2x
4x
434
445
2x
480 5x
460 439
2x
2x
451
2x
536 905/123
601
A601
661 7x
662 A693
A695
750 16x
5x
763 3x
764 5x
3x A694 A696
Fig. 13.2.a - “Short-term RRP” (905/123) for the M3P machine gun
2005 08 EN - 236 - Catalog n° 3640084230

13.2. LISTS OF RANDOM REPLACEMENT PARTS (RRP)
13.2.1. “Short-term RRP” (905/123) for the M3P machine gun (Fig. 13.2.a)
Qty Fig.
set lists
155 Lock, breech 2 2.b

156 Pin assembly, breech lock 2 2.b
216 Pawl, belt holding, left-hand 1 2.c.1
217 Pawl, belt holding, right-hand 1 2.c.1
218 Sleeve, belt holding pawl 1 2.c.1
221 Axis, fixing pawls 2 2.c.1
222 Pin, locking 2 2.c.1
235 Nut, rear cam, extractor 4 2.c.1
257 Lockwire MS 9226-04 L=300mm 1 2.c.1
280 Solenoid assembly 1 2.h
367 Lock, securing flash-hider 1 2.c.2
368 Adjusting screw, securing flash-hider 2 2.c.2
415 Sear 4 2.d
480 Extractor, assembly 2 2.d
536 Pin, accelerator 2 2.e
601 Feed cover assembly 1 2.f
661 Pin, cover axis 1 2.f
662 Split pin 1 2.f
750 Regulator, back plate assembly 1 2.g
763 Trunnion, indexing, plug adjusting 3 2.g
764 Spring, trunnion indexing 3 2.g
A601 Sensor assembly 1 2.h
2005 08 EN - 237 - Catalog n° 3640084230

216
2x 156 217
155 212
2x
218
4x
221 232
2x
219
4x
2x
257
4x 235
222
236 367
4x
280 2x
368
413 4x
411 416
4x 4x
431 4x 415
4x 4x
433
421
432 10x
2x
4x
434
445
2x
480 5x
460 439
2x
2x
451
2x
536 905/123
601
A601
661 7x
662 A693
A695
750 16x
5x
763 3x
764 5x
3x A694 A696
Fig. 13.2.a - “Short-term RRP” (905/123) for the M3P machine gun
2005 08 EN - 238 - Catalog n° 3640084230

13.2.1. “Short-term RRP” (905/123) for the M3P machine gun (Fig. 13.2.a)
(continued)
Qty Fig.
set lists
A693 Screw, retracting slide bracket (short) 7 2.h

A694 Pin, cover, locking (long) 5 2.h
A695 Pin, safety 5 2.h
A696 Spring washer 16 2.h
2005 08 EN - 239 - Catalog n° 3640084230

216
217 218 221
155 2x
2x
219 2x
156
231 232 235 236 222
257
272 3x
271 367
274 362 363
2x
273 368
413
416
412 2x
411
415
2x
421
432 434
431 435
433
439
440
460 445
480
451 905/125
643
536
661 715 642
716 723
662 717
721
722
731
764
A695
7x
8x
763
A693 A694
A696
Fig. 13.2.b - “Long-term RRP” (905/125) for the M3P machine gun
2005 08 EN - 240 - Catalog n° 3640084230

13.2.2. “Long-term RRP” (905/125) for the M3P machine gun (Fig. 13.2.b)
Qty Fig.
set lists
155 Lock, breech 1 2.b

156 Pin assembly, breech lock 1 2.b
216 Pawl, belt holding, left-hand 1 2.c.1
217 Pawl, belt holding, right-hand 1 2.c.1
218 Sleeve, belt holding pawl 1 2.c.1
221 Axis, fixing pawls 2 2.c.1
222 Pin, locking 2 2.c.1
231 Switch, extractor 1 2.c.1
235 Nut, rear cam, extractor 1 2.c.1
257 Lockwire MS 9226-04 L=300mm 1 2.c.1
271 Cam, breech lock 1 2.c.1
272 Screw, breech lock cam 1 2.c.1
273 Nut, locking cam 1 2.c.1
274 Pin, cotter 1 2.c.1
362 Screw, fixing sleeve 3 2.c.2
363 Ring, securing sleeve screw 1 2.c.2
367 Lock, securing flash-hider 1 2.c.2
368 Adjusting screw, securing flash-hider 2 2.c.2
415 Sear 1 2.d
440 Firing pin, extension assembly 1 2.d
2005 08 EN - 241 - Catalog n° 3640084230

216
217 218 221
155 2x
2x
219 2x
156
231 232 235 236 222
257
272 3x
271 367
274 362 363
2x
273 368
413
416
412 2x
411
415
2x
421
432 434
431 435
433
439
440
460 445
480
451 905/125
643
536
661 715 642
716 723
662 717
721
722
731
764
A695
7x
8x
763
A693 A694
A696
Fig. 13.2.b - “Long-term RRP” (905/125) for the M3P machine gun
2005 08 EN - 242 - Catalog n° 3640084230

13.2.2. “Long-term RRP” (905/125) for the M3P machine gun (Fig. 13.2.b)
(continued)
Qty Fig.
set lists
480 Extractor, assembly 1 2.d

536 Pin, accelerator 1 2.e
643 Pin, feed lever 1 2.f
661 Pin, cover axis 1 2.f
662 Split pin 1 2.f
715 Latch, back plate 1 2.g
716 Pin, trigger axis 1 2.g
717 Spring, back plate latch 1 2.g
721 Spring, back plate latch lock 1 2.g
722 Lock, back plate latch 1 2.g
723 Stop, back plate latch lock spring 1 2.g
731 Plate, buffer 1 2.g
763 Trunnion, indexing, plug adjusting 1 2.g
764 Spring, trunnion indexing 1 2.g
A693 Screw, retracting slide bracket (short) 7 2.h
A694 Pin, cover, locking (long) 1 2.h
A695 Pin, safety 1 2.h
A696 Spring washer 8 2.h
2005 08 EN - 243 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 244 - Catalog n° 3640084230

CHAPTER 14 : TOOLS FOR THE M3P MACHINE GUN
Refer to the corresponding documentation of the weapon system.
2005 08 EN - 245 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 246 - Catalog n° 3640084230

15.1. SOLENOID (G1) + SENSOR SUPPORT PLATE ASSEMBLY (A610)
A671
G1
FIRE MGA
Blue
GND SENSOR B
Black
SENSOR C
Brown M3P
12V
D
E
GND F
A651
A620 A611
Diode
A610
2005 08 EN - 247 - Catalog n° 3640084230

2005 08 EN - 248 - Catalog n° 3640084230

CHAPTER 16 : NOTES
2005 08 EN - 249 - Catalog n° 3640084230

DRL 5.6 - 3640084250 - Maint Manual HMP400 Et M3P

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRL 5.6 - 3640084250 - Maint Manual HMP400 Et M3P

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRL 5.6 - 3640084250 - Maint Manual HMP400 Et M3P

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FN HERSTAL

July 2006 (Change 1)

July 2006 (Change 1)

IT MAY NOT BE USED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED

2006 07 EN -1- Catalog n° 3640084260

- Data in this manual is technical only and of no contractual value.

1.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................ 9

CHAPTER 2 : IDENTIFICATION OF THE PARTS

2.1. How to order parts ............................................................................................ 15

CHAPTER 3 : SAFETY INFORMATION

3.1. General warnings and cautions .......................................................................... 50

CHAPTER 4 : RECEPTION OF THE WEAPON SYSTEM

2006 07 EN -2- Catalog n° 3640084260

5.1. Preparatory operations ....................................................................................... 55

CHAPTER 6 : TAKING THE M3P MACHINE GUN OUT OF THE POD

7.1. Container frame [ 1 ] ......................................................................................... 99

2006 07 EN -3- Catalog n° 3640084260

8.1. Container frame [ 1 ] ....................................................................................... 103

2006 07 EN -4- Catalog n° 3640084260

8.5. Recocking system [ 5 ] ..................................................................................... 131

CHAPTER 9 : INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS

9.1. Harmonization procedure ................................................................................ 149

CHAPTER 10 : SPECIAL INTERVENTIONS

10.1. Reversal of the feeding direction ....................................................................... 161

2006 07 EN -5- Catalog n° 3640084260

CHAPTER 12 : LISTS OF REPLACEMENT PARTS

12.1. Lists of Periodical Replacement Parts (PRP) ......................................................... 165

CHAPTER 14 : TOOLS FOR THE HMP 400

CHAPTER 15 : ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

15.1. ABA (Adaptation Box Assembly) [ 8 ] ................................................................. 191

2006 07 EN -6- Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN -7- Catalog n° 3640084260

(b) HMP 400 LCC

(c) HMP 400 LC-GFH

(d) HMP 400 LCC-GFH

W : Main differences with the HMP 400 LC

2006 07 EN -8- Catalog n° 3640084260

2006 07 EN -9- Catalog n° 3640084260

1.3.1. Dimensions and weight

(a) Dimensions of the complete HMP 400 pod weapon system

Overall length 1,940 mm (76.4“) 2,145 mm (84.4“)

Width 410 mm (16.1”)

Height 410 mm (16.1”) 450 mm (17.7”) 410 mm (16.1”) 450 mm (17.7”)

(b) Weight of the complete HMP 400 pod weapon system

HMP 400 HMP 400 HMP 400 HMP 400

Empty ammunition box 86.5 kg 88.0 kg 88.0 kg 89.5 kg

Full ammunition box 138.5 kg 140.0 kg 140.0 kg 141.5 kg

After having fired the contents 94.0 kg 116.5 kg 95.5 kg 118.0 kg

Length 1,907 mm (75.1“)

Width 410 mm (16.1”)

Height 410 mm (16.1”) 450 mm (17.7”) 410 mm (16.1”) 450 mm (17.7”)

(d) Dimensions and weight of the M3P machine gun

(e) Dimensions and weight of the ammunition box

2006 07 EN - 10 - Catalog n° 3640084260

1.3.1. Dimensions and weight (continued)

(f) Weight of the ammunition (calibre .50 (12.7 mm))

Total weight of 400 cartridges : 44.8 kg (98.8 lb)

Total weight of 400 M9 closed links : 7.2 kg (15.9 lb)

1.3.2. Functional data

(b) M3P machine gun